CONDITIONS OF Tendering - norbuilt.com.au · Web viewWhere a price (or a key element of a Tender Response price) is considered well below or above the median price or the Principal’s

REQUEST FOR TENDER

Roper Gulf Regional Council (RGRC)

RFT NUMBER RFT-0854-384-001

RFT TITLEKATHERINE - BORROLOOLA – REDEVELOPMENT OF BORROLOOLA GOVERNMENT BUSINESS HUB LOT 384 ROBINSON ROAD

CLOSE DATE2.00 PM AUSTRALIAN CENTRAL STANDARD TIMEFRIDAY, 05 JULY 2019(LATE TENDERS MAY NOT BE ACCEPTED)

HOW TO RESPOND TO THIS REQUEST FOR TENDERComplete the Tender Response Schedules provided separately. This will become your Tender

which may be lodged in any of the following ways:

By Electronic lodgement facility at: https://www.tenderlink.com/ropergulf/

Note: no other form of delivery is acceptable

www.nt.gov.au

https://www.tenderlink.com/ropergulf/

RFT NUMBER RFT-0854-384-001

RFT TITLEKATHERINE - BORROLOOLA – REDEVELOPMENT OF BORROLOOLA GOVERNMENT BUSINESS HUB LOT 384 ROBINSON ROAD

TABLE OF CONTENTS1 CONDITIONS OF TENDERING......................................................................................42 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT.....................................................................................183 ANNEXURE TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT.................................................214 PRELIMINARY CLAUSES............................................................................................235 SCOPE OF WORKS.....................................................................................................316 INDIGENOUS DEVELOPMENT PLAN.........................................................................417 PROJECT CONTROL...................................................................................................448 HOLD POINTS AND WITNESS POINTS SCHEDULES..............................................489 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT............................................................................5110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................5211 DEMOLITION................................................................................................................6212 GROUNDWORKS.........................................................................................................6413 TERMITE CONTROL....................................................................................................7314 CONCRETE...................................................................................................................7615 STRUCTURAL STEEL.................................................................................................9016 LIGHT STEEL FRAMING.............................................................................................9717 MASONRY..................................................................................................................10218 ROOFING....................................................................................................................11219 CLADDING..................................................................................................................11920 INSULATION, SARKING, AND PLIABLE MEMBRANES.........................................12221 WINDOWS...................................................................................................................12822 GLAZING.....................................................................................................................13423 DOORS........................................................................................................................13724 HARDWARE...............................................................................................................14325 LINING.........................................................................................................................15026 METALWORK.............................................................................................................15427 FIXED FURNITURE....................................................................................................15928 TILING.........................................................................................................................16329 RESILIENT FINISHES................................................................................................17130 PAINTING....................................................................................................................17731 MISCELLANEOUS FIXTURES...................................................................................18732 SANITARY SERVICES...............................................................................................188

Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 2RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

33 WATER........................................................................................................................20734 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS.............................................................21335 WIRING AND ACCESSORIES...................................................................................21736 SWITCHBOARDS.......................................................................................................22237 LUMINAIRES..............................................................................................................22538 COMMUNICATIONS...................................................................................................22839 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION............................................................................23140 FIRE DETECTION.......................................................................................................23341 PAVING.......................................................................................................................23942 FENCING.....................................................................................................................24443 LANDSCAPE..............................................................................................................24944 GENERAL EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS............................................................25445 GRAVITY SEWER CONSTRUCTION........................................................................26346 SCHEDULES...............................................................................................................26447 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS....................................................................................26948 NORTHERN TERRITORY CLIMATE ZONES TABLE...............................................291

Response Schedules are provided separately from this Request for Tender document

Drawings Separate from the RFT


CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

1 CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

1.1 INTERPRETATION OF TERMSUnless the contrary intention is indicated, these Conditions of Tendering are to be interpreted in the same manner and words have the same meaning as in the Contract.

If a date stipulated for doing an act in relation to the RFT is not a business day (being any day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or a public holiday in the Northern Territory, as specified in Schedule 2 of the Public Holidays Act (NT)), the act must be done on the next business day.

In these Conditions of Tendering the following definitions apply:

'Addendum' means any document expressly stated to be an Addendum, which is issued by the Principal varying some provision in the original RFT prior to the stated closing time and date.

‘Annexure’ means the document titled “Annexure to the Conditions of Contract” and contained in this RFT.

‘Contract’ means the document titled ‘Conditions of Contract’ and contained in this RFT.

'RFT' means this request for tender inviting offers and includes all conditions, annexures, schedules, attachments and addenda.

'Tender Response' means all documents lodged by the Tenderer in response to the RFT.

'Tenderer' means the person lodging a Tender Response.

‘Works’ means the works required by the Principal and described in this RFT.

1.2 PREPARING A TENDER RESPONSE

1.2.1 General RequirementsEach Tender Response is required to contain one copy of the documents listed in the clause titled “Documents to be Lodged” in these Conditions of Tendering.

Tender Responses should contain:

a) if the Tenderer is an individual, their full name;b) if the Tenderer is company or organisation, its company, business or trading name and

unique business identifier required by law (e.g. ACN/ARBN/ABN);c) the address for service of any notices necessary or required to be or which may be

served on or given to the Tenderer in connection with its Tender Response and any subsequent contract arising out of acceptance of the Tender Response.

Each Tender Response (excluding attachments or supplementary information provided by the Tenderer) must be in English. A Tender Response that does not comply with this requirement will be declared inadmissible for assessment.

1.2.2 Tenderers to Inform ThemselvesTenderers must, at their own expense, inform themselves of all circumstances and conditions relating to submitting a Tender Response and carrying out the Works. This includes compliance with all legislation, an inspection of the relevant site(s) and satisfying themselves as to the correctness and sufficiency of the RFT documentation.



1.2.3 Tender CostsThe Tenderer is responsible for all costs associated with preparing a Tender Response.

The Principal will not be liable for any expense or loss, which may be incurred by any Tenderer in the preparation or submission of its Tender Response.

1.2.4 Compliance with NT Procurement CodeIn preparing its Tender Response, submitting its Tender Response and throughout the tendering period the Tenderer must comply with the Northern Territory Procurement Code (‘Code’).

A copy of the Code is available at:

https://nt.gov.au/industry/government/procurement-conditions-framework/procurement-code

If the Principal is of the reasonable opinion that the Tenderer has not complied with the Code, the Principal will declare the Tender Response inadmissible for assessment.

1.2.5 EnquiriesShould the Tenderer:

a) have any doubts as to the meaning of any part of the RFT; orb) find any discrepancy, error or omission in the RFT,

the Tenderer should seek clarification from the person listed below, as early as possible but in any event before the stated time and date for closing of the RFT.

For enquiries about the Works contact: Name Terry BurnsTelephone 0417 803 792Email [email protected]

The Principal may decline to provide a clarification or further information requested by a Tenderer.

Any clarification provided by the Principal may be provided to all prospective Tenderers.

1.2.6 Probity AdvisorThe Principal may appoint an independent probity advisor to advise on probity issues arising during the course of the RFT process. The details of the probity advisor, if any, are contained below. Any issues about the integrity of the RFT process should be addressed to the probity advisor.

Probity Advisor Name Not ApplicableTelephone Not ApplicableEmail Not Applicable

1.2.7 AddendumThe Principal may vary, update or clarify the RFT at any time before the stated time and date for closing of the RFT through the issue of an Addendum.

No explanation or amendment to the RFT will be binding unless in the form of an Addendum. Any Addendum issued under this clause will become part of this RFT.


https://nt.gov.au/industry/government/procurement-conditions-framework/procurement-code


It is the sole responsibility of Tenderers to ensure that the contact details held by Quotations and Tenders Online Service are correct and up-to-date in order for them to receive Addendum.

1.2.8 Best OfferNotwithstanding anything which may be done pursuant to the assessment process, the Principal intends to select the successful Tenderer primarily on the basis of the Tender Responses lodged but will also take into consideration any other information publicly available or known to the Principal. Accordingly, Tenderers should provide their best offer in their Tender Response.

1.3 TENDER RESPONSE VALIDITYTender Responses must remain valid and open for acceptance by the Principal for a period of 60 days.

If a Tender Response is not formal in accordance with these Conditions of Tendering, the validity period will commence from the date on which the Tender Response is formalised to the satisfaction of the Principal.

Upon the expiry of the validity period:

a) a Tenderer may withdraw their Tender Response by written notice to the Principal; or b) the Principal may request an extension to the validity period.

1.4 SITE INSPECTIONPrior to submitting a Tender Response the Tenderer is encouraged to inspect the site(s) relevant to the Works. A charter flight from Katherine for 1 person per company will be arranged within the first week of the tender period.

Tenderer may be included on this charter by contacting the following during business hours:

Permission to visit site contact Name Terry BurnsTelephone 0417 803 792

1.5 INDUSTRY BRIEFINGAn industry briefing is not applicable to this RFT.

1.6 INDUSTRY ACCREDITATIONThe Tenderer is required, at the time and date for closing of the RFT, to be accredited or recognised by Contractor Accreditation Limited (‘CAL’).

Accreditation must be to a rating that is equal to or higher than the total value of the Tender Response in the CAL category and group described below.

Industry Accreditation RequirementsBUILDING / Commercial or BUILDING /

Commercial / New Work - Restricted up to 2 Stories

The Tender Response should include the Tenderer’s CAL registration number.



If, at the time and date for closing of the RFT, the Tenderer requires an upgrade of the rating of its existing CAL accreditation, in the applicable category and group, the Tenderer has fourteen (14) calendar days from the stated time and date for closing of the RFT to:

a) obtain an upgrade of the rating of that existing CAL accreditation; andb) provide written evidence of the upgrade to the Principal’s contact person identified in the

Annexure.

Nothing in this clause allows a Tenderer to obtain CAL accreditation in a new CAL category and group after the stated time and date for closing of the RFT.

Any Tender Response not complying with the requirements of this clause may be declared inadmissible for assessment.

The Tenderer must ensure that each Sub-contractor engaged in the provisions of Works equal to or greater that $100,000 is accredited or recognised by CAL at the time and date of closing of the RFT.

More information on CAL, accreditation details and application forms can be obtained from:

CAL RegistrarPO Box 125Parap NT 0804Telephone: (08) 8922 4600Facsimile: (08) 8984 4003Website: www.accreditation.com.au

1.7 ALTERNATIVE TENDERSTenderers may submit alternative proposals.

Alternative Tender Responses should be clearly identified as an “Alternative Tender”.

Tenderers are encouraged to offer options or solutions, which may (for example in a novel or innovative way), contribute to Principal’s ability to carry out its business in a more cost-effective manner. These may be related to the outputs; or functional, performance and technical aspects of the requirement.

Where a Tenderer submits an offer which meets the requirements in an alternative and practical manner, it may include any supplementary material, together with associated prices, which demonstrates in detail that such an alternative will fully achieve and/or exceed all the specified requirements, together with references as to why the additional features may be advantageous.

Tenderers may submit alternatives to equipment, plant or materials specified except for those items for which it is specified and/or nominated below that alternatives will not be considered. Alternatives will not be considered for: The floor plan: The floor plan was selected through stakeholder consultation and shall not be amended in an alternative tender. A Tender Response which fails to comply with this requirement will be deemed inadmissible for assessment.

1.8 PART OFFER AND PART ACCEPTANCETenders are required to be submitted for the whole of the Works.


http://www.accreditation.com.au/


1.9 PRICING

1.9.1 General RequirementsUnless otherwise specified, prices must:

a) be stated in Australian dollars;b) be inclusive of:

i. GST (where applicable);ii. all costs required to carrying out the Works, including labour, materials,

transport, freight, overheads, profits and charges; andiii. all taxes, fees, duties, royalties, premiums, costs, charges and the like which will

be due and payable to any person or authority under the Contract.

Unless otherwise required, pricing must be submitted for each item in the Schedule and failure to price all items may result in the Tender Response being declared inadmissible for assessment.

1.9.2 Estimated QuantitiesUnless otherwise specified, any quantities given in the RFT are not guarantees as to the amount of work to be provided to the successful Tenderer, but will be used for assessment purposes only.

1.9.3 Treatment of Low or Aberrant PricesWhere a price (or a key element of a Tender Response price) is considered well below or above the median price or the Principal’s estimated value, the Tenderer may be requested to confirm the tendered price or respond to questions regarding particular aspects of the Tender Response. The Tenderer may also be requested to provide written confirmation that the requirement and contractual obligations relevant to the Works are fully understood.

The Principal may, at its discretion, either:

a) proceed with the evaluation of the Tender Response; orb) where there is evidence that acceptance of the Tender Response may result in an

unacceptable contract outcome or pose a substantial risk to the completion of the Works or the sustainability of the Tenderer, set the Tender Response aside from further assessment.

1.9.4 Competitive NeutralityGovernment owned businesses, Local, Territory, State and Federal Government agencies and authorities responding to this RFT must submit two prices against each item in the pricing schedule. One price is to be the tendered price offered and the other being the adjusted competitively neutral price. The competitively neutral price is to be prepared in accordance with the Northern Territory Government’s Competitive Tendering Guidelines.

A copy of the Guidelines is available at:

https://nt.gov.au/industry/government/procurement-conditions-framework/competitive-tendering-guidelines

1.10IMPARTIALITY OF REQUIREMENTSUnless otherwise specified if an item is specified as being similar or equivalent to a particular brand in the Scope of Works this is to set an acceptable standard only and no preference is given to that brand.





Any items offered must be at least of the same standard and potential as specified in the Scope of Works, or as is inherent in the equivalent brand. The Principal may accept items of higher standard than specified if the items offer better value-for-money outcomes. Where such is being offered full details by way of illustrations, catalogues, brochures and the like, should be provided with the Tender Response.

1.11CONFLICT OF INTERESTFor the purpose of this clause a “Conflict” means any matter, circumstance, interest, or activity affecting the Tenderer (including the officers, employees, agents and subcontractors of the Tenderer) which may or may appear to impair the ability of the Tenderer to perform the Contract diligently and independently.

Tenderers must declare any Conflict in their Tender Response.

Tenderers must not place themselves in a position that may, or does, give rise to a Conflict during the RFT process.

If at any time during the RFT process, a Tenderer is aware that an actual, potential or perceived Conflict exists or may arise, that Tenderer must immediately notify the Principal.

If a Conflict exists or arises during the RFT, the Principal may:

a) declare the Tender Response inadmissible for assessment;b) enter into discussions to seek to resolve the Conflict; orc) take any other action it considers appropriate.

1.12PROJECT CONTROLThe Works required under the Contract are to be carried out using Project Control.

The Tenderer is required to submit a Project Control Summary with the Tender Response. Any Tender Response in which the Project Control Summary is not provided may result in the Tender Response being declared inadmissible for further assessment.

The Tenderer if awarded the Contract will be required to comply with the section titled "Project Control" in the RFT.

1.13WORK HEALTH AND SAFETY ACCREDITATION SCHEMEThe Tenderer is not required to carry out the Works using the Work Health and Safety Accreditation Scheme (Cth).

1.14BUILDING CODE 2016The Tenderer is not required to carry out the Works using the Code for the Tendering and Performance of Building Work 2016 (Building Code).

1.15LOCAL CONTENTThe NT Government is committed to supporting businesses that use local contractors and suppliers and hire and train Territorians. Assessment will take into consideration businesses that demonstrate a commitment to supporting and employing Territorians including Indigenous Territorians, accredited training for its employees and sourcing goods and services from local businesses.



1.15.1 Apprentices and TraineesThe Tenderer will, if awarded the Contract, employ and train a minimum number, as prescribed below, of apprentices/trainees who are registered in the Northern Territory:

Schedule of Minimum Number of Apprentices/Trainees.

Value Of Contract ($000) Trade Apprentice/Trainee Non-Trade Trainee

300 – 599 1 -600 – 999 2 -1000 – 1999 3 12000 – 2999 4 13000 – Plus 5 1Maximum Requirement 5 1

Employees undertaking apprenticeships/traineeships training will only be recognised for assessment purposes if:

a) a signed training contract for the apprentice/trainee is registered with Australian Apprenticeships NT; or

b) the apprentice’s/trainee’s details appear on the Data Entry Level Training Agreement (DELTA) database, maintained by the Department of Trade, Business and Innovation; or

c) the training being undertaken is a recognised accredited training course.

In complying with the use of accredited apprentices/trainees, the Tenderer may:

a) directly employ apprentices/trainees;b) utilise group training scheme apprentices/trainees;c) utilise sub-contractors apprentices/trainees; ord) utilise any combination of the above.

For contract values of $1 million and above one (1) non-trade trainee may be substituted for a trade apprentice/trainee for the purpose of determining compliance with the Schedule of Minimum Number of Apprentices/Trainees.

The level of compliance with this requirement will be reported on at the end of the Contract and taken into consideration on future quotations or tenders for a period of twelve (12) months.

Further information on NT Government Policy on the use of apprentices/trainees on Government Contracts and accredited training programs can be obtained from:

Workforce NTDepartment of Trade, Business and Innovation2nd Floor, Development House76 The EsplanadeDarwin NT 0800Telephone: (08) 8935 7732Facsimile: (08) 8901 1326email: [email protected]

Or

GPO Box 3200Darwin NT 0801

Further information regarding the employment of apprentices/trainees can be obtained from:Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 10RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road


Australian Apprenticeships NT38 Woods StreetDarwin NT 0800Telephone: 1300 137 130 or Telephone: (08) 8935 8200email: [email protected]

Or

GPO Box 3049Darwin NT 0801

Or

12/9 Whittaker StreetAlice Springs NT 0870Telephone: (08) 8955 6955

1.15.2 Indigenous requirements for Regional CouncilsThe Tenderer will, if awarded the Contract, maintain an indigenous employment rate which will be no less than thirty per cent (30%) of the total workforce engaged in the delivery of the Works.

1.15.3 Indigenous Development PlanThe Works have been identified as an opportunity to develop employment outcomes for Indigenous Territorians. The Tenderer is required to submit, as part of its Tender Response, an Indigenous Development Plan Proposal.

Any Tender Response not complying with the requirements of this clause may be declared inadmissible for further assessment.

1.16INDUSTRY PARTICIPATION PLANThe Tenderer will not be required to enter into an Industry Participation Plan.

1.17SIGNING DOCUMENTSThe Tenderer is required to sign its Tender Response as indicated below:

a) If the Tenderer is a company:

i. with its common seal, and the fixing of the seal witnessed by:

• two (2) directors of the company; or• a director and a company secretary of the company; or• for a proprietary company that has a sole director who is also the sole

company secretary – that director; orii. without its common seal, if signed by:

• two (2) directors of the company; or• a director and a company secretary of the company; or• for a proprietary company that has a sole director who is also the sole

company secretary – that director; oriii. by being signed by a person or persons authorised by the company to bind it in

contract. In such circumstances a copy of the authorisation must be submitted with the Tender Response.

b) In the case of a firm (including a firm trading under a business or trading name and a partnership):


mailto:[email protected]


i. by signature of each proprietor of the firm; orii. in the case of firms having more than five (5) proprietors, by signature of the

proprietors authorised to bind the firm in Contract. In the case of the later evidence of the authority of those proprietors to bind the firm may be required by the Principal.

Where the Tenderer is lodging its Tender Response via the Quotations and Tenders Online eLodgement Service, there is no requirement to complete the "signature" block on the Declaration by Tenderer form.

1.18LODGEMENT OF TENDER RESPONSE

1.18.1 Lodgement Unless otherwise directed by the Principal, Tender Responses must be lodged using one of the following methods:

a) prepaid post, directed to the postal address stated on the cover to the RFT; b) facsimile, directed to the facsimile number stated on the cover to the RFT; orc) electronically, against the corresponding Tender number using Quotations and Tenders

Online eLodgement through the address stated on the cover to the RFT or if the Principal has approached a specific Tenderer(s) and provided access to the RFT through a link or web address, electronically using the link or address provided.

Failure to comply with the above requirements may result in the Tender Response being declared inadmissible for assessment.

If, for any reason, a part of a Tender Response (excluding the pricing schedule(s)) becomes corrupt, illegible, inadequate or incomplete as a result of transmission or storage, the Principal may request an additional copy of the Tender Response.

If, for any reason, the pricing schedule(s) contained in a Tender Response becomes corrupt, illegible, inadequate or incomplete as a result of transmission or storage the Tender Response may be declared inadmissible for assessment.

For enquiries about lodgement contact Name Keith KumarawaduTelephone (08) 8972 0405Email [email protected]

1.18.2 Documents to be LodgedThe Tenderer will complete in full, and submit one copy of the documents listed below.

Failure to provide all documents may result in the Tender Response being declared inadmissible for assessment.

Documents to be LodgedTENDERER DETAILS

DECLARATION BY TENDERER LUMP SUM PRICE AND BREAK-DOWN

SCHEDULE OF ASSUMPTIONS AND QUALIFICATIONSRESPONSES TO ASSESSMENT CRITERIA

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN PROPOSALWORK HEALTH AND SAFETY (WHS) MANAGEMENT

INDIGENOUS DEVELOPMENT PLAN PROPOSALPROJECT CONTROL SUMMARY



1.18.3 InadmissibilityUnless otherwise specified, Tender Responses provided to the Principal using a method that is not specified in clause 1.18.1, including but not limited to orally or electronically may be declared inadmissible for assessment.

1.18.4 Closing Time and DateThe RFT will close at the time and on the date stated on the front cover of the RFT.

1.18.5 Late TendersTender Responses are to be received, in full, by the time and date for closing of the RFT.

Failure to lodge a Tender Response, or part thereof, before the time and date for closing of the RFT may result in the Tender Response being declared inadmissible for assessment.

1.19ADMISSIBILITYUnless otherwise specified, if a Tenderer fails to comply with a requirement as set out in these Conditions of Tendering, their Tender Response may be declared inadmissible for assessment.

In determining whether a Tender Response is admissible for assessment the Principal will consider:

a) whether admitting the Tender Response will compromise the integrity of the tender process;

b) whether the Tenderer has or is likely to gain an unfair advantage;c) reasons for the Tenderer’s failure to comply with a requirement;d) whether the Tender Response is capable of assessment;e) whether the Tender Response was mishandled by the Principal or a third party; andf) evidence of unfair practices.

1.20OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTSThis RFT is, and will remain, the property of the Principal. It may only be used for the purpose of preparing a Tender Response.

All Tender Responses become the property of the Principal upon submission and will not be returned to Tenderers.

By lodging a Tender Response, a Tenderer licenses the Principal to reproduce the whole or any portion of the Tender Response for the purposes of the conduct of the RFT, including assessment, clarifications, resultant contract negotiation, contract management, and anything else in relation to these purposes.

Nothing in this clause changes or affects the ownership of copyright or other intellectual property rights that may subsist in the Tender Response.

1.21CHANGES TO THE CONDITIONS

1.21.1 Conditions of TenderingTenderers are not permitted to request changes or propose alternatives to these Conditions of Tendering.



Any Tenderer who proposes a change will be requested to withdraw the change in order to comply with the Conditions of Tendering.

If the changes are not withdrawn the Tender Response will be declared inadmissible for assessment.

1.21.2 Conditions of ContractTenderers are not permitted to request changes, or propose alternatives to the Conditions of Contract applicable to the RFT.

Any Tenderer requesting changes to the Conditions of Contract, or proposing alternative conditions of contract may be requested to withdraw the changes in order to comply with the Conditions of Tendering.

If the changes are not withdrawn the Tender Response may be declared inadmissible for assessment.

1.22TENDER ASSESSMENT CRITERIASelection of the successful Tenderer will be based on a best value for Territory assessment of Tender Responses against the tender assessment criteria specified in this clause 1.22.

An example of the types of considerations that may form part of each criterion are set out below, these elements are not to be considered exclusive to any specific RFT.

a) Past Performance:i. Performance history including experience in completing similar Works and the extent

to which previous undertakings were achieved.ii. Standard and quality of Works previously completed.iii. Extent of supervision previously required.iv. Disputes and claims history.v. References (including CAL if applicable).vi. Safe and fair workplace record.

b) Timeliness:i. Ability to manage the completion of the Works within timeframes specified.ii. Vulnerabilities to the completion timeframe.

c) Capacity:i. Ability to complete the Works including the experience and capacity of nominated

personnel or subcontractors.ii. Number, details and value of contracts currently in progress.iii. Appropriate CAL accreditation (if applicable).iv. Legal action pending.v. Financial capacity (including current credit rating).vi. Risk.

d) Work Health and Safety:i. Has a documented Work Health and Safety Management Plan.ii. Has identified the key hazards & risks associated with this specific project and what

controls will be put in place to manage them.iii. Has outlined the arrangements that will be put in place to manage the work health

and safety issues for this specific project.e) Local Content:

iv. Enhancement of industry and business capability in the Northern Territory.v. Improved capacity and quality in carrying out the Works.vi. Accredited training programs currently supported by the Tenderer or that will be

supported or utilised in carrying out the Works.vii. Proposed level of usage of apprentices and trainees in carrying out the Works.



viii. Proposed number of jobs for Territorians that will be supported or utilised in carrying out the Works.

ix. Proposed level of involvement of local Indigenous enterprise in the Works.x. Proposed level of usage of Territory Enterprises as sub-contractors or suppliers.xi. Regional development opportunities.xii. Any Northern Territory research and development proposals being undertaken or

proposed by the Tenderer.f) Innovation:

i. New technology.ii. Alternative solutions.

g) Scope Specific Criteria:i. Those criteria that are considered relevant to the nature of the Works being carried

out. Scope Specific Criteria could include, but are not limited to, environmental issues or requirements, technical requirements and specific experience and expertise applicable to the Works required.

h) Price:i. Upfront costs.ii. Through-life costs, for example:

• Cost of ongoing training of Agency staff; and• Cost of transit in and out or implementation from one provider to another.

iii. Any other factors that would impact on costs to the Principal.iv. Where a shortlisting process is utilised, Price will not be the only determining factor.

1.22.1 Disclosure of WeightingsAssessment criteria and percentage weightings applicable to the RFT are as follows:

Past Performance 10%Timeliness 10%Capacity 10%Work Health and Safety 10%Local Content 30%Price 30%TOTAL 100%

1.23CONDUCT OF THE ASSESSMENT

1.23.1 GeneralFor the purpose of the assessment, clarification, negotiation and reporting of this RFT the Principal may disclose information acquired or developed during the assessment process (including a copy of the Tender Response) to Ministers and other Government representatives, consultants, advisors, other Agencies and statutory authorities in order to comply with obligations, exercise rights under this RFT and enable effective management or auditing of the Principal’s activities.

1.23.2 Clarification and Additional InformationThe Tenderer may be called upon to clarify information contained in their Tender Response or to supply information in addition to the Tender Response to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Principal that the Tenderer has the ability to carry out the Works.



The Tenderer must within the time specified comply with any such requests. Failure to submit any or all of the information required, in the time stipulated, may result in the Tender Response being declared inadmissible for further assessment.

1.23.3 Security, probity and financial checksThe Principal reserves the right during any part of the assessment of Tender Responses to perform such security, probity and financial investigations and checks as the Principal may determine are necessary in relation to Tenderers, their employees, officers, partners, associates, subcontractors or related entities and their employees, officers and subcontractors. These checks may include (without limitation) ascertaining in relation to each Tenderer:

a) security;b) financial viability and stability;c) managerial and technical capacity; d) corporate history;e) significant litigation (past, present or pending); andf) any other matters the Principal considers relevant.

Tenderers must, at their cost, promptly provide the Principal with such information or documentation that the Principal requires in order to undertake such investigations or checks.

The Principal may declare a Tender Response inadmissible for further assessment if the Tenderer does not promptly provide all reasonable assistance to the Principal in this regard or based on the outcomes of the investigations or checks.

1.24NEGOTIATIONSa) The Principal may engage in detailed discussions and negotiations with one or more

Tenderers.b) The selection of Tenderers under this clause does not bind the Principal to a contractual

relationship and is not an indication that the Tenderer will be successful.c) The result of any successful negotiations will be incorporated into the Contract.

1.25NOTIFICATION OF ACCEPTANCEThe Principal will not be bound to accept the lowest or any Tender Response.

The successful Tenderer will be notified in writing on the completion of the RFT process (‘Notice of Acceptance’).

Unless otherwise specified, the Notice of Acceptance forms a binding agreement between the Principal and the successful Tenderer. On acceptance of its Tender Response the Tenderer will comply with clause 6.2 of the Contract. The Notice of Acceptance will, at the Principal’s discretion, be issued by pre-paid post, facsimile or email to the address stated in the Tender Response.

A Tenderer should not act on any representations or statements made by the Principal, its employees or agents prior to the issue of the Notice of Acceptance.

The Principal may publish details of the successful Tender Response, including the name of the Tenderer, value of the contract awarded and a description of the Works.

1.26UNSUCCESSFUL TENDER RESPONSESUnsuccessful Tenderers will be informed in writing of the outcome of their Tender Response at the conclusion of the RFT process.



Tenderers may request a debriefing as to why their Tender Response was unsuccessful. This is for the purpose of assisting Tenderers to improve their competitiveness for future tenders.

Information will be confined to discussion of the Tenderer’s Tender Response and under no circumstances will information relating to another Tender Response be disclosed.


CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

2 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTThe Conditions of Contract applicable to this RFT are the Northern Territory Government Conditions of Contract – National Public Works Council (NPWC) 5.1.01 (November 2018)

2.1 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTThe following Special Conditions are in addition to the Conditions of Contract applicable to this Request for Tender.

Words and phrases used in these Special Conditions that are defined in the Conditions of Tendering or the Conditions of Contract have the meanings given to them in the relevant conditions.

If there is a conflict between these Special Conditions and the Conditions of Contract, these Special Conditions will take precedence.

2.1.1 Assignment and Sub-ContractingClause 10 Assignment and Sub-Contracting is amended by the insertion of sub-clause 10.4 Sub-Contractor Protections:

“10.4 Sub-Contractor Protections

Where the total value of the head contract is $500 000 or greater and the total value of an individual sub-contract is $50 000 or greater, the following shall apply also:

(a) Upon submission by the Contractor of a progress claim to the Principal, which includes works carried out by a Sub-Contractor in performance of the head contract, the Contractor shall provide to the Principal a declaration from the sub-contractor:

(i) Confirming payment of the sub-contractor’s previous tax invoice with supporting evidence; or

(ii) Detailing the status of the dispute relating to the sub-contractor’s previous tax invoice if it is unpaid.

(b) The declaration shall cover the period up to the date of the Contractor’s progress claim referred to in sub-clause (a).

(c) Failure to submit a declaration, the submission of a false declaration, or the submission of a declaration under sub-clause (a)(ii) by the Contractor may result in:

(i) the preparation of the Contractor's Performance Report identifying failures; and/or

(ii) the retention of any unpaid monies under (a)(ii) by the Principal out of the progress payment due to the Contractor; and

1. where it is the subject of a dispute under the Construction Contracts (Security of Payments) Act 2004 (NT), the Principal may pay the amount to the sub-contractor in accordance with the terms of the resolution of that claim once fully resolved and the amount shall be a debt due from the Contractor to the Principal.



2. where it is the subject of a dispute otherwise than under the Construction Contracts (Security of Payments) Act 2004 (NT), if any sub-contractor obtains a court order in respect of moneys referred to in this sub-clause (a)(ii) and produces to the Principal the court order and a statutory declaration that it remains unpaid, the Principal may pay the amount of the order, and costs included in the order, to the sub-contractor and the amount shall be a debt due from the Contractor to the Principal.”

2.1.2 SiteClause 42 Site is amended by the insertion of these additional sub-clauses:

“42.8 Firearms

Do not bring into site any firearms, controlled weapons or construction tools capable of launching a missile or projectile unless approved by the Superintendent.

42.9 Preservation of Wildlife

The Contractor shall not introduce any animal of any kind to the site. No domestic pets shall be permitted on the site or in any construction camp. The Contractor shall not injure, kill, capture or have in possession any native animal, bird, reptile, fish, egg or habitat relations to native wildlife; or lay any poisonous bait or trap. Where trenches or other excavations are left open overnight, the Contractor shall leave tree branches or similar climbable and non-electrically conductive objects against the sides of the excavation at regular intervals to allow escape of trapped wildlife.

42.10 Special Area Provision

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain all necessary permits required for entry or working on Aboriginal Land and to pay all costs involved. Contractors are directed to the Northern Land Council for the granting of permits.

42.11 Alcoholic Beverages and Pornography

Certain areas of the Northern Territory have been declared “Prescribed Areas” under the provisions of the Northern Territory Emergency Response Act 2007. It is an offence to bring, possess, consume, supply, sell or control liquor in a Prescribed Area without a liquor permit or licence; or bring, possess, supply, sell or transport pornography in a Prescribed Area.

42.12 Breaches of Restrictions and Rules

The Contractor will be deemed to have made his workforce and sub-contractors aware of the foregoing restrictions and site rules as a condition of employment on the works.”

Tenderers please note:Sections 1 and 2 comprising the Conditions of Tender and Conditions of Contract are provided separately with the RFT document.

Electronic copies are also available at:

www.nt.gov.au/industry/government/procurement-conditions-framework

Alternatively hard copies (paper) are available from the point of issue of the RFT.

You are advised to ensure you are familiar with the rules of tendering and with the contractual obligations of the parties under any subsequent Contract. You are further advised to reference


https://nt.gov.au/industry/government/procurement-conditions-framework


the Annexure to Conditions of Tendering and Contract, on the following pages, which detail specific requirements applicable to this RFT.


PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

3 ANNEXURE TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1 All payments made under the Contract shall be made at(Clause 1)

KatherineNorthern Territory

2 The Principal is(Clause 2)

Roper Gulf Regional Council

3 The Superintendent shall be(Clause 2)

The person who is for the time being performing the duties of the Chief Executive Officer

4 The basis of payment shall be(Clause 3.1)

Lump Sum

5 Adjustment for Rise & Fall is:(Clause 3.2)

Not Allowed

6 The time for lodgement for the priced copy of the Bill of Quantities is(Clause 4.1)

Not Applicable

7 The amount of security is(Clause 5.2)

a) Where the contract sum equals or exceeds $1,000,000.00: Security equivalent to 3% of the Contract sum, or

b) Where the contract sum is less than $1,000,000.00: Nil security.

8 The Address of the Principal for service of documents is(Clause 7.3)

The Chief Executive OfficerRoper Gulf Regional CouncilPO Box 1321Katherine NT 0851

9 The address of the Superintendent for service of documents is(Clause 7.3)

Roper Gulf Regional CouncilPO Box 1321Katherine NT 0851

10 An Indigenous Development Plan is:(Clause 17) Required

11 An Industry Participation Plan is:(Clause 18) Not Required

12 Building Code is:(Clause 19)

Not Required

13 The value of materials to be supplied by the Principal is(Clause 25)

Not Applicable

14 The assessment for insurance purposes of architects, engineers, and surveyors fees is

Not Applicable


PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

(Clause 25)

15The assessment for insurance purposes of the costs of demolition and removal of debris is(Clause 25)

Not Applicable

16 Limitation of Liability:(Clause 27)

Not Applicable

17 The amount of Public Liability insurance shall be not less than(Clause 28)

$10,000,000.00

18 The amount of Professional Indemnity insurance shall be not less than:(Clause 29)

Not Required

19Work Health and Safety Accreditation Scheme is:(Clause 33.1)

Not Required

20The time for giving possession of the site is:(Clause 42.1)

Within 14 days of acceptance of tender

21The time for Practical Completion of the works shall be:(Clause 53.2)and, for each separable part of the Works:

Within 20 weeks of date of acceptance of tenderNot Applicable

22 Liquidated Damages for the Works shall be(Clause 53.5)

$4,900.00 per week

for each separable part of the Works shall be: Not Applicable

23

The Defects Liability Period for the Works shall be:(Clause 55)and, for each separable part of the Works shall be:

52 weeks

Not Applicable

24 The amount of retention monies is(Clause 60.1) 5%


PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

4 PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

4.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKSA general outline of the work to be carried out under the Contract comprises:

(a) The installation and later removal of temporary demountable offices for the duration of the redevelopment of the existing Borroloola Government Business Hub.

(b) The redevelopment of the existing Borroloola Government Business Hub.

The works includes certification of structures built as described in this RFT, inclusive of Permit to Build, Certificate of Occupancy, “As Constructed” drawings, and final certificates as described.

4.2 SITE OF WORKSThe site of the Works is Lot 384 Robinson Road, Borroloola for the Business Hub redevelopment, and adjacent Lot 385 Broad Street, Borroloola for the installation and later removal of temporary demountable offices.

Where work is required to be carried out in easements or on land adjacent to the site for the purpose of connecting services or joining up of roads etc. ensure that the appropriate licences and approvals are obtained for work in those particular areas.

4.3 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND SERVICESExisting services may be present within the Lots. Contractor to confirm location of services prior to excavations commencing. Any connection, disconnection or interference with existing services shall be carried out under the supervision of the Superintendent to whom reasonable notice shall be given by the Contractor of his intention.

4.4 BUILDING APPROVALS – (PERMIT BY CONTRACTOR – DESIGN AND CONSTRUCT)

Obtain Building Permits and Occupancy Permits for all the Works including demolition and construction of new assets. The Contract is to include all costs associated with the requirements of this clause.

The works are located in the township of Borroloola. Borroloola is a Declared Building Control Area. The Northern Territory Government statutory building approval process applies.

The Contractor is to pay the mandatory contributions for the Water Sewer System Extension Policy (WASSEP) and the Power Networks Capital Contributions Policy (PNCCP).

More information is available:

Water and Sewer System Extension Policy (WASSEP)

https://www.powerwater.com.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0018/17082/wassep.pdfPower Networks Capital Contributions Policy (PNCCP)

https://www.powerwater.com.au/networks_and_infrastructure/power_networks/ccr

The Contractor is to pay all costs associated with the building approval process, inspections and certificates/letters and Certificate or Letter Occupancy/Occupancy Permit other than the cost of the Building Permit/Letter of Compliance.


https://www.powerwater.com.au/networks_and_infrastructure/power_networks/ccr

https://www.powerwater.com.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0018/17082/wassep.pdf

PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

Unless otherwise specified the Contractor is responsible for connection of all water, drainage, sewerage, gas and electricity services and he shall apply for all relevant permits and pay all associated fees and/or charges which are levied by the appropriate Authority.

A Building Permit will be provided to the Superintendent for these works.

Construct the Works in accordance with the conditions of the Building Permit/Letter of Compliance. On Practical Completion of the Works, hand the completed Section-69 Builders Declaration to the private Building Certifier.

Notifiable Inspections: Engage the services of the Building Certifier who issued the Building Permit. Engage the services of all relevant discipline engineers required for the project. Give the Building Certifier and the engineers sufficient notice so that Notifiable Inspections, as listed on the Building Permit, may be made.

Quality Assurance: Where applicable, insert hold points for the Notifiable Inspections into the inspection and test plans of the relevant trades.

Collect the Section-40 Certificates of Compliance and the final inspection certificates from the relevant Reporting and Consent Authorities and hand to the Building Certifier as soon as possible after Practical Completion.

Collect the Certificate or Letter Occupancy/Occupancy Permit from the private Building Certifier and provide to the Superintendent as soon as possible after it is issued. The Superintendent can then issue a Certificate of Practical Completion if satisfied that the Works are at Practical Completion.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

A Work Instruction - Procedure for Building Certification is available via

https://infrastructure.nt.gov.au/specification-services/tenderers-contractors-consultants-assistance

This document provides additional useful information.

4.5 SURVEYS AND SETTING OUTThe Contractor shall be responsible for all setting out required for the proper execution of the Works by a licenced surveyor. The design lines and cadastre boundaries have not been pegged.

4.6 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS INCLUDED IN CONTRACTThe following drawings shall form part of the Contract.

ORIGINAL BUILD/EXISTING STRUCTURES FROM NTG BUILDING RECORDS(MAY NOT BE AS-BUILT)

DRAWING NO. AMEND NO. TITLE

NO NUMBER REFERENCE: DETACHED TOILET BLOCK 1988

C10236-S-1 REFERENCE: ORIGINAL HALL BUILDING 1989

C10236-S-2 REFERENCE: ORIGINAL HALL BUILDING 1989

TBC 1016 1 REFERENCE: GROUND FLOOR BUILD IN 1988




PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

ORIGINAL BUILD/EXISTING STRUCTURES FROM NTG BUILDING RECORDS(MAY NOT BE AS-BUILT)


CK150 REFERENCE: BUILD IN 1990 (2 SHEETS)

CK 377-2 A REFERENCE: BUILD IN LIBRARY 1991

(SHEET 1 OF 2 ONLY)

CK 537-1 A REFERENCE: BUILD IN OFFICES 1993

T451-1-2-3-4 REFERENCE: BUILD IN AND ATTACHED TOILETS 1995

(4 SHEETS: T451-1, T451-2, T451-3, T451-4)

0016 INTERNAL CONNECTION DRAINS SEWERAGE UPGRADE 2013

0008 INTERNAL CONNECTION DRAINS SEWERAGE UPGRADE 2013

PROPOSED REDEVELOPMENT DESIGN DRAWINGS


ARCHITECTURALTD-0854-384-AR-01 B LOCATION PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-02 B SITE PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-03 B EXISTING AND DEMOLITION GROUND FLOOR PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-04 B EXISTING AND DEMOLITION FIRST FLOOR PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-05 B PROPOSED GROUND FLOOR PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-06 B PROPOSED FIRST FLOOR PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-07 B SOUTH ELEVATION

TD-0854-384-AR-08 B EAST ELEVATION NORTH ELEVATION

TD-0854-384-AR-09 B CROSS SECTION AT A-A

TD-0854-384-AR-10 B GROUND FLOOR FIRE MANAGEMENT PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-11 B FIRST FLOOR FIRE MANAGEMENT PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-12 B GROUND FLOOR FURNITURE LAYOUT PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-13 B FIRST FLOOR FURNITURE LAYOUT PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-14 B GROUND FLOOR REFLECTIVE CEILING PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-15 B FIRST FLOOR REFLECTIVE CEILING PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-16 B GROUND FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-17 B FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN

TD-0854-384-AR-18 B DOOR AND WINDOW SCHEDULE

TD-0854-384-AR-19 B STAIR PLAN AND SECTION AND DETAILS


PRELIMINARY CLAUSES



CERTIFIED STRUCTURALTD-0854-384-ST-01 0 CONCRETE/FOOTING/COLUMN LAYOUT

TD-0854-384-ST-02 0 ELEVATOR SHAFT/WELL/BASE DETAIL

TD-0854-384-ST-03 0 ELEVATOR SHAFT/WELL/BASE/ROOF DETAIL

TD-0854-384-ST-04 0 CONCRETE FOOTING DETAILS

TD-0854-384-ST-05 0 LIFT WELL GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

TD-0854-384-ST-06 0 GROUND FLOOR GRID/COLUMN/WALL PLAN

TD-0854-384-ST-07 0 FIRST FLOOR LEVEL STEEL PLAN

TD-0854-384-ST-08 0 FIRST FLOOR GRID/WALL COLUMN LAYOUT

TD-0854-384-ST-09 0 ROOF PLAN

TD-0854-384-ST-10 0 STEEL WORK ELEVATIONS












TD-0854-384-ST-22 0 STEEL WORK AND STAIRS DETAILS

TD-0854-384-ST-23 0 DESIGN CRITERIA / MATERIALS AND CONSTUCTION SPECIFICATION

TD-0854-384-ST-24 0 DESIGN CRITERIA / MATERIALS AND CONSTUCTION SPECIFICATION

DOCUMENT ONLY 0 SECTION 40 STRUCTURAL DESIGN CERTIFICATE

SITE AND SERVICES PLANSTD-0854-384-FR-01 0 FIRE SERVICE COVERAGE

TD-0854-384-FR-02 0 FIRE SERVICE COVERAGE

TD-0854-384-FR-03 1 FIRE SERVICE COVERAGE

TD-0854-384-HD-01 1 PLUMBING LOAD UNITS WATER AND SEWER


PRELIMINARY CLAUSES



TD-0854-384-C001 D SITE SETOUT PLAN AND NOTES

TD-0854-384-C002 F SITE GRADING PLAN AND NOTES

TD-0854-384-AC-001 1 GROUND FLOOR VENT AND A/C SCHEMATIC

TD-0854-384-AC-002 1 FIRST FLOOR VENT AND A/C SCHEMATIC

TD-0854-384-AC-003 1 A/C AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

DEVELOPMENT APPROVAL2018/0384/1 2 DEVELOPMENT APPROVAL SITE PLAN

(0854-384-PA-01_R2)

2018/0384/2 0 DEVELOPMENT APPROVAL GROUND FLOOR AREA PURPOSE (0854-384-PA-02)

2018/0384/3 0 DEVELOPMENT APPROVAL FIRST FLOOR AREA PURPOSE (0854-384-PA-03)

2018/0384/4 0 DEVELOPMENT APPROVAL GENERAL ELEVATIONS (TD-0854-384-AR-007_rB)

2018/0384/5 0 DEVELOPMENT APPROVAL GENERAL ELEVATIONS (TD-0854-384-AR-008_rB)

NOC DP18-0410 0 SIGNED NOTICE OF CONSENT-NTG-DIPL

4.7 SCHEDULE OF DOCUMENTS NOT INCLUDED IN CONTRACTThe following documents are made available for the information of Tenderers; they shall not form part of the Contract.

DOCUMENT REF.

TITLE

Attachment A Existing Site Photos

Attachment B Existing Location and Floor Plans

Attachment C Temporary Office Concept

Attachment D PowerWater Services to Lots 384 and 385

4.8 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGSThe Contractor shall check all relevant dimensions on site before proceeding with the work under the Contract.

The layout of plant and equipment as shown on the drawings shall be taken as diagrammatic only and all measurements and other information required to carry out the Works specified shall be obtained by the Contractor on the site. No claim for extras arising from failure to obtain measurements and other information on site will be recognised.

4.9 HANDOVER DOCUMENTATIONPrior to handover the Contractor must check that all items in the scope and varied scope of works have been completed.


PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

Ten (10) days prior to handover the Contractor must provide Notification of Asset Handover.

The Contractor must complete a final inspection and produce a punch list of outstanding works to be completed before confirmation of Asset Handover three (3) days prior.

Prior to handover the Contractor must provide documentation as per the documentation checklist.

- DCA approvals (NT Planning Approvals)

- Energy Efficiency Compliance Certificate

- Section 40-Design Certifications

- Building Permits.

- Section 69 Builders Declaration with reference to drawings

- Construction photos for all rooms

- Plumbing and Gas certification

- PWC –Water & Sewer Connection Form

- Waterproofing certification

- Termite treatment certification

- Window and door manufacturer certificates

- Structural Certifications

- Quality assurance

- Complete suite of “As Constructed” Drawings and Documentation (both PDF and AutoCAD format)

- Drawings Referenced “Latest for Construction” drawings

- Practical Completion - Contractor’s Closed out Punch list

- Owner manuals and warranties

- Electrical certification with drawings referenced

- Asbestos clearance certificate (if asbestos removed)

- Occupancy Certificates

At handover, approval of completed works must be obtained from the Superintendent and handover certificate will be issued. Defects liability period will commence from the date of issue.

4.10DIAL BEFORE YOU DIGDial Before You Dig (DBYD) is a community service that provides information on underground pipes and cables from all underground service providers in the area. There is no cost to the user for this service; however, some asset owners reserve the right to make a modest charge for some plans.


PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

Contact DBYD at least 2 working days before you plan to excavate and obtain the plans of the underground services before commencing excavation.

Provide a written notice to the Superintendent stating that the plans have been received and include the DBYD sequence number.

DBYD can be contacted at the following numbers:

Telephone: 1100 8am to 5pm weekdays, excluding public holidays

Internet: www.1100.com.au

4.11PROTECTION OF TELECOMMUNICATION UNDERGROUND CABLES

In addition to the requirements of the clause titled “Dial Before You Dig”, and prior to commencing any excavation, boring of holes, blasting, rock breaking, soil compaction or similar activity in the vicinity of telecommunication underground cables, whether fibre optic or copper, the Contractor shall obtain the location of the cables from the accredited plant locater, and pay all fees.

The Contractor shall follow all directions and instructions issued by the owner of such telecommunication underground cables in relation to work in the vicinity of such cables.

4.12NEW TELEPHONE SERVICES TO BUILDINGSSupply and install telephone cabling to the applicable Standards, in accordance with Scope of Works and the drawings which show the telephone services.

Supply and install concealed conduit and block cabling from the termination of the Telstra lead-in cable to the telephone outlet points shown on the drawings.

Supply and install an approved junction box mounted in the location shown on the drawings or, if not shown, in a location approved by the Superintendent and Telstra.

Supply and install a full phone service. Certify the service as fully operational. Provide a Telstra Certificate of Acceptance of the installation. Obtain approval from the Superintendent before disconnecting the service at handover.

4.13LIGHT AND POWERThe Contractor shall install any temporary electric light and power installations, including metering, required for executing the work under the Contract all in accordance with the relevant regulations, and shall pay all costs and charges in connection with the installation and use of such services.

4.14WATERThe Contractor shall arrange for the supply of all water required for executing the Works under the Contract and pay all incidental charges, including cost of water so used.

4.15SANITARY ACCOMMODATIONThe Contractor shall provide adequate and clean sanitary accommodation for use of all persons employed upon the Works and clear away and remove such accommodation from the site on completion of the Contract.


PRELIMINARY CLAUSES

4.16ABSTRACT OF PROVISIONAL QUANTITIES AND MONETARY PROVISIONS

a) NOMINATED SUB CONTRACTORS

NIL

b) PROVISIONAL QUANTITIES

NIL

c) OTHER PROVISIONAL SUMS

Door Hardware: Allow Provisional Sum $10,000 in Tender for supply and installation.

Floor Tiles: Allow for supply price of $35.00 +GST for supply only price of ceramic tiles for toilet, ablution and kitchen area floor and splash backs as required.


SCOPE OF WORK

5 SCOPE OF WORKSA general outline of the work to be carried out under the Contract comprises:

5.1 TEMPORARY OFFICESThe installation of temporary demountable offices at Lot 385 Broad Street, Borroloola for the duration of the main redevelopment on adjacent site Lot 384, and later removal of all buildings and services and rehabilitation of the site upon completion of the Business Hub redevelopment.

This component of the work includes but is not limited to the following:

- Refer to attachment titled Temporary Office Concept as a guide for extent and layout of the works.

- Preparation of site for installation of services and placement of demountable buildings.

- Ensure footings and hold down details for the buildings and any other features such as power poles comply with normal residential Importance Level 2 cyclone rating.

- Disconnection of the buildings, transportation from within the Borroloola township, installation, connection of all services including comms, and re-commissioning to full working order.

- Upon completion of the main works, disconnection and removal of all buildings and other features to a location within the Borroloola township, unload for storage.

- Rehabilitate the site back to original condition.

5.2 REDEVELOPMENT OF BUSINESS HUBThe redevelopment of the existing Borroloola Government Business Hub at Lot 384 Robinson Road, Borroloola.

The works includes certification of structures built as described in this RFT, inclusive of Permit to Build, Certificate of Occupancy, “As Constructed” drawings, and final certificates as described.

This component of the work includes but is not limited to the following:

Building works:

- Redevelopment of existing nominally 29.5m x 17.8m x 6.7m (H) portal frame structure.

- Investigate existing structure and fit out for harmful materials or substances including, but not limited to, existing panelling, sheeting and insulation materials for asbestos.

- Demolish and remove existing offices and mezzanine structure contained in portal structure.

- Existing portal frame, concrete slab, roof and awning structure to remain.

- Existing attached toilet block to remain.

Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

SCOPE OF WORK

- Construct ground floor and first level offices, library, rooms, toilets, kitchenettes including two staircases, balustrading, elevator shaft.

- Supply, installation and certification of all mechanical services including air conditioning and ventilation equipment per schematic plan including condensate drainage.

- Supply install and certify single level lift elevator.

- Plumbing and drainage design, installation and certification.

- Design, installation of fire hose reels and fire hydrant per schematic.

- RGRC has applied for power connection permission with Power Water (authority/utility service provider). Contractor to supply and install on site power reticulation/distribution provide statutory documentation and certification, provide and arrange for service connection.

- RGRC has applied for water and sewer connection with Power Water (authority/utility service provider). Contractor to design, supply and install onsite water and sewerage reticulation/distribution and drainage. Contractor to provide statutory certification/documentation, provide and arrange connection.

- RGRC has applied for communications and data connection permission with service provider. Contractor to supply and install data and communications network on site, provide statutory certification/documentation, provide and arrange connection.

- Contractor to provide certificates, documentation, vendor and installer statements required to achieve Occupancy Permit.

- Contractor to arrange building certification from permit to build to permit to occupy

- RGRC to provide development application/permission.

- Supply and install all floor coverings, surface coverings, fittings and fixtures and signage.

- Cabinet works for kitchenettes and two off-reception desks only (no loose furniture required).

- Provision of as constructed drawings and manuals.

Site development:

- Civil works, driveways, parking bays, pavement, kerbing, line marking, signage, paths, surface drainage.

- Landscaping and irrigation.

- Shade sail and paved BBQ area.

- Fencing.

- Demolition and removal of existing stand-alone toilet building.

- Existing tree removal as required.

- Demolition of existing concrete as required.


SCOPE OF WORK

- Works outside Lot perimeter required for driveway access, surface water drainage, services/utilities connections.

5.3 EXTENT OF WORKThe provision of labour, management and supervision (including associated travel, accommodation and allowance costs as required), services (including freight), plant, equipment, materials, safety equipment, construction equipment and consumables to execute and complete the demolition, removal and construction as required.

5.4 DEMOLITIONGive sufficient notice so that inspections may be made at the following stages:

Commencement of demolition

Contents of building before commencement of demolition

Suspected hazardous materials including asbestos

Adjoining structures before commencement of demolition

Existing services before disconnection or diversion

Trees specified to be retained before commencement of demolition

Site after removal of demolished materials

Services after re-connection or diversion

Completion of demolition.

5.5 PERIMETER FENCING AND GATESRobinson Road street front masonry block wall/steel panel fence to remain. Section of masonry block wall/steel panel fence to be removed for Robinson Road driveway access. Replace or repair existing chainmesh fence as required. Install chainmesh gates at driveway access points. Remove existing access gates on Western boundary Broad Street access, install fence as required. All chainmesh fencing to be 1.8m high selvedge with 3 top rows barbed wire installed to manufacturers specification.

5.6 EXTERNAL CLADDINGExternal walls horizontal Colorbond™ Custom Orb™. colour Dune™ 2 bottom sheets including toe mould and flashing. remaining upper sheets and flashing colour Surfmist™.

Awning and roof: Colorbond™ Custom Orb™ Surfmist™ including flashings, cappings and corner moulds.

Re-cladding of roof including removal of ridge vent assembly and include new ridge cap installation, flashing, capping and vermin proofing as required.

All cladding flashings, moulds and capping installed to manufacturers specification for nominated cyclonic location and specification as nominated in certified structural design drawings.

5.7 INSULATIONInsulation Material:


SCOPE OF WORK

Semi-rigid rockwool batts fitted tightly between studs.

Proprietary Item: Bradford Fibretex 350.

Thickness: 63mm.

5.8 WINDOWSBuilding Loads: Use methods such that building loads and building movements are not transferred to the window frames.

Pre-glazing: Supply the window installations pre-glazed unless otherwise specified.

Give sufficient notice so that window installations may be inspected before fixings are covered up or concealed.

Glass:

Determine the glass thickness in accordance with AS 1288 including human impact considerations.

Quality: Free from defects which detract from appearance or interfere with performance under normal conditions of use.

Glass Types:

Clear glass: Clear float glass of general quality.

Safety glass: Includes wired, toughened and laminated glass.

Mirror glass: Clear float glass, of silvering quality, backed with a reflective surface layer and protective coating. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealant.

Fixing Mirrors:

Fix mirrors direct to wall plugs with dome-headed chromium-plated screws in each corner. Use polyethylene sleeves and washers to prevent contact between screw and glass. Do not over tension the screws.

Workmanship:

Generally: To the recommended practice of the Federal Glass Merchants Association of Australia.

Building Movements: Use methods such that building movements are not transferred to the glass.

Glazing:

Refer to Drawings

Cleaning And Replacement:

On completion replace damaged glass.

Cleaning: Leave the whole of the work clean, polished and in good condition.

Aluminium Framed Windows:

Refer drawings for window schedule


SCOPE OF WORK

All windows to include security screen or security bars, insect screen.

All aluminium frames to be powder coated colour similar to Colorbond™ Surfmist™

All security screens or security bars to be powder coated colour black.

5.9 DOORSTimber Doors:

Proprietary doors manufactured for interior or exterior applications and for the finish required.

Door Thickness: 40mm for solid core doors over 900mm wide.

Solid Core Doors: Blockboard cores.

Flush Doors: Provide additional frame material where necessary to take specified hardware, fastenings, openings, grooves, and the like.

Edge strips: Minimum finished thickness 10 mm, or greater as necessary to accommodate the full depth of the rebate in rebated doors.

Glazed panels: Fix the glass with matching beads each side, to finish flush with the facing.

First level Bi-Fold-operable doors. Refer to Structural details for Bi-Fold top hung operable door support beam design load. Contractor to allow for Uni-Fold ™ door system or similar to Principals approval, colour and finish to be nominated or accepted by Principal. Contractor to confirm beam height and finished floor level for clearance and tolerance per manufacturers specification. Doors panels, panel hardware, operable tracks, mechanisms and hardware to be installed per manufacturers specifications. Contractor to confirm storage space when doors retracted and circulation space for safe operation of doors.

Hardware:

Tenderer to allow Provisional Sum $10,000 in Tender for supply and installation. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE to be provided by the Superintendent.

Match exposed fixings to the material fixed.

Locks & Latches

Fabricate locks and latches free from flaws and defects, with parts firmly joined, and working parts accurately fitted to smooth close bearings, free from rattle or excessive play, appropriately lubricated.

Rebated Doors: If mortise locks or latches are specified to rebated doors, provide purpose-made rebated pattern items.

Keys:

Requirement: As per Door Hardware Schedule.

Records: Furnish to the Principal a record from the lock supplier of the master key system showing the lock type, type of key supplied, key number for re-ordering, and name of supplier.

Provision: Supply keys in the following quantities:

Locks keyed to differ: Two keys per lock.


SCOPE OF WORK

Master keys: Two keys for each master key code.

Identification: Supply each group of identical keys on a metal key ring with a purpose-made plastic or stamped metal label marked to identify the key type.

Door Furniture:

Provide lock and latch furniture suitable for use with the lock or latch to which it is installed.

Fixing: Provide concealed fixing to exterior plates and roses.

Bolts: Provide barrel bolts, flush bolts, tower bolts, and the like with keepers, including lock plates, staples, ferrules, floor sockets or the like, appropriate to the service condition.

Door stops: Fix door stops on the floor or on the skirting, as appropriate, to prevent the door furniture striking the wall or other surfaces.

5.10SUSPENDED CEILINGSProvide proprietary/vendor system details to principal for approval.

5.11LININGSheet Linings:

Gypsum Plasterboard

Including water resistant, fire resistant, and insulating gypsum plasterboard:

Plasterboard

Thickness: >13 mm

Jointing: Flush jointed

Finish: Paint finish

Accessories: Fix metal corner beads to external corners, casing beads, shadowline stopping angles etc.

5.12FIXED FURNITURESupply and install kitchenette cabinet work and 2 off fixed reception desks using Australian Standard compliant materials and workmanship.

Laminate finish colours and splash backs to be nominated or accepted by Principal.

Workmanship Generally:

Perform the operations and provide the accessories necessary for the satisfactory completion of woodwork items. Ease and adjust moving parts, lubricate hardware, and leave the completed work in a sound clean working condition.

Joinery: Scribe internal and mitre external joints. Where joinery is specified to have clear or tinted finishes, match adjacent pieces.

Fastenings: Where fastenings are unavoidable on visible joinery faces, sink them below the surface and fill the sinking flush with a suitable material which, in surfaces specified to have clear or tinted finishes, shall be matching wood plugs showing face grain (not end grain).


SCOPE OF WORK

Melamine Surfaces: Conceal fixings by over-sheeting the surface with plastic laminate sheet with a matching surface colour and texture.

Hidden surfaces: Where required, prime before assembling.

Adhesives:

Provide adhesives of types appropriate to their purpose and apply them so that they transmit the loads and stresses imposed and ensure the rigidity of the assembly, without causing discolouration of finished surfaces.

PVAC Emulsion Adhesive: Not inferior to type 3 if required to be water resistant.

Moulded Skirting:

Type: Moulded PVC feathered edge coved base skirting section.

Proprietary item: Armstrong Feathered Edge Skirting

Colour: Standard midnight

Height: 100mm

Fixing: Scribe as necessary. Fix to walls with contact adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

5.13RESILIENT FINISHESRefer to drawings for extent of new resilient finishes.

Location: Ground floor only

Type: Vinyl planks

Proprietary item: Karndean WP411 Niveus Commercial Vinyl Plank

Laying pattern: Ashlar (grain in the long direction of the area).

Moulded Vinyl Skirting:

Type: Moulded PVC feathered edge coved base skirting section.

Proprietary item: Armstrong Feathered Edge Skirting

Colour: Standard Midnight

Height: 100mm

Fixing: Scribe as necessary. Fix to walls with contact adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

5.14FLOOR CARPETSEntrance mat:

Location: Required at building entrances and Library entrance.

Type: Polypropylene

Proprietary item: Signature Floors Needlepunch Marine Cord


SCOPE OF WORK

Colour: Dark Harbor 2210

Installation: Per manufacturers specification.

Floor Carpet:

Location: First level throughout

Type: Commercial Carpet tiles 50cm x 50cm

Proprietary item: Godfrey Hirst Long Grain 50cm x 50cm commercial carpet tile.

Colour: Principal to select colour and pattern.

Installation: Per manufacturers specification

5.15CERAMIC TILESFloor Tiles:

Tenderer to allow for supply price of $35.00 +GST for supply only price of ceramic tiles for toilet, ablution and kitchen area floor and splash backs as required. Principal to select tile pattern/colour/style. Contractor to provide for delivery and installation.

5.16PAINTINGPaints: Use only paints approved by the Australian Paint Approvals Scheme (APAS).

Premium Paints: Use only premium quality lines from approved manufacturers.

Supply containers of materials specified by APAS specification numbers which are labelled as such by the manufacturer.

Combinations: Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in one paint system.

Primers, Sealers, Undercoats: Ensure that primers, sealers and undercoats are suitable for the substrate and compatible with the finish coat and each other. Except for stains and other clear or translucent finishes, each coating shall be of a noticeably different tint from the preceding coat.

Putty: Oil based or polymeric based putty. Putty may be stained to match the colour of the substrate.

The Australian Paint Approvals Scheme is an authority representing both federal and state governments and their instrumentalities for the purpose of specifying standards for paint materials and listing approved products.

APAS Specification Numbers: Paint types specified in the paint systems by APAS specification numbers shall conform to the appropriate APAS specification.

Provide a "Record of Supply" with each batch of APAS specified paint over 20 L supplied subsequently throughout the Contract.

Treat the advisory recommendations of the relevant standards as minimum contractual requirements.

Site Copy: Keep a copy of AS/NZS 2311 on site.


SCOPE OF WORK

Generally: Prepare the substrate and apply the paint as recommended in the relevant standard. Before commencing to paint remove door furniture, switch plates, light fittings and the like. Replace on completion of painting.

Painting Schedule: RGRC to nominate.

All exposed external structural steelwork to be painted colour to match Colorbond™ Surfmist™

5.17DATA AND COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONSSupply and install of 2x ‘RJ45’ Data outlet, fed back to a Patch Panel by Cat6a cabling at each single workstation throughout the facility.

Install a large 24-32 RU Rack, securable so that Access control can be guaranteed.

Provide sufficient RJ45 Data cabling for Security Cameras. Supply of cameras is NOT part of the scope of this contract, however a single Data Outlet is to be positioned close to each camera location.

Install data equipment in a small climate-controllable room.

5.18ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONSWiring: Conceal cables and conduits, including underground cable or conduit entering the building, in a manner that will allow wiring replacement without structural work or the removal of cladding or lining. Do not penetrate damp proof courses.

Comply with PowerWater Regulations, the Building Code of Australia and NT WorkSafe.

On completion clean faceplates, luminary reflectors and diffusers, and the like, replace faulty lamps, reinstate ground surfaces and finishes disturbed by trenching, and hand over the completed installation in working order.

Telephone and Data: Refer to the drawings for details, notes and specifications. Comply with the NTG Data and Voice Cabling Standard (June 2018 Version 5.0) available:

https://dcis.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/557866/data-voice-cabling-standard.pdf

Prior to practical completion provide 'Work as Executed' drawings and hand to the Superintendent for forwarding to the building owner or agent.

5.19MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

5.19.1 GenerallyThe mechanical services works include but are not limited to:

- Supply and install split system air conditioners, energy recovery units and fresh air fans per minimum requirement of air conditioning and ventilation schematic diagram. Commission operation for best efficiency.

- Procurement, installation and certification of elevator per manufacturers requirements and statutory compliance.

Provide vendor supplied operation and safety manuals and installations drawings for all mechanical equipment.

5.19.2 Air-conditioningTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

https://dcis.nt.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0010/557866/data-voice-cabling-standard.pdf

SCOPE OF WORK

Drawing schematic for air-conditioning, ventilation and energy recovery is prepared for power demand calculation only.

Arrange fit-out design, power feed, refrigerant pipe work and condensate collection and drainage.

Arrange and provide all required design and installation statutory compliance certification.

5.19.3 Lift/ElevatorThe certified structural design drawings for the building structure including the lift shaft considers the installation of lift model: KONE 201 EMonoSpace 17.1-1 K3000

Confirm all dimensions and load parameters shown on the certified structural building drawings satisfy vendor/proprietary/statutory requirements for the elevator installation.

Arrange all relevant certification and approvals for elevator design, installation, commissioning and operation including signage.

5.20CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCEPrior to Practical Completion provide Section 40 Certificates and Certificates of Compliance as applicable for the following elements of the work:

- Electrical Installations

- Structural section 40 construction certificate

- Plumbing Section 40 design and construction certificates.

- Mechanical Installations section 40 design and construction certificates

- All necessary certification and compliance certificates and permit to occupy.


INDIGENOUS DEVELOPMENT PLAN

6 INDIGENOUS DEVELOPMENT PLAN

6.1 GENERALThis section specifies the requirements for the Indigenous Development Plan (IDP) for this project. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the provisions of this section of the Contract and any other associated requirements (eg Fair Work Act) are complied with.

Details addressing key elements of the proposed IDP are to be given in the Response Schedule. Sufficient detail is to be provided that will allow overall assessment of the intent of the proposed IDP.

A fully developed Plan will be required within fourteen (14) days of Contract award.

6.2 PRINCIPLESThe purpose of the IDP for this Contract is to develop strategies and protocols within the contract that support Indigenous enterprise and maximise employment and training opportunities for Indigenous Territorians.

This could be achieved through adopting the following principles:

(a) Employment and contract opportunities packaged to suit Indigenous people and organisations from within the local region.

(b) Strategies to maximise the recruitment and retention of indigenous people.

(c) Use of employment brokers and agencies set up to support indigenous employment.

(d) Harness existing labour market programs and other government policy mechanisms.

(e) Identify the skills gap and workskill development requirements of the Contract to appropriate Registered Training Organisations (RTO).

(f) Ensure RTOs deliver appropriate training which supports indigenous workforce growth.

(g) Support local businesses that employ Indigenous Territorians.

(h) Ensure all subcontractors equally adopt these principles.

6.3 INDIGENOUS DEVELOPMENT PLAN (IDP)

6.3.1 Submission – Hold PointWithin fourteen (14) days of the award of Contract, and before any work commences on site, the Contractor shall submit to the Superintendent one copy of the finalised IDP for approval.

The Superintendent shall within a reasonable time from receipt either approve the Indigenous Development Plan, or reject it, giving reasons for the rejections. The Contractor shall rectify the deficiencies and resubmit the Plan for approval.

6.3.2 Minimum RequirementsThe IDP as a minimum must address the following topics:

(a) General Overview

(i) Provide an outline of the Indigenous participation context.



(ii) Provide an opportunity analysis for local participation.

(iii) Nominate the Contractor’s representative with responsibility for the Plan.

(b) Employment Strategy and Targets

(i) Identify sources for indigenous labour (eg employment agency(s)/ indigenous organisation(s) etc).

(ii) Nominate employment targets and conditions of employment to be offered (compliance with Fair Work Act requirements).

(iii) Nominate the intended balance of skilled and unskilled indigenous labour to be achieved.

(iv) Numbers of apprentices and trainees to be employed.

(v) Career management strategies.

(vi) Mentoring strategies.

(vii) Strategies to sustain indigenous employment through the entire period of the Contract.

(c) Training Strategies and Programs

(i) Training needs analysis, identifying skill gaps and work-skill development pathways.

(ii) Nominate the intended RTO and accredited courses to be delivered.

(iii) Proposed training schedule, including mix of classroom and on-the-job training, demonstrating total hours expected.

(iv) Identify any external funding to be sourced from DEEWR or DET to supplement delivery costs.

(d) Local Development Capacity and Opportunities

(i) Identification of opportunities for local Community participation.

(ii) Specific proposals to maximise local Community involvement.

(iii) Goods, services and materials that will be locally sourced.

(iv) Use of sub-contractors that also use strategies that maximise indigenous employment.

(v) What recognised quality assurance/project control certification will be required of local sub-contractors.

(e) Consultation and Communication Protocols

(i) Extent of community engagement to ascertain the availability of potential indigenous workers, including sub-contractors, labourers, cadets and apprentices/trainees etc.

(ii) How the Contractor will communicate such opportunities (employment/training/supplies/sub-contractors) available during the Contract.

(f) Monitoring/Auditing and Reporting Protocols



(i) Maintain a system for recording and reporting. Monthly reports will be required however the Superintendent may seek reports on a more frequent basis during the Contract period.

(ii) Adopt the following:

A system of recording Indigenous employment hours worked signed by the participants weekly.

A system of recording Indigenous training hours.

A system detailing training courses / modules scheduled and completed.

A system that will provide for timesheets with employment (hours worked) and training records for all identified indigenous people engaged on the Works, with all Progress Claims for Payment.

6.4 PROJECT REPORTING

6.4.1 Progress ReportsA report at the end of every 2 week period of Works is to be provided to the Superintendent. The report should provide as a minimum:

(a) Progress against approved Construction Program.

(b) Photographic record of works undertaken.

(c) Work Health and Safety update.

(d) Employment compliance (achievements against objectives/goals).

6.4.2 Final ReportA report at the completion of Works is to be provided to the Superintendent. The report should address as a minimum:

(e) General compliance with endorsed IDP objectives.

(f) Employment compliance (achievements against objectives/goals).

(g) Training compliance (achievements against objectives/goals).

(h) Lessons learned.


HOLD POINTS AND WITNESS POINTS SCHEDULES

7 PROJECT CONTROLDIPL - November 2017

7.1 OUTLINEEstablish and maintain a project specific Project Control Plan for this project to ensure that work complies with the requirements of the documents.

7.2 DEFINITIONSHOLD POINT Obtain the approval of the Superintendent in writing for that particular

stage of the works. Where work is to be covered or concealed, do not proceed past that point until approval has been received.

ITP Inspection and Test Plan.

QA A formal Quality Assurance system. Usually required for high value projects. More onerous that Project Control.

RFQ Request for Quotation. Requirements in this section applicable to an RFQ are equally applicable to an RFT.

RFT Request for Tender. Requirements in this section applicable to an RFT are equally applicable to an RFQ.

WITNESS POINT: Give the Superintendent sufficient prior notice in writing so that an inspection can be made.

7.3 HOLD POINTS AND WITNESS POINTS

7.3.1 ApplicationHold Points and Witness Points apply to all construction projects, for building and civil works, where they appear in an RFT or an RFQ. They apply even if neither Project Control nor Quality Assurance apply to the project. The Hold Points and the Witness Points for this project are part of the Project Control processes.

7.3.2 SchedulesSchedules of Hold Points and Witness Points are available;

a) For RFTs with the technical sections within the body of the RFT the schedules are included as a section within the RFT document,

b) For RFTs which call up technical sections in Standard Specification Reference Text books the schedules of Hold Points and Witness Points are provided in separate, stand-alone documents. Templates are available via the links to the specifications shown at https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-specifications

7.4 PROJECT CONTROL PLANProvide a project specific Project Control Plan and submit two copies to the Superintendent within 14 days of the Contract being awarded. A framework Project Control Plan document in Microsoft Word format is available via the DIPL Technical Specifications webpage at:


https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-specifications




This document should be prepared by the Contractor and not a third party.

The Project Control Plan is to include a description of the organisational structure for the management of the project and the procedures to be employed in complying with this section of the specification.

7.5 DOCUMENT CONTROLProvide details on the procedures for the control of all documents and data relating to the Contract and in particular the changes to documents.

7.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMProvide a Construction Program in the form of a bar chart covering all stages or parts of the work under the Contract and showing the dates by which or the times within which the various stages or parts are to be executed and completed.

Submit a draft Construction Program showing all trades and major milestones as part of the Project Control Plan Summary submitted with the tender.

A template for a simple Construction Program, in Microsoft Excel format, for both civil and building works, is available via https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-specifications

Submit the completed Construction Program at Appendix A of the Project Control Plan.

Update the Construction Program as required monthly and submit to the Superintendent.

7.7 TRACEABILITYProvide details of the procedures for identifying work and materials as numbered lots. Identify samples and test results with the precise location in the works to which they relate.

7.8 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURESProvide documented procedures for the following activities in this Contract:

1. Concrete batching, transport, placement, and finishing2. Temporary structures when intending working at height3. Removal and disposal of vegetation (including permission from local council for landfill).4. Works requiring heavy lifting with plant.

7.9 TESTING

7.9.1 Testing – Building WorksThe Contractor shall carry out all conformance testing at its own cost, in accordance with applicable Australian Standards and National Construction Code requirements.

Ensure that all conformance tests are undertaken by personnel with suitable qualifications and experience.

Maintain records of such personnel.







Establish and maintain records of all inspections and testing conducted.

7.10 TEST EQUIPMENTUse measuring and test equipment that has current certification for calibration and maintain records of dates of the calibration tests.

7.11 CHECKLISTSA Project Check List proforma for each of Roadworks, NATSPEC Basic (Major Building Works) and Small Building Works, based on the Contract technical requirements in the specification, will be used as a means of verifying that work has been completed and complies with the Contract documents. A copy of the Project Check List is available via the specifications links accessible via https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-specifications

Complete and maintain records of these Check Lists for all construction activities. Use separate Check Lists for each lot or part of the works.

Provide copies of the completed Check Lists to the Superintendent on request.

7.12 CONTROL OF DEFECTSProvide details of procedures employed to ensure that defective material or work is not used on the project.

Develop a project specific proforma for use in recording details of defects and the remedial action taken. Provide a copy of this proforma at Appendix B of the project specific Project Control Plan.

7.13 PREVENTATIVE ACTIONDescribe in the project specific Project Control Plan the procedures to be put into place to prevent any ongoing defects.

7.14 RECORDSProvide details of procedures describing how Project Control records are controlled, maintained and stored.

Make all Project Control records available to the Superintendent at all times during working hours.

Provide details of procedures that allows records to be kept efficiently and safely so that retrieval of records can be made at any time.

Ensure that all files are identified with the project number and that items within each file are recorded.

Provide security for all records in the files. Ensure that electronic records are protected with anti-virus programs and establish, where necessary, a structured filing system similar to that for the hard copy records.

If e-mails contain administrative information, print hard copies of these and place on the appropriate file. Ensure that the electronic system is backed up regularly.

Maintain an efficient system for archived records. Ensure that records are to be stored safely for the mandatory period of 7 years.





7.15 COMPLIANCE CHECKSThe Superintendent will monitor and check the Contractor’s Project Control system.

Compliance checks of any aspect of the project may be carried out by the Superintendent, the Superintendent’s Representative or by another person nominated by the Superintendent or by the Superintendent’s Representative. Compliance checks may be conducted with a minimum of one working day’s notice.

Conduct regular internal checks, at least once every 4 weeks, to verify compliance with the Project Control Plan and take action to rectify items that do not comply.



8 HOLD POINTS AND WITNESS POINTS SCHEDULES

8.1 SCHEDULE 1 - HOLD POINTSCLAUSE TITLE SECTION PAGE

No

SUBMISSION 6.3.1 41

HOLD POINT 7.3 44

CAMP SITE/COMPOUND/WORKSHOP 10.10 58

WORK HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.11.1 58

PROJECT MODIFICATIONS 10.12.4 60

EXCAVATION 12.5.2 66

EXPLOSIVES 12.8.6 68

RETICULATION SYSTEM 13.6 74

SAWN JOINTS 14.5.1 78

PLACING AND FIXING 14.12.1 81

READY MIXED SUPPLY 14.13.2 81

HOT WEATHER PLACING 14.13.4 81

CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 14.18.1 86

SHOP DRAWINGS 15.3.1 91

AVAILABILITY 15.5.1 92

TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS 15.5.6 93

ENLARGEMENT OF BOLT HOLES 15.5.7 93

APPROVAL OF THE WELD PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION

15.6.1 93

ROOF TRUSS SHOP DRAWINGS 16.8.1 100

SAMPLES 17.3 103

MORTAR ADDITIVES 17.4.4 104

COLOURED MORTAR 17.4.5 104

PREMIXED MORTAR 17.4.6 104

MORTAR DAMP PROOF COURSE 17.4.8 104

CLEANING 17.5.1 105

REINFORCED MASONRY 17.11 109

INSPECTION 20.4 123

CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONS 21.5 130

PAINTING 30.5 178

TESTS 32.6 191



SANITARY PLUMBING 32.18 204

MAINTENANCE HOLES 32.20 205

TESTS 33.3 208

INSTALLATION 37.3 226

CONTRACTOR’S SUBMISSIONS 40.2 234

INSPECTION OF SITE 44.6.1 255

SURVEYS FOR HYDRAULIC WORKS 44.6.4 256

CLEARING 44.6.6 257

8.2 SCHEDULE 2 - WITNESS POINTSCLAUSE TITLE SECTION PAGE

No

HOLD POINTS 7.3 44

SCHEDULE 2 8.2 49

WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS 10.7.4 55

WARRANTIES 10.7.5 55

AUTHORITY'S APPROVALS 10.7.6 56

INSPECTION TEST PLANS (ITPS) 10.7.10 57

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING REPORTS 10.7.11 57

SAFETY OFFICER 10.11.2 58

INSPECTIONS 11.2 62

MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 11.3 62

INSPECTIONS 12.2 65

BAD GROUND 12.3 65

EXPLOSIVES 12.8.6 68

NOTICE 13.2.1 73

COMPLETION 13.9 75

NOTICE 14.3.1 77

INSPECTION 15.2 91

COMPLIANCE 15.3.2 92

CERTIFICATION OF WELDERS AND WELDING SUPERVISORS

15.6.5 94

PREPARATION 15.6.6 94

FRAMING INSPECTION 16.3 97

INSPECTION 17.2 102

INSPECTION 18.4 113



INSPECTION 19.4 120

INSPECTION 21.2 129

INSPECTION 23.2 138

INSPECTION 25.2 150

INSPECTION 26.2 155

INSPECTION 27.2 159

INSPECTION 28.2 163

INSPECTION 29.2 172

INSPECTION 30.4 178

INSPECTION 32.5 191

INSPECTION 33.2 208

INSPECTION 34.3 214

COMMISSIONING 39.4 232

COMMISSIONING 40.7 236

INSPECTION 41.2 239

INSPECTION 43.2 249

NOTICE OF STAGES OF WORK 44.5 255

WORK IN PRIVATE PROPERTY 44.6.2 255

PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC AND PROPERTY ACCESS

44.6.5 256

GRUBBING 44.6.7 257

MULCHING 44.6.8 258

STRIPPING TOPSOIL AND PAVEMENT MATERIAL

44.6.9 258


ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

9 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

9.1 GENERALEnvironmental Management principles apply to all construction and demolition projects for building works and for civil works carried out by or on behalf of the Northern Territory Government (NTG).

9.2 STANDARDSThe Standard Specification for Environmental Management reference text is the document which prescribes the minimum standards for environmental management for NTG projects.

This document is available from the web as a PDF document at:

https://dipl.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/specification-services/technical-specifications/environmental-management

If there is any inconsistency between the Standard Specification for Environmental Management reference text and any other document prescribing environmental management procedures applicable to the project; refer the inconsistency to the Superintendent immediately, and assume that the more stringent requirements apply until and unless advised differently by the Superintendent.

9.3 REFERENCESOnly the clauses which are appropriate for the works are applicable to the works being carried out under this contract. Variations to the specification, if any, appear in clause titled Environmental Management Specific Requirements below.

9.4 ASSISTANCEInformation and assistance in respect to environmental management is available from the Environmental Services work group:

phone (08) 8999 4550

email [email protected].

9.5 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SCHEDULE 1 – HOLD POINTS

CLAUSE TITLE SECTION PAGE No

Approval of Contractor’s Environmental Management Plan(Template available through Environmental Management links at https://dipl.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/specification-services/technical-specifications/environmental-management , in Supplementary Documents folder.)

24.2 15




mailto:[email protected]



GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

10.1 STANDARDSUse Standards, and their amendments, current 3 months before the date for the close of tenders except where different editions and/or amendments are required by statutory authorities, including, but not limited to, NATA and the National Construction Code including the Building Code of Australia.

10.2 GENERAL

10.2.1 Contract documentsRepresentation: The drawings and the specification represent generally the forms, dimensions and description of the works. Read the documents together.

Diagrammatic layouts: The layout of service lines, plant and equipment as shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only, except where figured set-out dimensions are provided. Before commencing work obtain measurements and other necessary information.

Levels: Spot levels take precedence over contour lines and ground profile lines.

10.2.2 The Conditions of Tender and Conditions of ContractThe Conditions of Tender and the Conditions of Contract contain additional requirements which apply to works carried out under any contract awarded by Roper Gulf Regional Council, including any works carried out using this specification.

10.3 DEFINITIONSAPPRAISED Appraised by the Superintendent, or a Council staff

member with authority to appraise the item being appraised.

APPROVAL/AUTHORISATION Obtain written or verbal advice from the Superintendent on the specific matter requiring approval and/or authorisation unless statutory requirements state otherwise or unless a different approver or authoriser is specified.

APPROVED Approved by the Superintendent, or a Council staff member with authority to approve the item being approved.

AUTHORISED Authorised by the Superintendent, or a Council staff member with authority to authorise the item being authorised.

AS BUILT INFORMATION Means the same as “As Constructed Information”.

AS CONSTRUCTED INFORMATION A documented record, including drawings, of the details of a construction following its completion. Includes, and means the same as, "works as executed" information, "as installed" information and "as built" information

AS INSTALLED INFORMATION Means the same as “As Constructed Information”.



BUSINESS DAY Means the same as Day.

CALENDAR DAY Means any day of the week including weekends and Public Holidays.

COMPATIBILITY OF MATERIALS Ensure all materials which are used are compatible with all other materials which may be affected.

DAY(S) Means working days, Monday to Friday, excluding Northern Territory wide Public Holidays, and excluding weekends.

DIPL / THE DEPARTMENT The Department of Planning, Infrastructure and Logistics (When referred to in these documents, take the meaning as RGRC / THE COUNCIL)

HOLD POINT Obtain the Superintendents written approval for that particular part of the works.

ITP Inspection Test Plan. ITPs detail the inspections and tests required.

MAKING GOOD Repair any damage caused during the execution of the works. Leave the site of the works in a neat, clean and tidy state, fit for occupancy and use on completion of the works.

PROPRIETARY Items identifiable by naming the manufacturer, supplier, brand name, catalogue number, reference number or other identifier. Specification of proprietary items does not exclude equivalent items with different identifiers but is indicative of a minimum required quality and other properties. If alternatives are proposed provide sufficient evidence to enable evaluation of the proposed alternatives.

PROVIDE Supply, deliver, install, connect, test, commission and leave ready for use.

REQUIRED Required under the contract or by authorities with jurisdiction over the works.

RGRC / THE COUNCIL Roper Gulf Regional Council

RFT / RFQ Request for Tender / Request for Quotation. Provisions applicable to one are equally applicable to the other.

SHALL Is indicative of a mandatory requirement unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

SUBMIT Give or send documentation to the Superintendent or to another party as directed by the Superintendent.

SUPPLY Supply and deliver only, without installing, connecting, testing or commissioning.



WITNESS POINT Give the Superintendent prior notice in writing of an action so that that part of the works may be inspected.

WORKING DAY(S) Means the same as Day.

WORKING HOURS Means the hours, on a working day, from 8am to 4.30pm.

WORKS AS EXECUTED INFORMATION Means the same as ”As Constructed Information”.

10.4 INSPECTIONCovering up

Where notice of inspection is to be given in respect of any part of the works do not cover that part up without approval.

Notice

Minimum notice required so that inspections may be made: 24 hours in town areas, 3 days in other areas or 5 days in remote areas.

10.5 SAMPLESQuantity

Submit at least one of each item and a copy of any supporting documentation for review. Keep approved samples in good condition on the site for reference until practical completion.

Suitability

Do not commence work affected by samples until the samples have been approved. Submit further samples as required.

Delay

Delays caused by late submission or inadequacy of samples are not recognised as a reason for a variation, time extension or addition to the contract sum.

Approval

Approval of samples does not affect the responsibilities of the contractor under the contract.

Criteria

Match approved samples, prototypes and sample panels throughout the works.

10.6 TESTSTesting authority

Carry out any testing required using an authority registered by the National Association of Testing Authorities (NATA) to test in the relevant field, except for tests to installed services.

Suitability

Do not commence or conceal, as appropriate, work subject to tests until the tests have been satisfactorily completed and accepted.



10.7 CONTRACTORS SUBMISSIONS

10.7.1 Document formatsSubmit electronic copies of documents. Text documents to be in Microsoft Word format, Microsoft Excel format or PDF format. Drawings to be in .dwg or .dgn format and in PDF format.

10.7.2 SuitabilityDo not commence work affected by Contractor's submissions until the submissions have been endorsed as satisfactory. If a document contains errors, submit a new or amended document as appropriate.

10.7.3 DelayDelays caused by late submission or inadequacy of contractor's submissions are not recognised as a reason for a variation, time extension or addition to the contract sum.

10.7.4 As-constructed drawings - Witness PointWitness Point - Provide As Constructed drawings and information. Show information of building elements, plant, and equipment across all disciplines. Show co-ordinate dimensions where applicable. Refer to the NTG Technical Drawings Part 1 - Requirements for Technical Records Management document, which is accessible via https://dipl.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-records . Drawings without changes shall be described as "As Constructed - No Changes" in the amendment description column.

Hard copies of documents are no longer required. Electronic copies in Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, pdf, .dwg or .dgn, or as specified, are required.

Document all changes to and variations of the design as the work proceeds.

Provide amended versions of the information and drawings which reflect the as built conditions.

Provide PDF copies of drawings in A3 size format and provide the drawings in CAD format in AutoCAD or MicroStation. Provide copies of text information in A4 portrait format in Microsoft Word, and/or PDF format. Provide tables and schedules in Microsoft Excel and/or PDF. Standard: To AS 1100(set) Technical drawing.

Where the drawings are to be reduced, the annotation character heights shall be selected so that the annotation character heights as reproduced are not less than 1.8 mm. Resolution to be a minimum of 600 dpi.

Provide the amended information and drawings to the Superintendent progressively as the work proceeds, with or before the claim for the variation which led to the need to amend the information and drawings to accurately reflect the as built condition.

Witness Point - Before the work commences provide a proposed procedure for recording and submitting the amended drawings.

Use an independent surveyor who is eligible for membership of the Institution of Surveyors Australia or the Institution of Engineering and Mining Surveyors Australia to record the changes and variations.

10.7.5 Warranties – Witness PointName the principal as warrantee.


https://dipl.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-records

https://dipl.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-records


Witness Point - Provision: Provide the standard manufacturer’s warranty. Provision of warranties does not affect the responsibilities of the contractor under the contract. Provide electronic copies of warranties at or before final completion.

10.7.6 Authority's approvals - Witness PointWitness Point - Submit the documents evidencing approval of the authorities whose requirements apply to the work.

10.7.7 HandoverOn or before practical completion provide:

An electronic copy of the as constructed drawings.

A list of plant and equipment installed as part of the project. Include the following details:

Make

Model

Year of manufacture

Capacity

Location.

Details of the maintenance and servicing regime that will be undertaken during the defects liability period. Provide a servicing schedule for each item of plant and equipment which will be serviced and maintained during the defects liability period.

Provision of these docs will be required before the final payment can be processed, and, if required, final certificate issued.

At handover all services and utilities included in the project are to have been transferred in to the name of the client or occupant(s) of the building and/or site as directed by the Superintendent. These services and utilities include, but are not limited to:

Phone service

Data service including internet

Electric power service

Water supply service

Sewerage service

Gas service.

10.7.8 Contractor's Environmental Management Plan (CEMP)Submit details of procedures to protect the environment. Refer to the Standard Specification for Environmental Management. Submission of a Contractor's Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) may be required.

10.7.9 Project Control Plan (PCP)Submit a project control plan for the project which sets out in detail all control procedures for the project. A framework Project Control Plan document is available at NTG Specification Services



webpage: https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-specifications

This document is to be prepared by the Contractor and not a third party.

10.7.10 Inspection Test Plans (ITPs) - Witness PointITPs are required for all construction processes.

Witness Point - Submit ITPs detailing all procedures and test plans to be undertaken.

10.7.11 Testing and commissioning reports - Witness PointWitness Point - Provide copies of reports of all results of all testing and commissioning procedures undertaken under this contract.

10.8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENTThe Standard Specification for Environmental Management applies for all construction and demolition work for building and civil works carried out by or on behalf of the Northern Territory Government. The Standard Specification for Environmental Management takes precedence over this specification. A copy of that document is available at:

https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-specifications/environmental-management

10.9 TIME ALLOWED FOR ASSESMENT OF SUBMITTED DOCUMENTSThis clause is related to documents which are to be submitted by the Contractor to the Superintendent for assessment and/or acceptance and/or approval and/or appraisal.

The documents subject to this clause include, but are not limited to:

Traffic Management Plan

Inspection and Test Plans

Project Control Plan

Quality Assurance Plan

Work Health and Safety Plan

Indigenous Development Plan

Contractor's Environmental Management Plan which incorporates:

Erosion and Sediment Control Plan

Acid Sulphate Soils Management Plan

Weed Management Plan

Asbestos Management Plan.

The Superintendent will provide a response in respect to the submitted documents to the Contractor within a reasonable time. The length of time considered reasonable will depend on the complexity of the documents, the amount of information in the documents and the workload of the DoI personnel who will assess the documents. The length of time considered reasonable can be negotiated between the Contractor and the Superintendent. Any such negotiated time must be fair to both parties.







If the documents are rejected, not accepted, not approved or returned for modification, the Superintendent will have an additional reasonable time period to assess the amended documents.

The time taken by the Superintendent to assess submitted documents or to assess re-submitted documents and to respond to the Contractor will not be accepted as a reason for the Contractor to claim an extension of time nor to claim a variation for costs related to the preparation of, or modification to, documents to be submitted or re-submitted.

These time frames do not apply in emergency situations where faster responses are appropriate.

Resubmitted documents must be sent with the changes made clearly marked. Changes should only be made to the plans to the extent required by the Superintendent. Any changes not explicitly requested by the Superintendent but made in the resubmitted plans must be clearly visible in the document and the reasons for making the changes must be explained in a separate document or the covering email. Changes not made obvious and not explained or made obvious but not explained will not be accepted under the contract whether this is advised to the Contractor or not. Changes which were not requested but are made obvious and which are explained will be assessed during the re-assessment process.

Plans required in respect to works in specialised facilities such as health care facilities and secure facilities will be subject to responses in time frames to be negotiated.

10.10CAMP SITE/COMPOUND/WORKSHOP - HOLD POINTHold Point - Obtain written permission from the owner or lessee of the land.

Pay all costs associated with the use of the site(s).

Maintain all facilities in good condition.

Remove all facilities, unless otherwise agreed in writing with owner or lessee of land, and restore the site to a clean and tidy condition upon completion of the works.

Assume all responsibility for any current and consequential damage caused to the site as a result of occupation.

10.11SAFETYComply with the Work Health and Safety (National Uniform Legislation) Act and Regulations and any applicable Codes of Practice.

10.11.1 Work Health and Safety Management Plan - Hold PointHold Point - If the Act requires it, provide a Work Health and Safety Management Plan within 14 calendar days of award of the contract. Do not commence works until the Superintendent has advised that the Work Health and Safety Management Plan may be used.

Comply with the Work Health and Safety (National Uniform Legislation) Act and Regulations and any applicable Codes of Practice.

A person with control of a construction project, irrespective of monetary value of the contract, where five or more persons are working, or are likely to be working simultaneously on a construction site must ensure that:

A site-specific Work Health and Safety Management Plan is prepared before the work commences and

The plan is monitored, maintained and kept up to date during the course of the Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 58RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road


work.

The person with control of the construction project must ensure that the Work Health and Safety Management Plan includes, but is not limited to:

A statement of responsibilities, listing the names, positions and responsibilities of all persons who will have specific responsibilities on the site for Work Health and Safety.

The detail of arrangements for ensuring compliance with the Work Health and Safety induction training requirements of this national standard.

The detail of arrangements for the co-ordination of health and safety issues of persons engaged to undertake construction work.

The detail of arrangements for managing Work Health and Safety incidents when they occur, including the identities of and contact details of all persons who will be available to prevent, prepare for, respond to and manage recovery from such incidents.

Any site safety rules, with the detail of arrangements for ensuring that all persons at the site, whether employees, contractors, suppliers or visitors, are informed of the rules.

The hazard identification, risk assessment and risk control information for all work activities assessed as having safety risks and

The safe work method statements for all high-risk construction work.

10.11.2 Safety Officer - Witness PointWitness Point - Appoint a Safety Officer and notify the Superintendent of the officer's name.

Ensure the Safety Officer is capable and available at all times as required by the Standards.

The Superintendent retains the right to revoke the appointment of the Safety Officer at any time, and direct that another person be appointed.

10.11.3 Safety practiceProvide safety equipment, protective clothing and devices and first aid facilities.

Ensure that employees are instructed concerning hazards and how to avoid injury.

Observe good safety practices throughout the Contract.

10.11.4 Safety helmetsAdhere to the requirements of the Construction Safety Act.

10.12MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

10.12.1 GenerallyAll materials to be fit for purpose and comply with all relevant requirements of Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards.

10.12.2 Manufacturers' and/or suppliers' recommendations



Select, if no selection is made in the specification, and provide, transport, deliver, store, handle, protect, install, finish, connect, adjust, test, commission and prepare for use the manufactured and/or supplied items, materials and/or products in accordance with the manufacturers' and/or suppliers' current written recommendations and instructions. If the items, materials and/or products are supplied in sealed containers and/or packaging deliver them to site in the original containers and/or packaging.

10.12.3 Proprietary items/systems/assembliesAssemble, install or fix in place in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer or supplier.

10.12.4 Project modifications - Hold PointHold Point - Advise the Superintendent of any activities that supplement, or are contrary to, the recommendations of the manufacturer or supplier before undertaking that non conforming work.

10.12.5 Adhesives, sealants and fasteners - Performance RequirementsFitness for purpose

The products provided must be capable of transmitting imposed loads without failure, sufficient to make sure the rigidity of the assembly or integrity of the joint.

Finished surface

The products provided must not cause discolouration of finishes.

Compatibility

The products provided must be compatible with any materials with which they come into contact, whether the contact is direct physical contact or indirect contact such substances as being washed by water from one location to another.

Sealant replacement

Sealant products provided must be able to be removed safely without compromising the substrates' capacity to enable replacement sealant to adhere and seal effectively.

Movement

If joints will be subject to movement select products or a system which is certified to withstand the anticipated movements without failing.

Fasteners

Use fasteners accredited for use in the particular applications and which are capable of transmitting the imposed loads while maintaining the rigidity of the assembly and without failing.

10.12.6 ProtectionThe contractor is responsible for the preservation and protection from damage or wear of all newly installed materials, equipment, fittings and fixtures coverings and coatings. All materials, equipment, fittings and fixtures coverings and coatings shall be presented in as new condition free from defects or damage at practical completion.

10.13PROJECT NOTICE BOARDS - SUPPLY, ERECT AND MAINTAIN PROJECT NOTICE BOARDS



Confirm if project notice board is required, if required allow to supply and install a notice board/project sign in accordance with the NTG standard drawings, wording and image to be supplied.

10.14CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY WHITE CARDAll workers on site are to undertake and complete Prepare to work safely in the construction industry (CPCCWHS1001), or superseding or preceding equivalent qualification recognised by training.gov.au, and hold a valid current NT White Card issued in their name by NT WorkSafe.

Site specific and Task specific induction training is still required for all work sites and is to be provided by the employer.

10.15SEALING OF REVEALS AT OPENINGSSeal reveals at openings in external walls, and in walls which are between conditioned and non-conditioned spaces, with material which is impervious to water before installing windows, doors or other items in those openings.

10.16ASBESTOSRefer to the asbestos clause in the Conditions of Contract.

Comply with the requirements of NT WorkSafe and the Work Health and Safety (N.U.L) Act and Regulations. Refer to the Code of Practice - How to safely remove asbestos and the Code of Practice - How to manage and control asbestos in the work place.


DEMOLITION

11 DEMOLITION

11.1 GENERAL

11.1.1 Cross ReferencesRefer to the following sections:

QUALITY ASSURANCE



GROUNDWORKS, for clearing, excavation and excavation support.

11.1.2 StandardAS 2601 The demolition of structures.

11.2 INSPECTIONS - WITNESS POINTWitness Points

Give sufficient notice so that inspections may be made at the following stages:

Commencement of demolition

Contents of building before commencement of demolition

Suspected hazardous materials including asbestos

Adjoining structures before commencement of demolition

Existing services before disconnection or diversion

Trees specified to be retained before commencement of demolition

Site after removal of demolished materials

Services after re-connection or diversion

Completion of demolition.

11.3 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS - WITNESS POINT

11.3.1 Hazardous materialsWitness Point - Give notice immediately if any hazardous materials or conditions are found.

11.3.2 AsbestosRefer to the Asbestos clause in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and in the Conditions of Contract.

11.3.3 Demolished and salvaged materialsExcept for materials to be salvaged or re-used, demolished materials are the property of the Contractor and must be removed from the site. Do not burn or bury demolished materials on the site. Dispose of waste demolished materials in a legal manner at legal waste disposal sites.

Salvage: Recover materials to be salvaged or re-used without damage.

Re-use: Re-use only materials recovered from the demolitions in a sound and suitable condition.


DEMOLITION

Storage: Store in an approved location any materials to be re-used.

Removal: Cover materials in transit to prevent spillage.

11.4 DEMOLITION

11.4.1 ProtectionProtect property, which is to remain on or adjacent to the site from interference or damage. Make good any such damage to match existing.

11.4.2 SupportProvide temporary support for sections of existing buildings which are to be altered and which normally rely for support on work to be demolished. Support until permanently supported on new work. Clear away temporary supports on completion.

Ground support: Support excavations for demolition of underground structures.

11.4.3 Weather protectionIf walls or roofs are opened for alterations and additions or the surfaces of adjoining buildings are exposed, provide temporary covers to prevent water penetration. Provide covers to protect existing plant and equipment and materials intended for re-use.

11.4.4 Dust protectionProvide dust-proof screens, bulkheads and covers to protect existing finishes and the immediate environment from dust and debris.

Adjacent property: Protect property either adjacent or on site from interference or damage by appropriate means.

Reinstatement: Make good any damage caused during demolition to match the existing.

11.4.5 SecurityIf a wall or roof is opened for alterations or additions, provide security against unauthorized entry to the building.

11.4.6 ExplosivesDo not use explosives.


GROUNDWORKS

12 GROUNDWORKS

12.1 GENERAL




DEMOLITION

TERMITE CONTROL, for chemical spraying applications

CONCRETE, for vapour barriers

STORMWATER, for service trenches

SANITARY SERVICES, for service trenches

WATER, for service trenches

LP GAS for service trenches

WIRING AND ACCESSORIES, for service trenches

PAVING, for sub-grade preparation and for gravel driveways

ROADS, for sub-grade preparation

LANDSCAPE, for placing topsoil, tree surgery and surplus topsoil.

12.1.2 DefinitionsBad ground: Ground unsuitable for the purposes of the works, including ground liable to subsidence or heaving, ground containing cavities, faults or fissures, ground contaminated by harmful substances and ground which is or becomes soft, wet or unstable.

Line of influence: A line extending downward and outward from the bottom edge of a footing, slab or pavement and defining the extent of foundation material having influence on the stability or support of the footings, slab or pavement.

Angle from horizontal: 45 degrees

Rock: The contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for the cost of performing the required excavations in whatever material may be encountered, and no extra payment shall be paid for excavation in rock.

Subgrade surface: The trimmed or prepared portion of the formation on which the pavement or slab is constructed.

12.1.3 StandardsAS 1289.5 Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes - Soil compaction &

density tests

AS1289.5.4.1 -Compaction control test - Dry density ratio, moisture variation and moisture ratio

AS 4373 Pruning of amenity trees


GROUNDWORKS

12.2 INSPECTIONS - WITNESS POINTWitness Points

Give sufficient notice so that inspections may be made at the following stages:

Enclosures to trees to be retained

Excavation completed to contract levels or founding material

Services laid in trenches and ready for backfilling.

12.3 BAD GROUND - WITNESS POINTImmediate notice

Witness Point - If bad ground is encountered, give notice immediately and obtain instructions before carrying out any further work in the area.

12.4 TREES TO BE RETAINED

12.4.1 MarkingMark trees to be retained by suitable non-injurious, easily visible and removable means of identification. Remove the identification on completion.

Trees to be retained: Refer to site plan and further, as determined with the Superintendent and direct on site.

12.4.2 ProtectionProtect from damage the trees to be retained, including those beyond the contractor's site area. Do not remove topsoil from the area within the drip line of the trees and keep this area free of construction material and debris.

12.4.3 EnclosuresProvide temporary protective enclosures consisting of four strands of fencing wire, or plastic mesh barrier, supported on star pickets spaced at not more than 4 m centres.

Trees to be enclosed: Refer drawings – to be confirmed on site with the Superintendent

Type of enclosure: Refer drawings – to be confirmed on site with the Superintendent

12.4.4 Work on treesIf it is necessary to perform any work on trees, give notice and obtain instructions before undertaking the work. Refer to the Refer to AS 4373 and to the Tree Surgery clause in LANDSCAPE.

12.4.5 ExcavationIf excavation is required near trees to be retained, give notice and obtain instructions before excavating. Use hand methods to locate, expose and cleanly remove the roots on the line of excavation.

12.4.6 Removal


GROUNDWORKS

If a tree is damaged and repair work is considered impractical, or is attempted and fails, remove the tree and root system, if so directed. Replace the tree with a tree of the same species and similar condition and size or pay compensation.

Compensation for damage to existing vegetation shall be borne by the Contractor and determined as follows:

Tree valuation rate: $10 per cm of tree circumference at a height 1m above the ground.

Maximum valuation: $2500 per tree.

Minimum valuation: $250 per tree.

12.5 EXISTING SERVICES

12.5.1 MarkingBefore commencing groundworks, locate and mark existing underground services in the areas which will be affected by the groundworks operations including clearing, excavating and trenching.

12.5.2 Excavation - Hold PointHold Point - Do not excavate by machine within 1 m of existing underground services without approval.

12.5.3 GRAVESGrave sites to be protected Not applicable to all site, refer to site plan Drawings for details. If in doubt seek advice from superintendent, before proceeding with works.

Protection Erect temporary fencing or barrier around graves exclusion area. Do not remove topsoil from the area trees and keep this area free of construction material and debris. Ensure vehicles are kept away from the grave area. Take all precautions to prevent any damage and the immediate area.

Excavation None allowed

12.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

12.6.1 Specification reference The Standard Specification for Environmental Management applies for all construction and demolition work for building and civil works carried out by or on behalf of the Northern Territory Government. A copy of that document is available at: https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/specification-services/technical-specifications/environmental-management

The Standard Specification for Environmental Management takes precedence over this specification.


https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/specification-services/technical-specifications/environmental-management

https://transport.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/specification-services/technical-specifications/environmental-management

GROUNDWORKS

12.6.2 Erosion controlPlan and carry out the work to avoid erosion, contamination, and sedimentation of the site, surrounding areas, and drainage systems. Provide suitable temporary control measures as required.

12.6.3 De-wateringKeep groundworks free of water. Provide and maintain slopes, crowns and drains on excavations and embankments to ensure free drainage. Place construction, including masonry, concrete and services, on ground from which free water has been removed. Prevent water flow over freshly laid work.

12.7 SITE CLEARING

12.7.1 ExtentClear only the site areas occupied by works such as buildings, paving, excavations, regrading and landscaping and areas identified as areas to be cleared.

12.7.2 Clearing operationsRemove everything on or above the site surface, including rubbish, scraps, grass, vegetable matter and organic debris, scrub, trees, timber, stumps, boulders and rubble. Remove grass to a depth just sufficient to include the root zone.

Grubbing: Grub out stumps and roots over 75 mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500 mm below subgrade surface under buildings or paving, or 300 mm below finished surface in unpaved areas.

12.7.3 SpoilRemove surplus excavated material or site clearance material from the site.

12.7.4 Removal of topsoilRemove the topsoil layer of the natural ground to a depth of 100 mm over the areas to be excavated and areas to be occupied by structures, pavements, embankments and the like. If the topsoil extends to a depth greater than 100 mm give notice and obtain instructions before proceeding.

Topsoil stockpiles

Stockpile site topsoil approved for re-use. Protect the topsoil stockpiles from contamination by other excavated material, weeds and building debris.

12.8 EXCAVATION

12.8.1 ExtentSite surface: Excavate over the site to give correct levels and profiles as the basis for construction, paving, filling and landscaping. Make allowance for compaction or settlement.

Footings: Excavate for footings, pits, wells and shafts, to the required sizes and depths. Confirm that bearing capacity is adequate.

12.8.2 SupportsTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 67RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

GROUNDWORKS

Remove temporary supports progressively as backfilling proceeds.

12.8.3 Bearing surfacesProvide level bearing surfaces for load bearing elements including footings. Step to accommodate level changes. Make the steps to the appropriate courses if supporting masonry.

12.8.4 ReinstatementWhere excavation exceeds the required depth, or deteriorates, reinstate to the correct depth, level and bearing value.

12.8.5 Existing footingsIf excavation is required below the line of influence of an existing footing, use methods which maintain the support of the footing and ensure that the structure and finishes supported by the footing are not damaged.

12.8.6 Explosives - Hold Point - Witness PointHold Point - Do not use explosives unless approval has been granted by the Superintendent.

Witness Point - Provide evidence to the Superintendent of the following:

Licence to carry and store explosives

Vehicle licensed to carry explosives

Shot firer's certificate.

Inspect and record the condition of all structures and services subject to possible effect by use of explosives before and after blasting operations.

12.9 GRADING

12.9.1 External areasGrade to give falls away from buildings, minimum 1:100.

12.9.2 Subfloor areasGrade the ground surface under suspended floors to drain ground or surface water away from buildings without ponding.

Minimum clear crawl space: 600 mm.

12.10SURFACE PREPARATION

12.10.1 GeneralPrepare the ground surface before placing fill, ground slabs or load bearing elements. Remove loose material, debris and organic matter and compact the ground to achieve the required density.

12.10.2 BenchingCut a bench at the toe of the lower side batter when natural surface inclines at steeper than eight horizontal to one vertical.

Ensure the bench is 3 metres wide to provide a sound key for the toe of the fill.


GROUNDWORKS

Terrace the existing surface where side slopes are steeper than three horizontal to one vertical to provide a key for the fill.

12.10.3 Under earth moundsCultivate the ground to a depth of 200 mm prior to mound formation.

12.10.4 TolerancesFinish the surface to the required level, grade and shape within the following tolerances:

Under slabs and load bearing elements: +0, -25 mm.

Other ground surfaces: ±50 mm, provided the area remains free draining and matches adjacent construction where required. Smoothness as normally produced by a grader blade.

12.11FILL

12.11.1 SourceProvide fill free from organic matter, imported on to the site from an approved source unless the fill type can be provided from spoil recovered from the excavations or designated borrow pits.

12.11.2 Fill typesGeneral fill: Inorganic, material, maximum particle size 75 mm, plasticity index not exceeding 30%.

Select fill: Naturally occurring material, crushed or quarried stone, crushed gravel, or a mixture of crushed or quarried material free of lumps of clay and free from organic or other deleterious material and complying with the following requirements:

Table - Select Fill PropertiesA.S. Metric Sieve Percentage Passing By Weight

75.0 mm 100

9.50 mm 30 - 100

2.36 mm 15 - 65

0.075 mm 5 - 25

Property RequirementLiquid Limit Maximum 35%

Plasticity Index Maximum 12%

Linear Shrinkage 2% - 6%

C.B.R. - 4 day soaked Minimum 40%

Hardcore: Inorganic hard material capable of being compacted to an even stable surface.

Porous filling: Aggregate graded from 40 mm to 15 mm.


GROUNDWORKS

12.11.3 Imported fillPrior to placing any imported fill, submit certification or test results, which establish its compliance with the contract.

12.12PLACING FILL

12.12.1 GeneralPlace fill in layers not exceeding 150 mm deep and compact each layer to achieve the required density.

12.12.2 Placing at structuresPlace and compact fill in layers simultaneously on both sides of structures, culverts and pipelines to avoid differential loading.

12.12.3 Moisture contentMix the material uniformly with water to achieve a moisture content within 2% of the optimum for the specified conforming dry density ratio.

Table - Fill schedule

Location Fill type Depth Maximum layer thickness (loose)

Floor slabs on ground As per drawings

Paving As per drawings

On paved external areas As per drawings

12.12.4 Test rollingLocation: Subgrade surface below slabs and pavements.

Roller type and size: Maximum mass pneumatic tyre roller.

Acceptance criteria: No deformation.

12.13REQUIRED DENSITYTable - Minimum Density

LocationMinimum dry density ratio (standard compaction) to AS 1289.5.4.1

Residential: Lot fill 90

Footings and non spanning slab on ground areas of buildings 98


GROUNDWORKS

Embankments and paved areas:

> 0.15 m below subgrade surface

< 0.15 m below subgrade surface

90

95

All other areas:

> 0.3 m below finished surface

< 0.3 m below finished surface

90

95

12.14DENSITY TESTS

12.14.1 GeneralUse an independent testing laboratory. Rework and retest areas, which do not achieve the required density until that density is achieved.

12.14.2 Test locationsTest the areas of fill which will support non-spanning concrete ground slabs, roads and paved areas.

12.14.3 Test frequencyNot less than one test per 200 m3 or one test per layer per 1000 m2, whichever requires the more tests (minimum 3). Distribute the testing evenly throughout the fill.

Compaction test results: Provide a test certificate from a NATA registered laboratory as proof that the specified compaction has been achieved under each floor slab.

12.15SAND LAYERMaterial: Clean sharp sand free from deleterious material, well graded with at least 90% by weight passing the 4.75 mm sieve, and not more than 10% retained on the 0.075 mm sieve.

Extent: Place a layer of sand to the area of the building under concrete slabs.

Thickness: 50 mm nominal.

12.16SERVICE TRENCHES

12.16.1 ExcavationExcavate for underground services. Generally make the trenches straight between maintenance holes, inspection points and junctions, with vertical sides and uniform grades.

12.16.2 Trench widthsKeep trench widths to the minimum consistent with the laying and bedding of the relevant service and construction of manholes and pits.

12.16.3 BackfillingBackfill service trenches as soon as possible after approval of the laid and bedded service. Compact to the required density.


GROUNDWORKS

Backfill material: Select fill with no stones retained on a 25 mm sieve, or other materials as required for particular services or locations.

Under building slabs roads and paved areas: Coarse sand or fine crushed rock.


GROUNDWORKS

12.16.4 ReinstatementReinstate existing surfaces removed or disturbed by trench excavations to match existing and adjacent work.

12.16.5 BoringWhere under road boring is required in lieu of trenches, engage a suitably qualified subcontractor to do the work.


TERMITE CONTROL

13 TERMITE CONTROL

13.1 GENERALTermite control measures must comply with the requirements of NT Government, Building Advisory Services. Note; AS 2057 has been superseded by AS 3660. Also AS 2057 refers to chemicals which are now illegal to use.

All services penetrations through slabs must be fitted with termite protection collars.

DO NOT use graded stone protection systems.

13.1.1 Cross reference GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

CONCRETE.

13.1.2 StandardsAS 3660 Termite management

AS 3660.1 -New building work

AS 3660.2 -In and around existing buildings and structures - Guidelines

AS 3660.3 -Assessment criteria for termite management systems

13.1.3 InstallationEngage a suitably qualified Contractor to install the termite barriers.

13.2 INSPECTIONS

13.2.1 Notice – Witness PointWitness Point - Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:

Chemical spraying of under slab areas.

Stainless steel mesh barriers installed and before concrete is poured.

Chemical reticulation system installed ready for testing.

13.3 TESTS

13.3.1 Chemical soil barriers - reticulation systemsType testing: To AS 3660

13.3.2 Contractor’s submissionsSubmit a registered testing laboratory analysis certificate of chemical soil barrier type testing.

13.3.3 Chemical soil barriers - hand sprayingSubmit a registered testing laboratory analysis certificate of chemical soil barrier as directed by the Superintendent.

Number of Tests: 2


TERMITE CONTROL

13.4 NON-CHEMICAL BARRIERS

13.4.1 Cap and strip shieldsProjection: Install so no edge is less than 55 mm from the vertical face of the wall or pier.

Material: Galvanized Steel.

Thickness: 0.6 mm BMT.

13.4.2 Stainless steel mesh barriersProprietary Item: Termi-Mesh tm

Mesh Aperture Size: 0.6 x 0.4

Locations: Provide Termi-Mesh tm barriers to the concrete slab perimeter and at all penetrations and construction or control joints.

Installation: Install Termi-Mesh tm barriers to the details shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

13.5 CHEMICAL SOIL BARRIERSInstall collars on penetrations and install a low pressure reticulation system to the perimeter strip and on both sides of, and close to, construction joints.

13.5.1 Hand spray applicationGeneral: In accordance with AS 3660.

Chemical: Proprietary Item: BiFlex or Dursban. For Educational institutions projects use Fipronil.

Installation: Hand spray all areas under the concrete slab immediately before laying the vapour barrier.

Perimeter Treatment: Hand spray around the perimeter of the slab after the finished ground levels have been achieved and immediately before pouring the concrete protection strip.

Concrete protection strip: Refer to Miscellaneous Items clause in the CONCRETE worksection.

13.6 RETICULATION SYSTEM - HOLD POINTInstall a Chemical Reticulation System in accordance with AS 3660.

System Type: a perimeter re-treatment system including reticulation to protect slab penetrations and control joints.

or

A complete under slab re-treatment system, including perimeter treatment.

Approved Installers: Have the system designed and installed by suitably qualified specialists in this field.

Use Fipronil based termiticide for projects at Educational institutions.

Hold point - Reticulation Design: Provide a detailed reticulation plan to the Superintendent for approval. Include on the plan the proposed locations of the feeder manifolds and injector points.


TERMITE CONTROL

13.7 PROTECTIONLiaise with other trades to protect the system during construction and to ensure the final integrity of the complete system.

13.8 GUARANTEEProvide a guarantee in the name of the building owner from the manufacturer of the particular system used.

13.9 COMPLETION - WITNESS POINTChemical soil barriers

Certification: Submit certificates to AS 3660 at each stage of treatment including a certificate of completion.

Witness Point - Provide a durable notice permanently fixed in a prominent location as detailed in the BCA B1.4(i)(ii) or BCA 3.1.3.2(b). Generally fix to the inside of the door to the electricity meter box.


CONCRETE

14 CONCRETE

14.1 GENERAL

14.1.1 Cross referencesRefer to the following sections:


TERMITE CONTROL.

14.1.2 StandardsAS 1214 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse

thread series)

AS 1379 Specification and supply of concrete

AS 1478.1 Chemical admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout - Admixtures for concrete

AS 2870 Residential slabs and footings

AS 3600 Concrete structures

AS 3610 Formwork for concrete

AS 3610.1 -Documentation and surface finish.

AS 3700 Masonry structures

AS 3799 Liquid membrane-forming curing compounds for concrete

AS 3850 Tilt-up concrete construction

AS 4100 Steel Structures

AS/NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays

AS 4586 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials

AS 4654 Waterproofing membrane systems for exterior use - Above ground level

AS 4654.2 -Design and installation

AS/NZS 4671 Steel reinforcing materials

AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles

14.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

14.2.1 New ConcreteAll new concrete works shall be cured to a minimum 28 days before application of coatings, unless otherwise approved. Any foreign materials such as oils, grease, waxes, form release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, sealers, salts, laitance, or other contaminants shall be effectively removed.


CONCRETE

Abrasive blasting should be used to prepare the surfaces. All debris shall be removed following the cleaning and disposed of in an appropriate waste facility. Acid etching may only be used for horizontal surfaces only. The concentration of HCl solution used for acid etching shall not exceed 10%. The etched surface shall be adequately washed with fresh water to remove any residual acid. This is indicated when the water used for washing has reached around pH 7. The concrete surface finish shall be sufficiently rough to receive the coating. Typically it is equivalent to sandpaper with grit 80 or coarser.

Level or grind concrete substrates to manufacturer's recommended tolerances and to produce a textured but uniform installation, including removal of all sharp edges, ridges or depressions. New concrete voids and depressions shall be filled with render/filler material, re-establishing plan finished grades and surface profiles

Cementitious rendering products shall be used for surface levelling, filling voids, large bugholes, and for general concrete patching and shall be installed and cured according to manufacturer's guidelines. Polymer modified filler and repair products shall be used for filling and repairing small bugholes, static cracks and joints, and for general concrete patching in order to provide uniform and void free surface for coating application.

14.2.2 Old ConcreteAny drummy or delaminated concrete sections, or concrete deteriorated by corrosion or other means, shall be broken out and removed so that sound substrate remains. Sound concrete shall have pH 10 or greater. This may be indicated using a phenolphthalein solution spray. All oil, grease and chemical contaminants must be removed from the surface of concrete. Concrete surrounding any corroded reinforcement bars shall be broken out beyond the limits of corrosion until clean bar is evident, and at least 20 mm behind the bar. Where there is a potential for excessive removal of substrate material, or the reinforcement bar has more than surface corrosion, a direction from the Principal shall be sought. Any exposed reinforcement shall be primed with zinc rich coating, and fully embedded without any air pockets being entrapped. The surface shall be steel trowelled, and its profile shall be made to achieve optimum bond with the protective coating.

The broken out voids and lost concrete sections shall be restored back to the original surface level using a suitable patch repair mortar. Feathered edges shall be avoided by saw cutting to a minimum depth of 10 mm at the edges of the area to be patched.

Static cracks wider than 0.3 mm shall be repaired. The path along the crack shall be chased forming a wedge-shaped slot of 20 mm wide x 20 mm deep. The slot is then filled with polymer modified repair mortar. The surface shall be struck flush with the cleaned concrete adjacent to the crack. Any active crack shall be treated as a joint, and repaired using a waterproof joint sealant system. Any infiltration at the crack shall be stopped first prior to undertaking crack repair.

14.3 INSPECTIONS

14.3.1 Notice – Witness PointWitness Point - Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:

Base or subgrade before covering.

Membrane or film underlay installed on the base or subgrade.

Termite barrier and film underlay installed on the base.

Completed formwork, and reinforcement, cores and embedments fixed in place.


CONCRETE

Commencement of concrete placing.

Before core filling masonry.

Evaluation of the off-form finishes.

Evaluation of surface finish.

14.4 TESTS

14.4.1 Compressive strengthSample, test, and assess: To AS 3600 and AS 1379.

Concrete strength:

Min. characteristic compressive strength f’c = 25 MPa (28 day in accordance with AS3600) for N25

Min. characteristic compressive strength f’c = 32 MPa (28 day in accordance with AS3600) for N32

Project assessment: Required.

Agree to the method of strength assessment prior to ordering concrete. Production assessment may be used if applicable and if the project is registered with the concrete producer for dissemination of production assessment statistics.

14.4.2 Other quality parametersSample, test and assess: To: AS 1379.

Supplier to demonstrate compliance with AS 1379 for all exposed concrete

Slump: Test not less than one sample from each batch before placing concrete from that batch in the work. Take the samples at the point of discharge on site.

Additional tests: Slump - Normally 80mm Slump (+/- 15mm)

14.4.3 RejectionRemove rejected concrete from the site. Concrete may be rejected, for instance, if the nominal slump does not meet the above criteria, or other as determined by the Superintendent

14.4.4 Testing authorityNATA registered.

14.4.5 SamplingMethod of sampling: AS 1012.1.

14.5 CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONS

14.5.1 Sawn joints – Hold PointHold Point - Submit for information the proposed methods, timing and sequence of sawing. Provide 3mm x 30 deep saw cut joints (after 4 hours but within 12 hours of pour) to external concrete slabs at 5 metre max ctrs each way, cut every second mesh wire crossing. Provide approved flexible joint sealer.


CONCRETE

14.6 TERMITE BARRIERRefer to the TERMITE CONTROL worksection.

14.6.1 Proprietary mesh barrierFor details of stainless steel mesh barriers incorporation into the concrete slab refer to the details on the drawings and to the TERMITE CONTROL worksection.

Liaise with the termite control subcontractor to ensure the termite protection system is not compromised when cast into the concrete slab.

14.7 VAPOUR BARRIER

14.7.1 GeneralProvide a vapour barrier under internal slabs on ground including integral ground beams and footings.

14.7.2 StandardVapour barriers and damp proof membranes: To: AS 2870 and to AS/NZS 4200.

14.7.3 Base preparationBlind the surface with 50 mm sand to cover any hard projections. Wet the sand just before placing the underlay.

14.7.4 InstallationTo: AS/NZS 4200. Lay over the base, lap joints 200 mm and seal the laps with waterproof adhesive tape. Seal penetrations with waterproof tape.

14.8 FORMWORK

14.8.1 Surface finish classUse the applicable Class from AS 3610.1, Table 3.2.1.

14.8.2 Visually important surfacesFor concrete of surface classes 1, 2 or 3, set out the formwork to give a regular arrangement of panels, joints, bolt holes, and similar visible elements in the formed surface. Form 45 0 bevels, 25 mm on the face on corners and angles unless otherwise specified.

14.8.3 Formwork removalRemove all formwork, including formwork in concealed locations.

Formed surfaces scheduleConcrete elementor surface

Surface finish classTo: AS 3610.1 – Table 3.2.1

Integral finish (if any)

Footings above ground Surface finish class 2C To: AS 3610.1 – Table 3.2.1

Stone rubbed and smooth

14.9 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES


CONCRETE

14.9.1 StandardTo: AS 3600, Tolerances for Structures and Members sub-clause, except where the requirements of this clause or to AS 3610.1, Physical Quality sub-clause are more stringent.

14.9.2 PositionConstruct formwork so that the position of finished concrete is within the tolerances stated in the Position tolerances table.

Position tolerances table ClassFormwork Class To: AS 3610.1 1 2 3 4Maximum deviation from correct position (mm) 10 15 20 25

14.10REINFORCEMENT

14.10.1 GeneralSupply and fix reinforcement, including tie wires, support chairs, spacers and accessories.

Identification: Supply reinforcement which is readily identifiable as to grade and origin.

14.10.2 DowelsTo: AS/NZS 4671 Classification and Designation Clause, Grade R250N, each dowel in one piece, straight, with square cut ends free from burrs. Apply two coats of bitumen emulsion to half the length of the dowel at one end. Embed the unpainted half of the dowels in the concrete placed first.

Tolerances:

Location: ± half the diameter of the dowel.

Alignment: 2 mm in 300 mm

Reinforcement Cover Schedule

Concrete surface Required cover (mm)

Footing cast on membrane 30

Footing cast directly against ground 60

Slabs on ground – top / bottom / sides internal 25, external 40

Elsewhere internal 25, external 40

14.11PRESTRESSED TENDONS

14.11.1 GeneralProvide prestressed tendons, anchorages, ducts, supports, grout and anchorage protection.

Required concrete cover to prestressing steel and ducts is the same as for reinforcing steel.

Other requirements: N/A

14.12EMBEDDED ITEMS


CONCRETE

14.12.1 Placing and fixing – Hold PointHold Point - Fix cores and embedded items to prevent movement during concrete placing. Obtain approval before cutting reinforcement or displacing reinforcement from its required location.

14.12.2 Tolerances on placementMaximum deviation from correct positions:

Embedded items generally: ± 10 mm.

Fasteners including, anchor bolts: ± 3 mm.

Anchor bolt groups for structural steel: To: AS 4100 Tolerances sub-clause, Location of anchor bolts paragraph.

14.12.3 Corrosion protectionGalvanize ferrous fixings (other than stainless steel) to AS/NZS 4680 or AS 1214. Passivate galvanized surfaces to be embedded in concrete by dipping in 0.2% sodium dichromate solution.

14.13CONCRETE

14.13.1 Chemical admixturesDo not use admixtures without obtaining prior written approval from the Superintendent.

Chemical admixtures for concrete and their use must conform to AS 1478.1.

Where two or more chemical admixtures are proposed for incorporation into a concrete mix, their compatibility must be certified by the manufacturers'.

Storage: Store admixtures in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations.

Refer to the Addition of admixtures clause.

14.13.2 Ready mixed supply – Hold PointHold Point - To: AS 1379: Section 5. Nominate the slump and mix proportions prior to supplying any concrete. These values will be used for acceptance or rejection of concrete on site.

14.13.3 Concrete placingPlace concrete in layers such that each succeeding layer is blended into the preceding one by the compaction process.

Placing slabs and pavements: Place concrete uniformly over the width of the slab so that the face is generally vertical and normal to the direction of placing.

14.13.4 Hot weather placing – Hold PointThe provisions of this clause apply to concreting when the surrounding shade outdoor temperature is greater than 32 C.

Hold Point - Mixing: Do not mix concrete when the outdoor shade temperature on the site exceeds 38C, unless otherwise approved by Superintendent and then only subject to such conditions as may be imposed.


CONCRETE

Handling: Take precautions to prevent premature stiffening of the fresh mix and to reduce water absorption and evaporation losses. Mix, transport, place and compact the concrete as rapidly as possible.

Placing: Before and during concrete placing maintain the formwork and reinforcement at a temperature not greater than 32C by protection, cold water spraying, or other effective means. When placed in the formwork, the temperature of the concrete shall not exceed 35C.

Temperature control methods: Submit for approval the proposed method or methods of maintaining the specified temperature of the placed concrete, which may include:

using chilled mixing water; or

spraying the coarse aggregate with cold water; or

covering the container in which the concrete is transported to the forms; or

a combination of these methods.

Evaporation Control: Erect barriers to protect freshly laid concrete from drying winds.

Immediately after placement, cover the concrete with an impervious membrane, or hessian kept wet, until curing begins.

As an alternative to immediate covering where temperature exceeds 25C or where not protected against drying winds, protect the concrete with a fog spray application of aliphatic alcohol evaporation retardant.

14.13.5 CompactionFully compact the concrete to remove entrapped air. Avoid over-vibration that may cause segregation.

For slabs up to 100mm in thickness, the placing, screeding and finishing operations shall be deemed to provide adequate compaction.

For slabs up to 200mm in thickness, immersion vibrators or vibrating screeds shall be used. If vibrating screeds are used the area adjacent to any edges shall be vibrated with immersion vibrators.

For slabs exceeding 200mm in thickness immersion vibrators shall be used

Compaction of concrete shall be carried out in a systematic manner to ensure uniform aggregate distribution.VibrationMechanical vibration equipment shall not be used to move concrete, and immersion vibrators shall not be dragged over reinforcement.

14.13.6 Curing During the curing period continuously maintain the concrete, with minimum moisture

loss, at a reasonably constant temperature, not excessively hot or cold, by a suitable method which may include the following:

Ponding or continuous sprinkling with water (wet curing)

An impermeable membrane

An absorptive cover kept continuously wet

An approved curing compound.


CONCRETE

Curing period: From the time the concrete is finished, until the elapse of the following number of days or fractions of days (not necessarily consecutive), during which time the air temperature in contact with the concrete is above 10C.

In-ground footings: 3 days

Fully enclosed internal surfaces: 3 days

Exposed footings, beams and slabs: 7 day

Other surfaces: 7 days

End of curing period: Prevent rapid drying out at the end of the curing period

Protection: Maintain at a reasonably constant temperature with minimum moisture loss, during the curing period.

Cold weather curing

Temperature: Maintain concrete surface temperatures above 5°C for the duration of the curing period.

Hot weather curing

Curing compounds: If curing compounds are proposed, provide details.

Protection: Select a protection method from the following:

If the concrete temperature is more than 25°C or if not protected against drying winds, protect the concrete using a fog spray application of aliphatic alcohol evaporation retardant.

If ambient shade temperature is more than 35°C, protect from wind and sun using an evaporative retarder until curing is commenced.

Immediately after finishing, either cover exposed surfaces using an impervious membrane or hessian kept wet until curing begins, or apply a curing compound.

Water curing

Method: Select a method of ponding or continuously sprinkling to prevent damage to the concrete surface during the required curing period.

14.13.7 Curing compoundsTo: AS 3799. Do not use wax-based or chlorinated rubber-based curing compounds on surfaces forming substrates to toppings such as concrete toppings and cement-based render. Apply as a continuous coating without visible breaks or pinholes, at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.

Concrete roads and hardstand areas: Compound Type 2 (white pigmented or containing reflective aluminium pigment). Respray within 3 hours of heavy rain.

Concrete ScheduleProperty Mass Concrete &

Strip FootingsSlab on ground Properties of

Grout for blockwork cores

Class of concrete To: AS 1379

N25 N32 S15

Strength characteristic 25 MPa 32 MPa 15 MPa


CONCRETE

>fc>19.5 MPa

Slump 65 ± 15 65 ± 15 Pourable

Cement content Greater than 350 kg/m3

Greater than 350 kg/m3

Greater than 300 kg/m3

Other requirements Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable

Cement type Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable

Cement test certificates: Provide test certificates

14.14ADDITION OF ADMIXTURESRefer to Concrete clause, Chemical admixtures sub clause in this work section.

Chemical admixtures may only be added subsequent to slump test compliance confirmation. A further slump test post admixtures addition may also be required.

Where the Superintendent has approved the addition of superplasticisers at the plant prior to dispatch of any concrete a slump test of each batch must be performed and recorded by a NATA accredited testing laboratory prior to the addition of the superplasticisers. The slump test report shall record the time of the addition of the superplasticisers, amount of the superplasticiser added and product identification.

Chemical admixtures: Admixtures are to be added in accurate amounts. Amounts being added are to be exact and measured using accurate and regularly maintained and calibrated devices.

Delay the addition of superplasticisers as long as practicable before the concrete is discharged from the concrete mixer. Make allowance for the reversion time of superplasticisers.

Agitate concrete for at least 5 minutes following the addition of superplasticiser before dispensing.

14.15PRECAST UNITS

14.15.1 GeneralManufacture the units accurately. Fix the units securely and accurately in their final positions. Supply components and materials, including fasteners, braces, and shims, jointing strips, sealant, flashings, grout and mortar.

Consider the strength of the units and all forces and loads that will possibly be imposed on the units prior to being finally fixed in final position, and make appropriate allowances when handling, transporting and placing.

14.15.2 Safety requirements, methods and equipmentTo: AS 3850

14.16WATERPROOF MEMBRANES

14.16.1 Asphalt tanking membrane


CONCRETE

Use a proprietary item waterproof membrane, 5 mm thick, of bituminoid asphalt materials, reinforced with fabric, with at least one layer in each sheet of an impermeable, non-corroding metal.

Installation: To: AS 4654.2

14.16.2 Single layer membranesUse sheets fixed and lapped with appropriate adhesive or heat welded by gas torch (torch on).

14.16.3 Seamless membranesUse membranes applied in liquid or gel form and air cured to form a seamless film.

14.16.4 Substrates for membranesApply the membrane to dry, smooth, firm, continuous surfaces, clean and free from loose or foreign matter. Provide coving or fillets on internal corners. Round or arris external corners and edges.

14.16.5 Membrane protectionProtect the membrane after installation with a permanent cover of rigid closed cell extruded polystyrene foam boarding with shiplapped edges, adhered to the membrane with a suitable bitumen or solvent-free adhesive.

14.16.6 Waterproof membranes scheduleLocation: As per drawings

Membrane type: As per drawings

Proprietary item: As per drawings

Total thickness: As per drawings

Other particulars: As per drawings

Membrane protection: As per drawings

14.17CEMENTITIOUS TOPPINGS

14.17.1 DefinitionToppings comprising aggregate bound with cement including granolithic and composite stone.

14.17.2 Preparing hardened surfacesIf toppings are to be applied to hardened concrete surfaces, scabble the surface to remove the surface layer and expose the aggregate. Thoroughly clean the surface and leave free of any residual material. Thoroughly dampen the surface and leave free of standing water. Immediately prior to placing scrub a coat of neat cement grout into the surface, or apply a suitable adhesive.

14.17.3 PlacingSpread the topping mix, compact, float to the tolerance class as defined in the Finishes to unformed surfaces clause in this work section and finish.

Thickness: Not less than 25 mm.


CONCRETE

Monolithic placing: Spread the topping mix as soon as surface water has disappeared from the base.

14.17.4 CuringUse a method which prevents cracking or crazing resulting from drying shrinkage without impairing the adhesion of subsequent finishes.

14.17.5 Granolithic toppingMix proportions: 1:1:1.5 cement: fine aggregate : 5 mm coarse aggregate.

Water cement ratio: 0.5 maximum.

Slump: 50 mm maximum.

14.17.6 PlacingMonolithic placing: Compact and float.

14.17.7 Margins to toppingsIntegral margins: Form margins to cementitious toppings integrally in the topping material.

Coved skirtings: Form the cove in topping material, and finish the top to a neatly struck line. Mitre internal and external angles.

Topping scheduleLocation Mix Colour

Standard: To AS 3610.1.

Finish Surface tolerance class

As per drawings

14.18JOINTS

14.18.1 Construction joints – Hold PointHold Point - Joint preparation: Obtain approval for proposed construction joints which are not shown on the drawings. Roughen and clean the hardened concrete joint surface, remove loose or soft material, free water, foreign matter and laitance. Dampen the surface just prior to placing the fresh concrete.

Location: Do not relocate or eliminate construction joints, or form undocumented construction joints . If emergency construction joints are made necessary by unforeseen interruptions to the concrete pour, submit a report on the action taken.

Finish: Butt join the surfaces of adjoining pours. In visually important surfaces make the joint straight and true, and free from blemishes impermissible for its surface finish class.

Preparation: Roughen and clean the hardened concrete joint surface. Remove loose or soft material, free water, foreign matter and laitance. Dampen the surface just before placing the fresh concrete and coat with a neat cement slurry.

14.18.2 Movement jointsJoint filling: ‘Fosroc Thioflex 600’


CONCRETE

Finish visible jointing material neatly flush with adjoining surfaces.

Provide copies of the supplier's and or manufacturer's product data sheets and supplier/manufacturer's specification. Comply with that specification.

Preparation: Before filling joints dry and clean the joint surfaces, and prime to the manufacturer's recommendation.

Water-tightness: Apply the jointing material so that joints exposed to rain and other potential sources of water are made watertight.

Foamed materials: (in compressible fillers); Use closed-cell or impregnated types, which do not absorb water.

Bond breaking: Back-up materials for sealants, including backing rods and the like, must not adhere to the sealant, or are faced with a non-adhering material.

14.19FINISHES TO UNFORMED SURFACES

14.19.1 Surface tolerancesClass A: Maximum deviation from a 3 m straight edge: 3 mm.

Class B: Maximum deviation from a 3 m straight edge: 6 mm.

Class C: Maximum deviation from a 600 mm straight edge: 6 mm.

14.19.2 ScreedingFinish slab surfaces by approved means to finished levels. Produce surfaces to tolerance Class B.

14.19.3 Finishing methodsScored finish: After screeding, give the surface a coarse scored texture in the required direction by drawing a stiff brush or rake across the surface.

Machine floated finish: Finish the screeded surface with approved power driven equipment to a uniform smooth texture. Hand float in locations inaccessible to the machine float.

Steel trowelled finish: Use steel hand trowels to produce the final finish free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance.

Wood float finish: Produce the final finish with a wood float.

Sponge finish: After screeding and finishing with a steel trowel obtain an even textured sand finish by wiping the surface with a damp sponge.

Broom finish: After floating use a broom to produce an even textured slip-resistant surface.

Pattern paving: Proprietary treatment producing integral coloured and patterned surface for in situ paving and ground slabs.

14.20INTEGRAL FINISHES

14.20.1 Steel Trowel FinishTrowelling shall be undertaken with consistent pressure. Each trowelling shall be 90° to the


CONCRETE

previous pass to eliminate the development of hollows, ridges and depressions.As the surface concrete consolidates with working, the angle of the trowel shall be increased to intensify pressure and further densify the surface layer of the concrete.Wet-wiping or addition of water to the surface of the concrete during finishing shall not be permitted.The surface shall be sealed with Parchem Clear – NITOFLOR 130.The sealer shall be applied and cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.The surface maintenance and cleaning schedule shall be established in consultation with the sealer manufacturer and the installer

14.20.2 Smooth rubbed finishRemove the formwork while the concrete is still green. Patch immediately, and complete the rubbing not later than the following day. Wet the surface and rub with a carborundum or similar abrasive brick until a uniform colour and texture are produced. Do not use cement grout other than the paste drawn from the green concrete by the rubbing process.

14.20.3 Exposed aggregate finishRemove the formwork while the concrete is still green. Wet the surface and scrub with stiff fibre or wire brushes, using water freely, until the surface film of mortar is mechanically removed, without the use of acid etching, and the aggregate is uniformly exposed. Rinse the surface with clean water.

14.20.4 Bush hammered finishRemove the minimum matrix by bush hammering to expose the coarse aggregate without recessing the matrix deeper than the aggregate to give a uniform texture with insignificant random tool marks.

14.21REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENTS

14.21.1 Concrete placingPreparation for placing: Moisten the subgrade sufficiently in advance of placing to ensure a firm, uniform moist surface at the time of placing. Remove loose material and debris from the surface. Do not operate construction equipment on the prepared surface.

14.21.2 JointsExpansion joints: Form the edge of the concrete placed first to provide a smooth vertical face. Fix the joint filler with waterproof adhesive.

Joint filler: 12 mm thick Ableflex closed cell compressible filler strip in the joint. Detach the removable top strip and fill with Fosroc Thioflex 600.

Contraction joints: Form weakened plane joints to a width of 3 mm and a depth at least one quarter of the depth of concrete. Withdraw the former during finishing and tool the joint to a 6 mm radius.

Sawn joints: Where approved, contraction joints may be constructed by sawing the hardened concrete.

Approved locations: As per drawings

Dowelled joints: Formed or sawn joints reinforced with dowels and sealed.


CONCRETE

Tied joints: Formed or sawn joints reinforced with tie bars.

Construction joint: Terminate each day's placing with a construction joint coinciding with a contraction joint or expansion joint.

14.21.3 FinishesImmediately after compaction carry out transverse finishing using a vibrating screed followed by hand finishing and broom finishing. Produce surfaces to tolerance Class B, as defined in the Finishes to unformed surfaces clause in this work section.

Hand finish: Eliminate minor irregularities and score marks with hand operated long handled floats.

Broom finish: When most of the water glaze or sheen has disappeared and before the concrete becomes non-plastic, texture the whole surface of the pavement at right angles to the direction of the placing of the concrete by the use of coarse brooms at least 500 mm wide with bristles made of nylon or flexible wire. Wash brooms regularly to remove slurry.

Joints and edges: Finish with a jointing tool.

Finished pavement surface: Provide a surface uniform in appearance and free from depressions in which water can pond, with an average texture depth of 2 mm to 2.5 mm.

14.22GROUT BENEATH FOOTINGSStandard: To: AS 3600, clause 17.1.8

Maximum shrinkage: 1% by volume after 24 hours.

Maximum water cement ratio: 0.45 (by weight).

Minimum compressive strength: 25 MPa at 7 days and 40 MPa at 28 days.

14.22.1 Grout for blockwork coresStandard: To: AS 3700

Refer to the Concrete schedule.

14.23MISCELLANEOUS ITEMSClothes hoist footing: 400 mm deep x 250 mm diameter with a 300 mm x 300 mm x 75 mm thick concrete surround above the finished ground line graded away from the post.

Splash Pads: Provide 600 mm x 600 mm x 50 mm thick concrete splash pads at each downpipe to direct the water away from the building.

Mowing strips: Provide 300 mm wide x 75 mm thick concrete mowing strips where shown on the drawings. The direction of fall is to be away from building. Construct tooled joints at 3 m maximum centres. Refer also to the requirements of the TERMITE CONTROL worksection.

Gas cylinder pad: Provide 1000 mm x 500 mm x 100 mm thick concrete pad as shown on the drawings.


STRUCTURAL STEEL

15 STRUCTURAL STEEL

15.1 GENERAL


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

PAINTING, for protective coatings and topcoats. The first coat applied to all structural steel is specified in this STRUCTURAL STEEL section. The first coat must be compatible with topcoats and also comply with all requirements of the PAINTING section.

CONCRETE, for installation of foundation bolts.

15.1.2 StandardsAS 1110.1 ISO metric hexagon bolts and screws - Product grades A and B - Bolts

AS/NZS 1111 ISO metric hexagon bolts and screws

AS 1112.3 ISO metric hexagon nuts - Product grade C

AS/NZS 1163 Cold formed structural steel hollow sections

AS 1171 Non-destructive testing - Magnetic particle testing of ferromagnetic products, components and structures

AS/NZS 1214 Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric course thread series)

AS 1237.1 Plain washers for metric bolts, screws and nuts for general purposes - General plan

AS/NZS 1252 High-strength steel fastener assemblies for structural engineering - Bolts, nuts and washers

AS/NZS 1252.1 - Technical requirements

AS/NZS 1252.2 - Verification testing for bolt assemblies

AS 1397 Continuous hot-dipped metallic coated steel sheet and strip – Coatings of zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium

AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding

AS/NZS 1554.1 - Welding of steel structures

AS/NZS 1554.3 - Welding of reinforcing steel

AS 1627(set) Metal finishing – Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces

AS/NZS 3678 Structural steel – Hot-rolled plates, floorplates and slabs

AS/NZS 3679 Structural steel

AS/NZS 3679.1 - Hot-rolled bars and sections


STRUCTURAL STEEL

AS/NZS 3679.2 - Welded I sections

AS 3894 Site testing of protective coatings

AS 3894.10 - Inspection report - Daily surface and ambient conditions

AS 3894.11 - Equipment report

AS 3894.12 - Inspection report - Coating

AS 3894.13 - Inspection report - Daily

AS 3894.14 - Inspection report - Daily painting

AS 4100 Steel structures

AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed steel structures

AS/NZS 5131 Structural steelwork - Fabrication and erection

15.2 INSPECTION – WITNESS POINTWitness Point

Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:

Commencement of shop fabrication.

Surface preparation prior to painting.

Steelwork and column bases erected on site, prior to grouting, encasing, site painting or cladding.

Completion of fabrication before surface preparation.

Surface preparation before shop painting.

Completion of protective coating before delivery to site.

Steelwork and column bases erected on site, before grouting, encasing, site painting or cladding.

Reinforcement and formwork in place before any encasement.

Completed grouting, encasement, fire protection or site painting.

15.3 CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONS

15.3.1 Shop drawings - Hold PointHold Point - Submit 2 complete sets of shop drawings showing the following information:

Relevant details of each assembly, component and connection.

Amended specification for the fabrication, surface treatment, transport and erection.

Temporary works, such as lifting lugs, temporary cleats and bracing, which are required for the transportation and erection of the structural steelwork.


STRUCTURAL STEEL

15.3.2 Compliance - Witness PointWitness Point - Provide evidence that the steel used in the work complies with the required material standards.

15.4 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSDo not use steel components which have:

Damaged finish

Rust

White rust.

15.4.1 StandardsMaterials generally: To: AS 4100 - Materials section.

Cold-formed sections: To: AS/NZS 4600.

15.4.2 Steel Grades

Table - Steel grades

Type of steel Standard Grade

Hot rolled structural bars and sections: To: AS/NZS 3679.1 Table 1 – Chemical composition of bars and sections

AS/NZS 3679.1 250

Hot rolled plates, floor plates and slabs: To: AZ/NZS 3678 Table 2 – Chemical composition – Mechanical property grades

AS/NZS 3678 250

Cold-formed structural Hollow sections: To: AS/NZS 1163 AS/NZS 1163

250or 350 as available.

Cold formed purlins and girts: To: AS 1397 AS 1397 G450 or Z350

Cold formed battens: To: AS1397 AS 1397 G550 /G500 with AZ150 or Z350

15.5 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLY

15.5.1 Availability - Hold PointHold Point - If steel members are not available in the required section, grade or length, submit full details of proposal including location of proposed splices or joints and their fabrication details to the Superintendent. Approval in writing from the project Structural Engineer and the Superintendent must be obtained, before substituting other sections or grades or splicing shorter lengths.

15.5.2 Beam camberIf beam members have a natural camber within the straightness tolerance, fabricate and erect the beam members with the camber up.

15.5.3 Site work


STRUCTURAL STEEL

Do not fabricate or weld structural steel on site without the approvals of the Superintendent, other than welded structural steel work shown on the drawings.

15.5.4 Identification marksProvide marks or other means for identifying each member, and for the setting out, location, erection and connection of the steelwork. If the work includes more than one bolting category, mark bolted connections to show the bolting category.

15.5.5 Foundation boltsHexagonal commercial bolts: To: AS 1111, hot-dip galvanized to AS/NZS 1214. Supply each foundation bolt with 2 nuts and 2 large diameter washers. Provide sufficient thread to permit the levelling nut to be set below the base plate.

Masonry anchors: If masonry anchors are required or proposed for the support or fixing of structural steel, submit details to the Superintendent of the anchors’ capacities to carry the loads. Do not use unless approved by the Structural Engineer.

15.5.6 Temporary connections - Hold PointHold Point - Do not attach cleats without approval from the Superintendent. Provide a report on Magnetic Particle Inspections (MPI) of the welds. Remove temporary cleats on completion and restore the surface.

15.5.7 Enlargement of bolt holes - Hold PointHold Point - Do not hand flame cut or otherwise enlarge any bolt holes or slots, without approval.

15.5.8 Bolting category scheduleUse Property Class 4.6/S bolts unless otherwise noted.

Table - Bolting category scheduleJoint location Bolting categoryAs per drawings

15.6 WELDING

15.6.1 Approval of the Weld Procedure Specification - Hold PointHold Point – The Superintendent must approve the Weld Procedure Specification (WPS) prior to commencement of any welding.

15.6.2 Weld StandardsTo: AS/NZS 1554.1.

To: AS/NZS 1554.3.

15.6.3 Weld categoryWeld categories not shown on the drawings: Category SP.

15.6.4 Weld typeTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 94RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Weld type not shown on the drawings: 6 mm continuous fillet weld made using E48XX electrodes or equivalent.

Weld type not documented: Submit proposals for weld type and electrodes.

15.6.5 Certification of welders and welding supervisors - Witness PointWitness Point - Provide copies of Welder Qualifications Records for welders and welding supervisors who are to be engaged in welding works under the contract, before they commence welding operations.

Standard: To: AS/NZS 1554.1.

The Superintendent may at any time request to see the Welder Qualification Records (WQR) of any welder involved in the steelwork fabrication and/or witness the welding of a test piece. Do not use welders that are not prequalified for the welding operation they are to perform.

All welding shall be carried out under supervision of personnel who have had suitable training and experience in the fabrication of welded structures and who are certified in accordance with AS/NZS 1554.1.

15.6.6 Preparation - Witness PointWitness Point - Provide proof of weld procedure and weld consumable prequalification.

Inspect all SP weld preparations to ensure correct setup of root gap and weld preparation size. All weld preparations are to be inspected by suitably qualified personnel in accordance with AS/NZS 1554.1.

15.6.7 Non destructive weld examinationStandard: To AS/NZS 1554.1, Section 7.Methods: Inspect welds in conformance with the Table - Non-destructive weld examination (NDE) table.

Radiographic and ultrasonic inspection: Have the examination performed by an independent NATA registered testing authority.

Repairs: Repair welds revealed as faulty by non-destructive examination and repeat the examination.

Table - Non-destructive weld examination (NDE) table

Type of weld and category Examination methodExtent (% of total length of weld type)

GP Shop fillet welds Visual means 100%

SP WeldsVisual AND MPI or Ultrasonic Inspection

Visual – 100%ANDMPI or UI – 10%

SP Welds on splicing MPI or Ultrasonic Inspection 100%

15.7 BOLTING

15.7.1 GeneralTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 95RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Standards: To AS 1110.1, AS 1111.1 and AS/NZS 1252.

15.7.2 Bolting categoryGeneral: As documented

15.7.3 ConnectionsConnection type: For connections not documented, submit proposals.

Bolting category 8.8/TF contact surfaces: Clean, as rolled and free from applied finishes.

15.7.4 Anchor boltsGeneral: Provide each anchor bolt with 2 nuts and 2 oversize washers with sufficient thread to permit the levelling nut and washer to be set below the base plate.

Galvanizing: Galvanize all components.

Hexagonal bolts: To AS 1111.1.

Hexagonal nuts: To AS 1112.3.

Plain washers: To AS 1237.1.

Set-out: Set out bolt groups using templates and subject to survey check.

15.7.5 Lock nutsGeneral: Provide lock nuts for bolts in moving parts or parts subject to vibration and for vertical bolts in tension.

15.7.6 Tensioning of bolting categories 8.8/TB and 8.8/TFMethod: Use part-turn-of-nut or load indicating washers.

Comply with: AS 4100, Erection section, Erection Procedures clause, Methods of Tensioning sub-clause..

15.7.7 Permanent boltingCompletion: Bolt only when correct alignment and preset or camber has been achieved.

15.8 PROTECTIVE COATINGRefer to PAINTING for protective coatings on structural steel.

Surface preparationMethods: To: AS 1627.

Steel surfaces generally: (Including surfaces not otherwise treated and contact surfaces with concrete encasement or grout): Remove loose millscale, loose rust, oil, grease, dirt, globules of weld metal, weld slag and other foreign matter.

Site connections: After completing the connection, prepare the surface of the connection, adjacent unprimed surfaces and surfaces damaged during erection.


STRUCTURAL STEEL

Protective coatingShop work: Apply the primer coat or protective system to the structural steel before delivery to the site.

Transport and handling: Protect the paintwork from damage during transport and handling.

Site work: After erection, repair any damage to the shop coating and apply the coating, if any, omitted at site connections.

Time delay: Prime the steel surface as soon as possible after surface preparation and prior to any deterioration of the surface. If the surface is contaminated or rust bloomed, repeat the surface preparation before applying the primer.

Protective coating scheduleSteelwork item or surface

Surface preparation(to AS 1627)

Coating Minimum dry film thickness (µm)

All steelwork shall be prepared and painted off site

Class 2 1/2

Inorganic zinc silicate (grey to match existing)

75 Microns


LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

16 LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

16.1 GENERAL



STRUCTURAL STEEL, for heavy structural steel framing.

MASONRY, for damp-proof courses and flashings.

INSULATION, SARKING, AND PLIABLE MEMBRANES.

NT CLIMATE ZONES TABLE.

16.1.2 Proprietary systemProprietary frame and truss systems comprising cold-formed steel sections for roof construction, that suits the projects criteria for corrosion resistance, architectural, and structural requirements for the location may be offered. The details, including structural type certification of such a system is to be provided within the response to this RFT.

16.2 STANDARDSAS/NZS 1163 Cold formed structural steel hollow sections

AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip - Coatings of zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium

AS/NZS 2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings

AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (Australian and New Zealand Wiring Rules)

AS/NZS 3500 Plumbing and drainage

AS/NZS 3500.4 - Heated water services

AS 3566 Self drilling screws for the building and construction industries

AS 3566.1 - General requirements and mechanical properties

AS 3566.2 - Corrosion resistance requirements (available withdrawn)

AS 3623 Domestic metal framing

AS/NZS 4600 Cold formed steel structures


APAS 2916 Organic zinc rich coating for protection of steel

NASH Standard Residential and low-rise steel framing - Part 1 and Part 2

16.3 FRAMING INSPECTION – WITNESS POINTWitness Point


LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

Notice: Give sufficient notice so that inspection can be made of steel framing erected on site prior to lining or cladding.

16.4 CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSRoof truss shop drawings and Engineering certificate

Refer to the roof trusses clause.

16.5 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSDo not use steel sections with damaged galvanising finish.

Do not use steel sections which have rust.

Do not use steel sections which have white rust.

Cold-formed steel sections

Sections: Cold-formed from zinc-coated or aluminium/zinc-coated steel: To: AS 1397, The Coating Section, Z200 or AZ150 (minimum), as appropriate.

Steel hollow sections

To: AS/NZS 1163. Galvanized to AS/NZS 4680.

Screws

Generally: To: AS 3566.1.

Corrosion resistance; To Table - Corrosion resistance classes required for fasteners.

Table - Corrosion resistance classes required for fastenersRegion (refer to NT Climate Zones Table) Corrosion resistance class AS 3566.2 (min)NTCZ 05 Class 2NTCZ 01 Class 3NTCZ 02, 03, 04 Class 4

16.6 CONSTRUCTION GENERALLYFabrication

Cut members accurately to length so that they fit firmly against abutting members. Form holes by drilling or punching. Fit holes with plastic grommets to suit services which are to pass through the holes.

Construction

Comply with the manufacturers’ design guides, installation manuals, span tables and load tables.

Fasteners

Use fasteners capable of transmitting the loads imposed, and sufficient to ensure the rigidity of the frame. Corrosion resistance to Table - Corrosion resistance classes required for fasteners.

WeldingTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 99RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

Use the metal inert gas (MIG) technique or carbon arc welding.

Touch up: Clean the weld and coated areas affected by welding and touch up with zinc rich organic coating to APAS 2916.

Prefabricated frames

Protect the frames from damage or distortion during storage, transport and erection.

Cleaning

On completion of the erection of the framing remove any debris from the cavities of the frame members.

Metal separation

Install lagging where necessary to separate non-ferrous metal service pipes and accessories from the metal framing.

Earthing

Temporary earthing: Provide temporary earthing during erection of the steel framework, until the permanent earthing has been installed.

The permanent earth installation for the completed steel framework must be in accordance with PowerWater Corporation regulations and to: AS/NZS 3000.

16.7 FRAMESTable - Steel framing members scheduleMember type Section Maximum spacing (mm) Maximum span (mm)As per drawings

Floor framing

Comply with the manufacturers’ design guides, installation manuals, span tables and load tables.

Wall studs

Provide studs in single lengths without splices. Place a stud under, or not more than 40 mm from, each structural load point from roof or ceiling, except at openings. Provide multiple studs at points of concentrated load.

Nominal frame dimension

(stud width x thickness in mm): Refer to drawings

Maximum stud spacing, nogging and bracing: As shown on the drawings.

Damp proof course: To AS/NZS 2904. Provide a continuous damp proof course between the concrete slab and floor plates.

Material: Super-Alcor.

Heads to openings

Use lintels consisting of either a stiffened top plate or a truss built up from frame members, depending on load and span.


LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

Bracing

Adequately brace the frame to resist wind loads, by diagonal nogging or by tensioned straps.

Splicing

Splice plates at ends to maintain continuity and alignment.

Additional support

Provide additional support in the form of noggings, trimmers and studs for fixing lining, cladding, hardware, accessories, fixtures and fittings as required.

Maximum spacing of noggings: 1350 mm centres.

Service holes

For plumbing and electrical services provide either factory pre-cut flared holes, or site cut holes punched or drilled on the centreline of the member. Fit holes with proprietary plastic bushes/grommets.

Flashings

To AS/NZS 2904.

Location: Provide flashings to external openings sufficient to prevent the entry of moisture. Form trays at the ends of sill flashings.

Masonry construction: Extend across cavities and build in to masonry work.

Refer to MASONRY.

16.8 ROOF TRUSSES

16.8.1 Roof truss shop drawings - Hold PointHold point - Submit shop drawings

stating that the trusses have been designed to AS/NZS 4600 for the span, spacing and loading;

showing on an elevation view drawing the size and section type of each member; and

specifying the method of assembly, fixing, tying and bracing.

Certification: Provide with the shop drawings certification of the structural sufficiency of the truss and roof design supplied on a completed NT Building Act Section 40 Certificate of Compliance.

16.8.2 Supports for water containersWhere a water container or heater is located in the roof space, provide a support platform to AS/NZS 3500.4.

Roof loadings: Allow for roof mounted air conditioning units, roof mounted solar hot water units, roof mounted photo voltaic arrays, etc.

16.8.3 MarkingPermanently mark each truss to show


LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

manufacturer;

location;

support points; and

trusses designed for additional loading such as water heater support.

16.8.4 InstallationFix the trusses to the external wall plates, plumb to within H/200, where H is the height. Provide ties and wind bracing.

Truss spacing: 900mm maximum centres


MASONRY

17 MASONRY

17.1 GENERAL



CONCRETE, for core filling grout.

LIGHT STEEL FRAMING

PLASTERING, for render.

WOODWORK, for coordination with timber frames and trusses.

ROOFING, for roof flashings.

INSULATION, SARKING AND PLIABLE MEMBRANES

NT CLIMATE ZONES TABLE.

17.1.2 StandardAS/NZS 1214 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse

thread series)

AS/NZS 2699 Built-in components for masonry construction

AS/NZS 2699.1 - Wall ties

AS/NZS 2699.2 - Connectors and accessories

AS/NZS 2699.3 - Lintels and shelf angles (durability requirements)


AS 3566 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries

AS 3566.2 - Corrosion resistance requirements (withdrawn but available)

AS 3700 Masonry structures

AS 3972 General purpose and blended cements

AS/NZS 4455 Masonry units, pavers, flags and segmental retaining wall units

AS/NZS 4455.1 - Masonry units

AS/NZS 4600 Cold formed steel structures




Damp-proof courses, in position.

Flashings, downpipes and other work to be concealed.


MASONRY

Bottoms of cavities after cleaning out.

Lintels in position.

Structural elements being built in.

Bottoms of core holes before grouting.

Core filling.

Control joints ready for insertion of joint filler.

17.3 SAMPLES – HOLD POINTMasonry unit samples

Hold point: Submit four face units of each type illustrating the range of variation available.

Facework sample panels

In a suitable position, prepare a sample panel of each type of facework, including face or pointing mortar.

Facework type: Refer drawingsLocation: Refer drawingsMinimum size (face of panel): Refer drawingsHold point - Incorporation: Sample panels of facework may be permitted to be incorporated into the works at the discretion of the Superintendent, otherwise remove all traces on completion.

17.4 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

17.4.1 Masonry unitsFace units: Masonry units used in facework, including purpose-made units such as squints and sills.

17.4.2 Steel componentsGalvanizing: Galvanize steel components (including fasteners) to AS/NZS 1214, AS 3566.2 and AS/NZS 4600 as appropriate, where

exposed to weather;

embedded in masonry;

in external timbers such as weatherboards or decking; and

in contact with chemically treated timber.

Durability classification to AS/NZS 2699 for components other than wall ties: Refer to the table below

Bricks and blocks scheduleType of unit Concrete masonry units to: AS/NZS 4455

Location: Refer drawings

Manufacturing dimensions: Refer drawing notes

Form: Refer drawing notes

Grading (concrete masonry units):

Refer drawing notes


MASONRY

17.4.3 Mortar materialsSand: Fine aggregate with low clay content and free from efflorescing salts, selected for colour and grading.

Cement type to AS 3972: GP.

17.4.4 Mortar Additives - Hold PointHold point - Do not use additives in the mortar unless approved by the Superintendent.

17.4.5 Coloured Mortar - Hold PointHold point - Submit samples of coloured mortar for approval by the Superintendent.

Colour: As advised on siteLocation: To be advised on site

17.4.6 Premixed Mortar - Hold PointHold Point - Do not use premixed mortar unless approved by the Superintendent.

17.4.7 Sheet Material Damp-proof CourseTo: AS/NZS 2904. Use a proprietary item, impervious material installed into the wall.

17.4.8 Mortar Damp Proof Course - Hold PointTo: AS/NZS 2904 and to AS 3700.

Hold Point: Do not use a premixed mortar damp proof course unless prior approval has been obtained.

Use mortar with a damp proof course waterproofing admixture e.g. Bondall BondCrete or similar approved by the Superintendent. Use to the manufacturers’ instructions.

Use a proprietary mortar colouring system to identify the damp proof courses. Use Melcann Black or similar approved by the Superintendent.

Locations of mortar damp proof courses: First three courses above the floor slab, including the bedding course and the perpends.

Proprietary item: N/A

Mortar mix tableMortar proportions(cement:lime:sand)

Typeto AS 3700

Location

1:0:4 + water thickener M3 Grouted and reinforced masonry1:0 to 0.25:3 M4 Underpinning, high strength masonry1:1:6 M3 All other masonry

1:0 to 0.25:3 M4, waterproof

Masonry below ground level, adjacent to ground. Waterproof finish to outer face of masonry, protected from physical damage. Surface drainage to divert ground water away from masonry.

Additives to enhance workability of mortar may be used if approved by Superintendent.


MASONRY


17.5.1 Cleaning - Hold PointClean masonry progressively as the work proceeds. Clean facework to remove mortar smears, stains and discolouration.

Hold point - If acid cleaning is intended, submit a proposal to the Superintendent, including SDS for products proposed to be used.

17.5.2 ProtectionElements: Protect the masonry from rain and hot drying winds for at least 24 hours after laying.

Covers: Provide temporary protective covers to vulnerable arrises and sills or as directed by the Superintendent.

17.5.3 Concealed workCut the joints flush in concealed masonry.

17.5.4 Sills and thresholdsLay the sills and thresholds so that the top surfaces cause water to drain away from the building. Bed masonry sills and thresholds solidly.

Sill units: Refer drawingsCapstones and weatherings

Fix capstones with dowels embedded in masonry and in capstone. Fix with non-shrink grout for new work. Fix with epoxy for capstones on existing masonry work

17.5.5 Joints and cuttingSet out masonry with joints of uniform width and to ensure minimal cutting of masonry units.

17.5.6 Rod76 mm high units: - 7 courses to 600 mm.

90 mm high units: - 6 courses to 600 mm.

190 mm high units: - 3 courses to 600 mm.

17.5.7 BondUse stretcher bond in single leaf construction.Existing work: Rod and bond to match existing.

17.5.8 ServicesRequirement: Where practicable provide holes, sleeves and chases during erection of masonry to avoid cutting away and making good.

Chases: Use masonry saws to cut chases. Do not use machine powered impact tools.

17.5.9 Sealing of reveals


MASONRY

Seal reveals at openings in external walls, and in walls which are between conditioned and non-conditioned spaces, with material which is impervious to water before installing windows, doors or other items in those openings.

17.6 FACEWORKDefinition

Masonry in which the form, or form and colour, of the units and joints is visible in the completed works.

Location: Refer drawings[Generally all exposed masonry.]Double face walls

Select the masonry units for uniform width and double-face qualities in single leaf masonry with facework both sides. Before commencement, obtain a ruling as to which is the preferred wall face, and favour that face should a compromise be unavoidable.

Commencement

Commence facework not less than one full course, or 175 mm, whichever is the greater, below adjacent finished ground level.

Perpends

Keep perpends in alternate courses vertically aligned and fill solidly with mortar.

Perforations

Use solid masonry units in facework where voids/perforations would otherwise be visible.

Joints

Work mortar with a jointing tool to achieve a dense smooth surface, except where the facework is to be bagged.

Joint profile: Ironed joint (tool) – refer drawingsDepth of raking: Tool depth – approximately 5 mmColour mixing

If the colour of the face units is visible, distribute the colour range of units evenly to prevent colour concentrations and banding.

17.7 DAMP-PROOF COURSES (MASONRY AND FRAMED WALLS)Refer to the Materials and Components clause for water proof mortar damp proof courses.

Materials

To: AS/NZS 2904 and to AS 3700.

Required material: Refer drawing detailsLocation

Provide damp-proof courses where shown on the drawings.

Installation


MASONRY

Lay in long lengths. Lap full width of angles and intersections and 150 mm at joints. Step as necessary, but not exceeding 2 courses per step. Install at least 150 mm above adjacent finished ground. Sandwich damp-proof courses between layers of mortar.

Junctions: Preserve continuity of damp-proofing at junctions between damp-proof courses and waterproof membranes.

Sealing at laps: Seal laps with a bituminous adhesive sealing compound.

Lap sealing: 50mm or greater

17.8 CAVITY WALLSMinimum cavity width

Masonry walls: 50 mm.

Masonry veneer walls: 25 mm, between the masonry leaf and the load bearing frame.

Openings

Do not close the cavity at the jambs of external openings.

Cavity fill

Fill the cavity to one course above finished ground level with mortar weathered towards the outer leaf.

Mortar: Keep cavities and ties clear of mortar droppings as the work proceeds.

Cavity flashings

Materials: To: AS/NZS 2904.

Required material: proprietary building itemLocation: Provide flashings and weatherings in the following locations where applicable:

Floors: Full width of outer leaf immediately above slab or shelf angle, continuous, sloping upwards across the cavity, bedded in mortar, and turned 30 mm into the inner leaf two courses above for brick work, one course above for block work. Where the slab supports the outer skin and is not rebated bed the flashing in a suitable sealant.

Under sills: 30 mm bedded into the outer leaf bed joint one course below the sill, sloping up and extending across the cavity, and bedded 30 mm between the sill and the inner leaf.

Over lintels to openings: Full width of outer leaf immediately above the lintel, continuous across cavity, 30 mm into the inner leaf two courses above for brick work, one course for block work. In masonry veneer construction, the flashing is to slope upwards across the cavity meeting the inner frame at least 150mm above the shelf of the lintel. Turn the flashing up against the inner frame at least 50 mm and fasten the flashing to the frame. Extend at least 50 mm beyond the lintels.

At abutments with structural frames or supports: Vertical flashing in the cavity from 150 mm wide material, wedged and grouted into a groove in the frame opposite the cavity.

At stiles where cavities are closed: Full height flashing extending 75 mm beyond the closure into the cavity, interleaved with the sill and head flashing at each end. Fix to frame stiles.


MASONRY

Installation: Sandwich flashings between mortar except where on lintels or shelf angles.

Pointing: Point up joints around flashings to fill voids.

Weepholes

To: AS 3700

Provide weepholes in the form of open perpends to external leaves of cavity walls in the course above damp-proof courses, flashings, and cavity fill, and at the bottoms of unfilled cavities.

Spacing: Not exceeding 1200 mm.

17.9 WALL TIESWall tie category table

Category to AS/NZS 2699.1 Service conditions

Type A - Veneer - Light duty Masonry veneer

Type A - Cavity - Medium duty Normal cavity construction and at abutments

Type A - Cavity - Heavy duty Wide cavities over 60 mm

Type A - Remedial If specified by structural engineer

Type B – for seismic conditions If specified by structural engineer

Corrosion resistance of wall ties and fasteners

Atmospheric corrosivity service condition

Refer to NT Climate Zones Table

Wall ties durability class (AS 2699.1)

Self drilling screws corrosion resistance class (AS 3566.2)

Up to 10km from the coast or tidal estuaries

R4 (white or blue mark) 4

From 10km up to 50km from the coast or tidal estuaries R3 (red mark) 4

More than 50km from the coast or tidal estuaries R2 (yellow mark) 4

Wall tie installation

Fixing of masonry veneer ties at abutments: To: AS/NZS 2699.1 and as follows:

To timber frames: Clouts or integral spikes.

To concrete: Masonry anchors.

Fixing of masonry veneer ties to steel frames: No. 12 metal thread Tek screws.

Special requirements for cyclone areas: Refer DrawingsMaterial: Refer drawings


MASONRY

Spacing: Refer Drawings


MASONRY

Flexible wall ties

If ties or anchors extend across control joints use ties or anchors which maintain the stability of the masonry without impairing the effectiveness of the joint.

Proprietary item: Masonry flexible anchors MFA 3/3P.

Installation: At maximum 400 mm centres.

17.10MOVEMENT JOINTSJoint material

Use sealant and bond breaking backing material compatible when used together, and non-staining to masonry.

Locations: Shown on the drawings.

Sealant: Single pack polyurethane.

Proprietary item: Thioseal 5000 or approved equivalent alternative.

Backing rod: 19 mm diameter closed cell expanded polyethylene rod.

Primer: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

Installation: Clean the joints thoroughly before sealing.

Sealant depth: Not less than two-thirds the joint width nor more than the joint width.

Joint width

Vertical joints: 12 mm.

Slip joints

Material: Refer drawings

17.11REINFORCED MASONRY – HOLD POINTDesignation

Masonry required to be strengthened with embedded steel reinforcement (other than bed joint reinforcement) is designated reinforced masonry.

Cleaning core holes

Hold point - In blockwork use purpose-made cleanout blocks or machine cut a cleaning hole at the base of each reinforced core, located on the side of the wall which is to be rendered or otherwise concealed. After cleaning out has been inspected and approved, cover the hole with formwork and grout the core.

Bond beams

Use bond beams made from purpose-made hollow concrete blocks with reinforcement grouted in place. Install 6 mm fibre cement closers at non reinforced cores of the wall below.

Reinforcement: As shown on the drawings.

Starter bars: Wire tie core reinforcement to starter bars.


MASONRY

Lintel blocks

Purpose made U shaped blocks with reinforcement grouted in place.

Clean out blocks

Location: At the base of each core to be grout filled including above bond beams and stage filled walls.

Hole size: Machine cut 100 x 100 mm.

Sealing: Following inspection of the core and reinforcement form over holes to contain core filling grout.

Core filling grout

Reference: Refer to the CONCRETE section.

Structural blockwork: Fill core holes, bond beams and lintels etc. of structural blockwork with ready mixed grout.

Placing: Wait at least 3 days after construction of blockwork before placing grout. Limit the height of pours to 3 m. Grout fill all cores below ground level.

17.12STEEL LINTELSMaterial

Mild steel flat or angle lintels complying with the Steel lintels table and galvanized to AS/NZS 4680, minimum coating mass 600g/m2.

Steel lintels tableMaximum span (mm) Lintel dimensions (mm) Bearing each end (mm)1050 75 x 10 1501200 75 x 75 x 8 1501350 90 x 90 x 8 1501500 90 x 90 x 8 1501650 100 x 75 x 8 1501800 100 x 75 x 8 1502100 125 x 75 x 10 2302400 125 x 75 x 10 2303000 150 x 90 x 12 230

Installation

Provide one lintel to each wall leaf. Do not cut on site. Keep lintels 6 mm clear of heads and frames. Pack mortar between the angle up-stand and supported masonry units.

17.13BAGGINGJoints

Cut joints flush prior to bagging.

Dry bagging


MASONRY

Apply laying mortar to the surface with a hessian bag or similar. Flush up irregularities, but leave the minimum possible amount of mortar on the masonry surface.


ROOFING

18 ROOFING

18.1 CROSS REFERENCESRefer to the following sections:


WOODWORK, for timber fascia, barge and gutter boards.

INSULATION, for insulation, vapour barriers, and sarking.

GLAZING, for glazing generally.

NT Climate Zones Table.

18.2 STANDARDSAS 1397: Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip – Coatings of zinc and zinc

alloyed with aluminium and magnesium

AS 1562 Design and installation of sheet roof and wall cladding

AS 1562.1 - Metal

AS/NZS 2179 Specifications for rainwater goods, accessories and fasteners

AS/NZS 2179.1 - Metal shape or sheet rainwater goods, and metal accessories and fasteners

AS/NZS 2728 Prefinished/ prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior building applications-Performance requirements

AS/NZS 3500 Plumbing and Drainage

AS/NZS 3500.3: - Stormwater drainage


AS 3566.2: - Corrosion resistance requirements

AS/NZS 4389 Safety mesh

18.3 GENERAL

18.3.1 Approved FixersInstall the complete roof and accessories using specialist fixers approved by the roofing materials manufacturer.

18.3.2 Sheet metal roofing - Storage and handlingStore metal roofing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

Store metal roofing materials on a level base.

Do not store materials exposed to moisture, or in contact with other materials, which may cause, rust, white rust, staining, denting, or other surface damage.

Handle roofing materials as follows:


ROOFING

Use gloves when handling precoated metal roofing material. Use soft soled shoes when fixing or working on roofs. Protect edges and surfaces from damage. Do not drag sheets across each other or over other materials.

18.3.3 ProtectionKeep the roofing and rainwater systems free of swarf, debris, and loose material during construction, and leave them clean and unobstructed on completion. Clean daily and protect materials as required by the Protection of Cladding During Installation clause of AS 1562.1.

Repair damage to the roofing and rainwater system.

If it is necessary to touch up minor damage to prepainted metal roofing, do not overspray onto undamaged surfaces.

18.3.4 Thermal movementProvide for thermal movement in the roof installation and the structure, including movement in joints and fastenings. Refer to manufacturers' installation guides for maximum lengths of unbroken runs of roofing material. Provide expansion breaks in roofing material to manufacturers' requirements.

18.3.5 Metal separationPrevent direct and/or indirect contact between incompatible metals, and between green hardwood or chemically treated timber and aluminium or coated steel, by either of the following methods:

Applying an anti-corrosion, low moisture transmission coating to contact surfaces. Inserting a separation layer.

Select components made from materials which will not cause galvanic corrosion due to dissimilar metals being present in the system.


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of:

Substructure

Roof supports

Sarking, vapour barriers, pliable membranes

Insulation

Roof plumbing - gutters, rainwater heads, sumps, overflow relief systems, downpipes, inspection/maintenance openings, etc.

18.5 ROOF STRUCTURE ALIGNMENTCheck the alignment of the roof structure before fixing any sheets.

Battens: 2 mm maximum mismatch at abutting ends.

Roof Plane: 5 mm per metre maximum deviation across the battens from a plan parallel to the specified roof slope.


ROOFING

18.6 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSDo not use steel components which have:

Damaged finish. Rust. White rust.

Use single continuous lengths of roof sheet. Do not join sheets.

18.6.1 Accessories for raising roof sheeting above purlinsUse approved proprietary roof insulation spacer systems to raise the roof sheet above the vapour barrier laid over the purlins, creating an air gap between the two.

18.6.2 Roof sheeting and accessoriesZinc coated steel sheet; to AS 1397 – minimum coating AZ150.

18.6.3 Prepainted SteelPrepainted steel sheet, factory finished with a polyester finish to AS/NZS 2728.

Identification; Ensure that the material is identified with the manufacturers marking.

18.6.4 FastenersSelf-drilling screws: To: AS 3566.2, corrosion resistance Class 4 – complete with washers and neoprene seals. To Northern Territory Deemed To Comply Manual.

Use fasteners which have a 10 year warranty when used in ISO 9223 Category 5 atmospheric conditions.

Use fasteners which have a 25 year warranty when used in ISO 9223 Category 4 atmospheric conditions.

For Atmospheric Corrosivity Classification Use Corrosion Resistance ClassAS 3715, ISO 9223 AS 3566.2

5 & 4 43 3

Refer to NT CLIMATE ZONES TABLEUse fasteners which are approved for use on the roofing material by the manufacturer of the roofing materials.

Proprietary item: Buildex Climaseal ® 5 with Cyclonic Assembly.

Finish: Exposed fasteners to be prefinished with an oven baked polymer coating to match the roofing material.

18.6.5 Thermal breakWhere metal sheet roofing is fixed to metal purlins, metal rafters or metal battens, provide a thermal break, consisting of a material with an R-value of not less than R0.2 installed between the metal sheet roofing and its supporting metal purlins, metal rafters or metal battens.


ROOFING

18.6.6 Safety meshProvide galvanised wire mesh, as a fall protection barrier (fall-arrest). Comply with the requirements of the Work Health and Safety (N.U.L) Act and Regulations, and AS/NZS 4389 Safety Mesh.

18.6.7 ProtectionProtect the roof sheets from damage during handling and storage and prevent damage by moisture in stacked sheets.

18.6.8 CleaningClean the completed sections of roof of swarf, clippings, debris, and loose material at the end of each day’s work and on completion.

18.7 METAL FASCIA AND BARGEProprietary Item: Lysaght, Stratco or equal approved

Depth: 185 mm

Material: 0.42 BMT, G550 steel with a minimum coating AZ150.

Finish: Prepainted steel.

Colour Refer to FINISHES SCHEDULEFixing: Fix to rafter ends with proprietary fixing clips in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Accessories: Provide corner trims, end trims and capping as required.

18.8 METAL ROOFING

18.8.1 PitchIn NTCZ03 and NTCZ04 minimum roof pitch is to be:

For custom Orb 12 ½ ° For other profiles 5 °

Refer to NT CLIMATE ZONES TABLE.

18.8.2 DescriptionUse a proprietary system of preformed sheet and purpose-made accessories.

Design and installation: To: AS 1562.1 and to manufacturer’s instructions.

Material: Coated SteelProprietary item1: Bluescope Colorbond ULTRA – use in all Wind Region “C” areasProprietary item 2: Bluescope Colorbond - use in all Wind Region areas except as noted above Thickness: 0.48mm . (Do not use 0.42 BMT)Finish: Pre-finishedColour: Refer tenant colour scheme selection Fixing: Fix the sheeting in accordance with the Northern Territory Deemed to Comply Manual.Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 117RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

ROOFING

Accessories: Use material with the same finish as roofing sheets.

18.8.3 Ridges and EavesTreat ends of sheets as follows:

Turn ends of pans up at tops and down into gutters at bottoms by mechanical means.

Project sheets 50 mm into gutters.

Fit purpose-made ridge and eaves fillers of closed cell polyethylene, Unisil or equivalent.

Close off ribs at bottom of sheets by mechanical means or fit purpose-made rib end caps.

Fit purpose-made rib ridge caps.

18.8.4 Ridge and barge cappingFinish off along ridge and verge lines with purpose-made ridge or barge capping scribe cut to roofing profile.


Metal separationPrevent direct contact between incompatible metals, and between green hardwood or chemically treated timber and aluminium or coated steel, by either

applying an anti-corrosion, low moisture transmission coating to contact surfaces; or inserting a separation layer.

18.9 ROOF PLUMBING

18.9.1 GeneralProvide the flashings, cappings, gutters, rainwater heads, outlets and downpipes, necessary to complete the roof system.

Use stainless steel preformed components or use preformed metal components with a zincalume or painted finish or use UPVC rainwater goods. Refer to drawings.

Metal components must be compatible with roofing material, and, if any, metal wall cladding. Select components made from materials which will not cause galvanic corrosion due to dissimilar metals.

Refer to FINISHES SCHEDULE for colours.

Plastic rainwater goods: Use a proprietary system including gutters, downpipes, sumps, connections, fasteners and accessories.

18.9.2 MaterialsMetal rainwater goods: To: AS/NZS 2179.1 and AS/NZS 3500.3

18.9.3 InstallationTo: AS 3500.3.1 and AS/NZS 3500.3


ROOFING

Fixings: Use only approved metal fixings.

18.9.4 Jointing sheet metal rainwater goodsButt joints: Make over a backing strip of the same material.

Sealing: Seal fasteners and seal mechanically fastened joints. Fill the holes of blind rivets with silicone sealant.

18.9.5 Flashings and cappingFlash roof junctions, upstands, abutments and projections through the roof. Preform to required shapes where possible. Notch, scribe, flute or dress down as necessary to follow the profile of adjacent surfaces. Mitre angles and lap joints 150 mm in running lengths.


Upstands: Flash projections above or through the roof with two part flashings, consisting of a base flashing and a cover flashing, with not less than 100 mm vertical and 150 mm horizontal overlap. Provide for independent movement between the roof and the projection.

Wall abutments: Provide over-flashing where roof abuts walls, stepped to the roof slope in masonry and planked cladding, otherwise raking.

Pipe Penetrations: Seal with a neoprene coupling clamped to the pipe and fixed to the profile of the roof sheeting.

Proprietary Item: DEKTITE.

Colour: Paint to match the roof sheeting.

In Concrete or Masonry: Turn 25 mm into joints or grooves, wedge at 200 mm centres with compatible material and point up.

18.9.6 Gutters generallyPrefabricate gutters to the required shape where possible. Form stop ends, bends and returns. Turn down into outlets. Provide overflows to prevent back-flooding.

18.9.7 Minimum falls of guttersEaves Gutters: 1 in 500.

Box Gutters: 1 in 200.

18.9.8 Joints in guttersPre TIG weld stainless steel.

Prepainted steel and zincalume steel; lap rivet and seal with silicone sealant.

18.9.9 Valley GuttersProfile to suit the valley boards. Turn back 12mm of both edges 180 ° Secure with screws at the top of the valley boards to prevent creep.

Material: Prepainted Steel.



ROOFING

Width: N/AColour: To match the roof sheeting.

18.9.10 Eaves GuttersHigh fronted square profile with overflow slots.

Material: Prepainted Steel. Colour as specified in FINISHES SCHEDULE.


Size: 125 mm x 100 mm.

Fixing: Fix to fascia with 40 mm x 1.0 mm galvanized brackets at 900 mm max. centres with overstraps.

For NTCZ03 and NTCZ04 ensure fixings are able to withstand high volume rainfall, especially initial flows, common in cyclonic regions. Refer to NT CLIMATE ZONES TABLE.

Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints at maximum 12 m centres by stop-ending the gutter and saddle-flashing over the two stop ends.

18.9.11 Box GuttersForm to required falls, with top edges level and returned 20 mm at 90 °. Weld stop ends and outlets for downpipes and overflows. Fabricate rainwater sumps as detailed.

Material: 0.7 mm grade 304 stainless steel, 2b finish.Size: N/ASupport: Provide baseboards – plywood, cement sheet or profiled steel sheet. Fix brackets as recommended by the manufacturer. As a minimum, at ends and at 750 mm maximum centres.

18.9.12 Metal DownpipesPrefabricate downpipes to the required section and shape with lock seams. Connect heads to gutter outlets and, if applicable, connect feet to rainwater drainage system. Fabricate joints, bends and offsets and provide accessories as required.


INSULATION, SARKING, AND PLIABLE MEMBRANES

19 CLADDING



WOODWORK, for material and component requirements for timber generally.

LINING, for soffits.

INSULATION, for insulation, vapour barriers and sarking.


19.2 STANDARDSAS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip – Coatings of zinc

and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium

AS/NZS 1859 Reconstituted wood-based panels – Specifications

AS/NZS 1859.4 - Wet-processed fibreboard

AS/NZS 2269 Plywood - Structural

AS/NZS 2270 Plywood and blockboard for interior use

AS/NZS 2271 Plywood and blockboard for exterior use

AS 2334 Steel nails – Metric series

AS/NZS 2728 Prefinished/ prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior building applications – Performance requirements


AS/NZS 2908 Cellulose-cement products

AS/NZS 2908.2 - Flat sheets


AS 3566.2 - Corrosion resistance requirements

AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles

19.3 GENERAL

19.3.1 Sheet metal cladding - Storage and handlingStore metal cladding materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

Store metal cladding materials on a level base.

Do not store metal cladding materials exposed to moisture, or in contact with other materials, which may cause, rust, white rust, staining, denting, or other surface damage.

Handle metal cladding materials as follows:

Use gloves when handling precoated metal cladding material.Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 121RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road


Protect edges and surfaces from damage. Do not drag sheets across each other or over other materials.

19.3.2 ProtectionKeep the cladding materials free of swarf, debris, and loose material during construction, and leave them clean and unobstructed on completion.

Repair damage to the cladding.

If it is necessary to touch up minor damage to prepainted metal roofing, do not overspray onto undamaged surfaces.

19.3.3 Thermal movementProvide for thermal movement in the cladding installation and the structure, including movement in joints and fastenings. Refer to manufacturers' installation guides for maximum lengths of unbroken runs of cladding material. Provide expansion breaks in cladding material to manufacturers' requirements.

19.3.4 Metal separationPrevent direct and/or indirect contact between incompatible metals, and between green hardwood or chemically treated timber and aluminium or coated steel, by either of the following methods:

Applying an anti-corrosion, low moisture transmission coating to contact surfaces. Inserting a separation layer.

Select components made from materials which will not cause galvanic corrosion due to dissimilar metals being present in the system.


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of framing complete with sarking and flashings ready to receive cladding.

19.5 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSMaterials, components, and accessories must comply with the Northern Territory Deemed to Comply Manual.

19.5.1 Sheet metalDo not use steel components which have:

Damaged finish. Rust. White rust.

Zinc coated steel sheet: To AS 1397 – minimum coating AZ150.

Prepainted steel sheet: Factory finished with a polyester finish to AS/NZS 2728.

Identification; Ensure that the material is identified with the manufacturers marking.




Construction, and installation, must comply with the Northern Territory Deemed to Comply Manual.

Substrates or framing

Before fixing cladding check and, if necessary, adjust the alignment of substrates or framing.

Accessories and trim

Provide all accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation. Install as recommended by the manufacturer.

19.7 METAL CLADDINGProvide a proprietary system of prefinished profiled metal cladding complete with accessories, trims, and flashings.

Proprietary item: Bluescope ColorbondMaterial: Zinc coated steel sheet to AS 1397 – minimum coating AZ150.

Thickness: 0.48mmPrepainted Finish: To: AS/NZS 2728.

Profile(s): Custom Orb and Trimdek – Refer Drawings for locations

Identification: Ensure that the material is identified with the manufacturer’s marking.

Colour: Refer to Finishes Schedule.

Trim: Standard proprietary trims.Fixing: Fix the cladding in accordance with the Northern Territory Deemed to Comply Manual.

Penetrations: Flash all pipes and ducts, etc. passing through the cladding and trim with colour matched material to ensure weather tight joints.



20 INSULATION, SARKING, AND PLIABLE MEMBRANES



MECHANICAL INSULATION, for insulation to pipe and ductwork.

ROOFING, for coordination of vapour barriers (and sarking and insulation).

CLADDING.

DOORS, seals and lining.

WINDOWS, seals and lining.


20.2 DEFINITIONSTerminology; To: AS/NZS 4859.1

Fire hazard properties: To: BCA. Vol.1. Section - A2.4.

Breathable membrane (vapour permeable): A flexible membrane material normally used for secondary waterproofing, or for support under bulk insulation to a roof, that allows for the transmission of water vapour.

Condensation: The process of moisture formation on a surface as a result of moist air coming into contact with a surface which is at a lower temperature. As cool air is unable to retain the same amount of water vapour as warm air, excess moisture is released as condensation.

Insulation: Typically a material or assembly of materials intended to provide resistance to heat flow.

Mineral Wool, including glasswool and rockwool; Entangled mat of fibrous non-crystalline material derived from inorganic oxides or minerals, rock, slag or glass, processed at high temperatures from a molten state:

FBS-1 Glass wool: Spun fibres of molten glass, utilizing up to 60% recycled waste glass, thermally bonded to form batts, blankets and sheets for thermal and acoustic insulation.

FBS-1 Rock wool: Spun fibres of molten rock thermally bonded to form batts and blankets for thermal and acoustic insulation.

Pliable building membrane: Includes; damp proof membranes, sarking, insulation, vapour barrier sheet membranes, or a membrane which acts as a combination of these, when installed in a building structure. Refer to AS/NZS 4200.

Polyester insulation: Polyester fibres thermally bonded to form batts and blankets.

Sarking: A material intended to collect and discharge any water that may penetrate a building envelope. A reflective foil laminate (RFL) is commonly used as sarking. Where sarking also forms a vapour barrier, the sarking must conform to the vapour barrier properties detailed in this specification. The sarking must conform to AS/NZS 4200.

Sisalation: Bonded layers of aluminium foil which may be used as a water barrier. Where Sisalation also forms a vapour barrier, the Sisalation must conform to the vapour barrier properties detailed in this specification.



Vapour barrier: A material specifically intended to restrict the transmission of vapour. Typically used for moisture proofing. Only use material with Classification: High- Impermeable for the vapour barrier. Only use material rated as heavy duty or better.

20.3 STANDARDSAS 1366 Rigid cellular plastics sheets for thermal insulation

AS 1366.1 - Rigid cellular polyurethane (RC/PUR)

AS 1530 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures

AS 1530.2 - Test for flammability of materials

AS 2423 Coated steel wire fencing products for terrestrial, aquatic and general use

AS 3999 Bulk thermal insulation – Installation

AS/NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays

AS/NZS 4200.1 - Materials

AS/NZS 4200.2 - Installation

AS/NZS 4389 Roof safety mesh

AS/NZS 4859 Materials for the thermal insulation of buildings

AS/NZS 4859.1 - General criteria and technical provisions

20.3.1 Statutory requirementsComply with Work Health and Safety (N.U.L) Act and Regulations.

Comply with applicable Work Health and Safety Codes of Practice.

Comply with the National Construction Code (NCC) of Australia which includes the Building Code of Australia (BCA).

Note: The thermal insulation requirements in this specification take precedence over the thermal insulation requirements of the NCC/BCA unless the NCC/BCA mandates a higher level of thermal insulation.

20.3.2 Installation of mineral wool insulationComply with the ICANZ Industry Code of Practice for the Safe Use of Glass Wool and Rock Wool Insulation.

Marking: Deliver mineral wool products to the site in packaging labelled FBS1 BIOSOLUBLE INSULATION.

20.4 INSPECTION – HOLD POINTHold Point - Give sufficient notice so that the sarking, vapour barrier and insulation can be inspected before it is covered up or concealed.

20.5 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

20.5.1 Bulk Thermal Insulation



Cellulosic fibre (loose fill): To: AS/NZS 4859.1, Section 5.

Mineral and/or glass wool blankets and cut pieces, including batts: To: AS/NZS 4859.1, Section 8. Must be FBS1 biosoluble insulation.

Polyester fibre: To: AS/NZS 4859.1, Section 7.

Polyurethane (rigid cellular sheets): To: AS 1366.1.

Wool: To: AS/NZS 4859.1, Section 6. Standards Mark required.

20.5.2 Sarking-type materialTo: AS/NZS 4200.1. Standards Mark required.

Proprietary Item: Refer drawingsFlammability index < 5 when tested in conformance with AS 1530.2.

Thermal performance labelling: To: AS/NZS 4859.1 Section 9.

20.5.3 FastenersUse galvanized steel fasteners and supports.

20.5.4 Wire support to roof insulation and pliable membranesProvide mesh support to:

Sarking, vapour barrier or reflective thermal insulation membranes laid over roof framing; and

Blanket type thermal insulation laid over roof framing members as sound insulation to metal roofing.

Use support mesh of 1.25 mm diameter galvanized wire welded in a grid of 100 mm x 115 mm.

Standard: To: AS 2423. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table

Roof safety mesh to statutory requirements may also be used to support sarking and pliable membranes.

Standard: To: AS/NZS 4389.

Size: 300 mm x 150 mm grid of 2 mm diameter galvanized wire.

20.5.5 Safety MeshComply with AS 4389 and Work Health and Safety (N.U.L) Act and Regulations.

Comply with Work Health and Safety Codes of Practice for working at heights.

Where there is a requirement for the installation of safety mesh this is to be installed in accordance with the Australian Standards, Codes of Practice and manufacturer’s directions. At all times Contractors must be engaged in a continual hazard identification, assessment, and mitigation processes. Risks to the health and safety of persons affected by the project must be managed appropriately and in accordance with Australian Standards, the Work Health and Safety (N.U.L) Act and Regulations, applicable Codes of Practice, and recognized best industry practice.

20.6 VAPOUR BARRIER INSTALLATION



20.6.1 GeneralTo: AS/NZS 4200.1 - Pliable building membrane and equivalent to sarking type materials as defined in the BCA. Membrane must be heavy weight, and must have high impermeability to water vapour.

Proprietary item: Taped Aircell Insulbreak 65

20.6.2 RequirementsAchieve air tight separation between air conditioned and non-air conditioned spaces to prevent moisture transmission, this includes internal non air conditioned spaces.

Infill of insulation and vapour barrier are required to be installed above the ceiling from top of block wall to underside of roof to ensure continuity of separating air conditioned spaces from non-air conditioned spaces. For example a toilet or store room placed centrally within the typically air conditioned building will require a stud wall extending from the top of the block wall to the underside of the roof complete with insulation and a vapour barrier on the "hot" side to prevent moisture being transferred to the cold side ceiling space.

20.6.3 Vapour Barriers SystemThe vapour barrier must have high impermeability to vapour, to AS 4200.1. Provide moisture proofing, including at laps, at edges, and at penetrations through the vapour barrier membrane.

For Frame construction – Ensure the roof vapour barrier is lapped and sealed over the wall vapour barrier. The vapour barrier must be installed on the high vapour pressure side (hot side) of the wall.

For Metal sheeted roof areas – Use a vapour barrier membrane which can also act as sarking. Single layer of heavy weight sisalation over a single layer of insulation or a single layer of heavy weight sisalation over a bonded layer of insulation fixed to a perforated reflective foil material. Bonded perforated foil to the underside.

For masonry construction – The vapour barrier is provided by an external painted membrane finish or sealant coating to prevent vapour transmission through the blockwork. This must be, as a minimum, on the high vapour pressure side (hot side) of the wall. Both sides of wall may be sealed.

Seal reveals at openings in external walls, and in walls which are between conditioned and non-conditioned spaces, with material which is impervious to water before installing windows, doors or other items in those openings.

Where the air conditioning systems are to be run continuously, additional design features need to be incorporated to ensure long term effectiveness of vapour barrier.

20.6.4 InstallationVapour barriers in the roof must be laid on the high vapour pressure side (hot side) of the whole of the roof area, running parallel to the purlins, and lapped 150 mm over the purlins. Limit the tension and contact with roof metal sheet to reduce thermal transmission and to reduce the likelihood of corrosion developing.

Seal the laps and smaller penetrations with approved heat resistant pressure sensitive tape 75 mm wide and elastomeric sealant to form a continuous air tight seal. The elastomeric sealant used must be compatible with the membrane material.

Masonry walls:



Seal vapour barrier membranes to walls with elastomeric sealant and mechanically clamp to the walls with metal angle brackets.

If vapour barrier extends from the underside of the roof to the top of the wall, fix metal angles between roof beams, directly above the wall, to support the vapour barrier at roof level.

The elastomeric sealant used must be compatible with the materials with which it is in contact.

Frame construction:

Ensure the roof vapour barrier is lapped and sealed over the wall vapour barrier. The vapour barrier must be installed on the high vapour pressure side (hot side) of

the wall.

Where roof beams pass through the vapour barrier:

Weld or mechanically fix metal flanges to the beam, and Seal the vapour barrier membrane to the flanges, and to all surfaces of the beam

with elastomeric sealant, and Mechanically clamp the vapour barrier to the faces of the flanges, and to all

surfaces of the beam, and Ensure there are no gaps between beams and flanges which could allow air to

pass from one side of the vapour barrier to the other. Refer to drawings if available.

Large penetrations such as ducts or flues:

Fix angle flanges or purpose made straps to the duct or flue, and Mechanically clamp and the vapour barrier to all sides of the duct or flue, and Seal the vapour barrier to all sides of the duct or flue with elastomeric sealant, and Ensure the vapour barrier material is supported to prevent stressing the seal, and No fixings are to penetrate the duct. Refer to Drawings if available.

Where box gutters are incorporated into the roof design:

Ensure the continuity of the vapour barrier under and around the gutters, and Support the vapour barrier at the sides of gutters with plywood or sheet metal

infills from the underside of the roof down to the gutter board, and Ensure the vapour barrier is not damaged during installation.

Any penetrations, including service penetrations, to the vapour barrier must be fully sealed with approved pressure sensitive tape and elastomeric sealant compatible with materials with which it will be in contact.

In critical air conditioning situations pay particular attention to mechanical clamping and sealing methods at walls and around structural members and penetrations. Seal the laps with an approved heat resistant pressure sensitive tape and elastomeric sealant to ensure air tight separation.

Extent of Vapour Barrier - Over and around all air-conditioned spaces where adjacent spaces are not air-conditioned, including within ceiling spaces.

20.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION

20.7.1 Bulk insulationTo: AS 3999.



Batts and rigid sheets: Install to fit tightly between the framing members. If support is not otherwise provided, attach nylon twines to the framing, at ¼ height and ¾ height and, if there are no central noggings, at ½ height, from bottom plate to top plate, and stretch tight. Roof insulation required to be non-loose fill.

Use spacer roof framing systems to provide air spaces between roof sheet and foil used as combination sarking and vapour barrier where there is bulk insulation under the foil at roof level.

Loose fill: Provide timber boxing or equivalent to retain loose fill on external edges, cavities and penetrations, and to prevent spilling.

20.7.2 Sarking-type materialTo: AS/NZS 4200.2.

Use heavy duty material, Bradford Thermofoil 753 (heavy weight) or approved brand with equivalent specification.

20.7.3 Reflective foil laminateTo timber: Fasten with clouts or staples at maximum 300 mm centres.

To steel: Fasten with proprietary double sided pressure sensitive tape and elastomeric sealant. Adhesives to be compatible with the materials with which it will be in contact.

To plywood membrane support: Fasten with proprietary water based contact adhesive. Adhesive to be compatible with the materials with which it will be in contact.

Run parallel to purlins. Overlap a minimum of 150 mm on purlins, or battens, and adhesive fix to purlin or batten. Refer to Vapour Barriers clause for additional requirements if used as a vapour barrier.

Foil not supported by plywood is to be laid to give a 50 mm air space between the roof sheeting and the foil mid span between supports (purlins or battens).

20.7.4 Ceiling insulationType: Fibreglass Batts

R Value: 2.5

20.7.5 Roof sarkingMaterials: To: AS 4200.1 and to AS 4200.2.

Installation: Lay the sarking to the whole of the roof area running parallel to the purlins and lapped 150 mm over the purlins. If roof sarking is also to act as vapour barrier, seal laps as detailed in the Vapour Barrier Installation clause, and ensure continuity of the vapour barrier between roof and wall.

Extent of roof sarking; Refer Drawings


WINDOWS

21 WINDOWS

21.1GENERALCross references

Refer to the following sections:


GLAZING, for glass and glazing including shower screens.

HARDWARE, for hardware and keying.


Interpretation

The term window used in this section also means louvre grille, lourve window, glazed external door and sliding glass external door, where applicable.

Standards

AS 1111: ISO metric hexagon bolts & screws

AS 1112: ISO metric hexagon nuts

AS/NZS 1170: Structural design actions

AS/NZS 1170.0: - General principles

AS/NZS 1170.2: - Wind actions

AS 1214: Hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse thread series)

AS 1231: Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Anodic oxidation coatings

AS 1237: Plain washers for metric bolts, screws and nuts for general purposes

AS 1288: Glass in buildings – Selection and installation

AS 1427: ISO metric machine screws

AS 1789: Electroplated zinc (electrogalvanized) coatings on ferrous articles (batch process)

AS 1897: Electroplated coatings on threaded components (metric coarse series)

AS 2047: Windows in buildings – Selection & installation

AS/NZS 2904: Damp-proof courses and flashings

AS 3566: Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries

AS 3566.1: - General requirements and mechanical properties


AS 3715: Metal finishing – Thermoset powder coating for architectural applications of aluminium and aluminium alloys

AS/NZS 4402: Hexagon head tapping screws


WINDOWS

AS/NZS 4403: Slotted pan head tapping screws

AS/NZS 4404: Slotted countersunk (flat) head tapping screws (common head style)

AS/NZS 4405: Slotted raised countersunk (oval) head tapping screws (common head style)

AS/NZS 4406: Cross recessed pan head tapping screws

AS/NZS 4407: Cross recessed countersunk (flat) head tapping screws (common head style)

AS/NZS 4408: Cross recessed raised countersunk (oval) head tapping screws

AS/NZS 4409: Hexagon washer head tapping screws

AS/NZS 4410: Hexagon flange head tapping screws


Give sufficient notice to the Superintendent so that inspection may be made at the following stages:

Fabricated window assemblies at the factory ready for delivery to the site.

Openings prepared to receive windows (where windows are to be installed in prepared openings).

21.3DESIGNAssemblies: Design the windows and external door assemblies (including glazing, framing and fixings) assemblies:

To: AS/NZS 1170.2

To: AS 1288; and

To: AS 2047.

Pressures: Design the window assemblies to be capable of resisting the most adverse combination of pressures as set out in AS/NZS 1170. 2.

Suction: Design the window assemblies to take into account the high local suction factors as given in AS/NZS 1170. 2.

NOTE: Refer to the structural drawings for site location and associated design parameter information.Human Impact: Design the window assemblies to take into account the human impact requirements as given in AS 1288.

Building Use: ResidentialMarking

For Aluminium Windows: To: AS 2047.

21.4FRAME SECTIONSSections: The window frame sections shown on the drawings are indicative only to show the required relationships between openings and adjoining surfaces.Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 131RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

WINDOWS

Responsibility: Such drawings or the section types shown do not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to ensure that the proposed windows and or doors conform to the specified design requirements.

21.5CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONS – HOLD POINTShop drawings

Hold point - Submit shop drawings to the Superintendent; showing the following information a minimum of 14 days prior to ordering materials.

Layout (sectional plan and elevation) of the window assembly.

Full size sections of members.

Methods of assembly.

Methods of installation, including fixing, caulking and flashing.

Provision for vertical and horizontal expansion.

Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces.

Hardware, fittings and accessories.

Lubrication requirements.

Glazing details.

Supply, with the shop drawings, calculations and a certificate signed by a practicing structural engineer, indicating that the entire assembly when installed as detailed, complies with the requirements of AS/NZS 1170, AS 1288 and AS 2047. The Certificate shall state the design criteria used, and that the installation is in accordance with the Contract documents.

21.6MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSFlashings

To: AS/NZS 2904.

Fasteners

Bolts and screws: To: AS 1111.

Hexagon nuts: To: AS 1112.

Metal washers: To: AS 1237.

Machine screws: To: AS/NZS 1427.

Self-drilling screws: To: AS 3566.1 for general requirements and AS 3566.2 for corrosion resistance.

Tapping and metallic drive screws: To: AS/NZS 4402 to 4410 inclusive.

Electroplating: To: AS 1897.

Galvanizing: To: AS 1214.

Stainless steel grade: 316

Metal finishes


WINDOWS

Zinc plating: To: AS 1789.

Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

Anodizing: To: AS 1231.Thermoset powder coating: To AS 3715.


Service condition category: NS13_Metal_finishes_Services_condition_category

21.7CONSTRUCTION GENERALLYStandards

Metal windows installation: To: AS 2047.

Joints

Make accurately fitted tight joints so that neither fasteners nor fixing devices such as pins, screws, adhesives and pressure indentations are visible on exposed surfaces.

Jointing materials

Use jointing and pointing materials, including sealants, mastics, primers, gaskets and compressible fillers of types compatible when used together, and non-staining to finished surfaces. Do not use bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces.

Silicone sealants: Neutral cure silicone.

Operation

Ensure moving parts operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, and at the correct tensions or operating forces. Lubricated where appropriate.

Protection

Remove all traces of temporary protection measures from the following:

Contact mating surfaces before joining up.

Exposed surfaces.

Flashings and weatherings

Materials: Use proprietary item flashings and weatherings, that are corrosion resistant, compatible with other materials in the installation, and coated with a non-staining compound where applicable.

Installation: Install flashings, weather bars, drips, storm moulds, caulking and pointing so that water is prevented from penetrating the building between the window frame and the building structure under the prevailing service conditions, including normal structural movement of the building.

Installation

Install the windows so that the frames

are plumb, level, straight and true within acceptable building tolerances;


WINDOWS

are adequately fixed or anchored to the building structure; and

will not carry any building loads, including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening.

Fixing

Packing: Pack behind the fixing points with fibre cement, or corrosion protected metal full width packing.

Flashings: Refer drawingsFasteners: Conceal all fasteners.

Internal metal trim

For metal windows provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trim using materials and finishes matching the window frames. Make neat, accurate and clean junctions between the frame and the adjoining building surface.

21.8LOUVRE ASSEMBLIESAdjustable louvres

Use aluminium galleries with adjustable black plastic clips with dual operating mechanisms. Screw fix to mullions and jambs.

Use louvre blades clipped into blade holders pivoted to stiles or coupling mullions, linked together in banks, each bank operated by an operating handle incorporating a latching device, or by a locking bar.

Installation: Screw fix the stiles and mullions to the building structure. Provide proprietary weather strips to heads and sills.

Metal louvres

Use a proprietary item metal louvre blade system, mounted in a metal surround frame or sub-frame, installed as for metal window installations.

Adjustable metal louvres

Blades: Refer Door and Window Schedule Combination 6mm laminated glass louvre and nil finish aluminium

Stiffeners: Provide stiffeners where required to meet the wind loading requirements.

Finish: Stove baked enamel to manufacturer’s standard colours.

Louvre arrangement

Horizontal: Louvres span between frame stiles or mullions.

Continuous horizontal: Louvres run continuously past, and are supported by, concealed mullions.

Vertical: Louvres span between frame heads and sills.


WINDOWS

Frames

Include the necessary sills, jambs, mullions, transoms, internal and external corners, beads, brackets, anchors, straps and accessories.

21.9SECURITY GRILLESDescription

Use proprietary metal security grille screen or operable screen and frame assemblies, securely fixed to the building structure with tamper resistant fastenings.

Type: As detailed on the drawings.

Proprietary Item: Dabsco Safety ViewState brand name and catalogue number. Generally Amplimesh 103 or Crimsafe stainless steel mesh, or Panther Mesh, or equivalent

Finishes: Powercoated aluminium, colour: black

Frames: To match the window frames.

Mesh: Black.

Locations All windows, refer Door and Window Schedule

21.10WINDOW SCHEDULERefer Door and Window Schedule

21.11LOUVRE SCHEDULERefer Door and Window Schedule

21.12LOUVRE GRILLE SCHEDULERefer Door and Window Schedule


GLAZING

22 GLAZING




ROOFING, for roof lights and glazed roofing.

PARTITIONS, for partition glazing.

WINDOWS, for window glazing.

DOORS, for door glazing.


StandardsAS/NZS 1170: Structural design actions

AS/NZS 1170.2: - Wind Actions


AS/NZS 2208: Safety glazing materials in buildings

AAMA 800: Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods For Sealants.

22.2MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSStandards

Glazing compounds, sealants and tapes (where used with aluminium): To: AAMA 800.

Glass type and thickness

To: AS 1288 where no glass type or thickness is specified.

Safety Glass

Standard: To: AS/NZS 2208.

Standards mark: Required.

Design wind pressure: Design the glazing to be capable of withstanding the most adverse combination of pressures as given in AS 1170.2

NOTE: Refer to the structural drawings for site location and associated design parameter information.Glazing Materials

Use glass and glazing materials as follows:

General: Free from defects which detract from appearance or interfere with performance under normal conditions of use.

Glazing plastics: Free from surface abrasions, and warranted by the manufacturer for ten years against yellowing or other colour change, loss of strength and impact


GLAZING

resistance, and general deterioration.

Other glazing materials (including putty, glazing compounds, sealants, gaskets, glazing tapes, spacing strips, spacing tapes, spacers, setting blocks and compression wedges): Appropriate for the conditions of the application and to the required performance criteria.

Mirrors

Reflective surface: Provide a layer of silver deposited on the glass or glazing plastic.

Protective coatings: Provide an electrolytic copper coating not less than 5 µm thick, and two coats of mirror backing and edge sealing paint, having a total dry film thickness of not less than 50 µm.

22.3GLAZINGGlass processing

Perform required processes on glass, including cutting, obscuring, silvering and bending. Form necessary holes, including for fixings, equipment, access holes and speaking holes. Process exposed glass edges to a finish not inferior to ground arrised.

Installation

Install the glass as follows:

Each piece is held firmly in place by a permanent means; which enable it to withstand the normal loadings and ambient conditions at its location; without distortion or damage to glass and glazing materials;

Building movements are not transferred to the glass; and

External glazing is watertight and airtight.

Temporary marking: Use a method which does not harm the glass, and remove all traces on completion.

Toughened glass: Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after toughening. Use installation methods which prevent the glass making direct contact with metals or other non-resilient materials.

Frameless installations

Joints: Join the vertical edges of adjacent glass panels with a silicone jointing compound. Arris the edges of the glass panels.

Spacing: Space the glass panels with a gap the same width as the thickness of the glass.

Sealing: Overfill the gap and trim when dry with a silicone spatula. Use non-acetic silicone on laminated glass joints and use black silicone on tinted glass.

On completion: Replace any damaged glass and leave the work clean, polished, and free from defects or damage.

Preglazing

Supply the window assemblies and glazed doors, inclusive of glazing, shop preglazed unless preglazing is impracticable.


GLAZING

Fixing mirrors

Screw fixing: Direct to wall plugs with dome-headed chromium-plated screws in each corner. Use polyethylene sleeves and washers to prevent contact between screw and glass. Do not over-tension the screws.

Frame fixing: Proprietary aluminium frames anodized to the selected colour, around all the mirror edges, mitred frame corners. Bed glass edges in a continuous resilient gasket. Attach the frame to the substrate with concealed screw fixings. Seal the frame to the substrate with a paintable sealant, which does not react with the mirror coating. Do not allow the sealant to contact the mirror back.

Mirrors scheduleRefer drawings

22.4GLAZED SHOWER SCREENSDescription

Use a proprietary system comprising frames of extruded aluminium, stainless steel, or PVC; assembled around safety glass to form fixed panels and sliding, hinged or pivoted doors.

Shower screen systemRefer Drawings

Water shedding

Provide an assembly that sheds water to the inside without retaining it on the frame surfaces. Seal the edge of the frame to adjoining surfaces with a resilient strip.

Sliding assemblies

Hang the sliding sash by means of stainless steel or nylon sheaves on overhead channel track formed in the frame head, and fit nylon or equivalent bottom guides.


DOORS

23 DOORS

23.1GENERALCross References



GLAZING, for glass and glazing.

HARDWARE, for hardware and keying.

WINDOWS, for aluminium sliding doors.


Dimensions: The door sizes specified in the DOOR SCHEDULE are door leaf dimensions. Make the frames to fit the doors. Minimum clear opening - generally 850mm width.

Door furniture: Mounting height generally to AS 1428.

Standards

APAS 2916: Organic zinc rich coating for protection of steel

AS/NZS 1170: Structural design actions


AS 1397: Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip – coatings of zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium

AS 1428: Design for access and mobility

AS 1428.1: -General requirements for access – New building work

AS 1905: Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant walls

AS 1905.1: - Fire-resistant doorsets

AS 1905.2: - Fire-resistant roller shutters

AS 1909: Installation of timber doorsets (1984 – Available as obsolescent)

AS 2047: Windows in buildings – Selection & installation

AS/NZS 2271: Plywood and blockboard for exterior use

AS 2688: Timber doors (1984 – Available as obsolescent)

AS 2689: Timber doorsets (1984 – Available as obsolescent)

AS 2796: Timber – Hardwood – Sawn and milled products

AS 2796.1: - Product specifications

AS 2796.2: - Grade descriptions

AS/NZS 2904: Damp-proof courses and flashings


DOORS

AS/NZS 2924: High pressure decorative laminates

AS/NZS 2924.1 - Sheets made from thermosetting resins – Classification and specifications

AS 5039: Security screen doors and security window grilles

AS 5040: Installation of security screen doors and window grilles


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of door frames in place before building in to masonry.

23.3WARRANTYRequirement: Provide a warranty on the doors from the manufacturer against faulty workmanship or materials for a period of two years, from the date of shipment from the factory.

23.4MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSDoorsets and doors

Timber doorsets: To: AS 2689 - 1984 (Available as Obsolescent)

Security screen doors (hinged or sliding): To: AS 5039

Flush doors and joinery doors: To: AS 2688 – 1984 (Available as Obsolescent).

External Doors: Use type B adhesives or better. If refixing edge strips, etc. use an adhesive equivalent to that used for the door construction.

Aluminium framed hinged doors; To: AS/NZS 1170 and AS 1288

Aluminium sliding doorsets: To: AS 2047.

Fire resistant doorsets: To: AS 1905.1.

Flashings and weatherings

Material: To AS/NZS 2904. Use flashings and weatherings, which are corrosion resistant, compatible with the other materials in the installation, and coated with a non-staining compound where necessary.

Installation: Install flashings, weather bars, drips, storm moulds, caulking and pointing so that water is prevented from penetrating the building between the door frame and the building structure under the prevailing service conditions, including normal structural movement of the building.

Jointing materials

Use jointing and pointing materials, including sealants, mastics, primers, gaskets and compressible fillers of types compatible when used together, and non-staining to finished surfaces. Do not use bituminous materials on absorbent surfaces.


DOORS

23.5CONSTRUCTION GENERALLYDoors All Doors are to have hard wood edge strip - all sides. - External doors shall be solid timber (unless noted otherwise in schedules and drawings).

- Internal doors shall be solid timber (unless noted otherwise in schedules and drawings). - Doors over 800 mm wide to have four hingesRefer further to drawings, door and finishes schedule(s).JointsMake accurately fitted tight joints so that neither fasteners nor fixing devices such as pins, screws, adhesives and pressure indentations are visible on exposed surfaces.

OperationEnsure moving parts operate freely and smoothly, without binding or sticking, at correct tensions or operating forces and that they are lubricated where appropriate.

InstallationInstall doors so that the frames

are plumb, level, straight and true within acceptable building tolerances;

are adequately fixed or anchored to the building structure; and

will not carry any building loads, including loads caused by structural deflection or shortening.

Security screen doors to be installed to: AS 5040.

Hinged doorsets in two leaves

Use rebated meeting stiles or fix equivalent metal "T" stop to one leaf, unless the doors are double acting. Chamfer square edged doors as necessary to prevent binding between the leaves.

Window and door assemblies

If doors are to be installed in window frames as part of a combined window and door assembly, use a door frame as specified in the WINDOW SCHEDULE section for the relevant window type, plus appropriate modification and accessories necessary for the door installation.

Seals

Use purpose-made proprietary seals to meet requirements for weather, draught, smoke and acoustic sealing. Provide fixings, rebates, grooves and clearances as necessary for installation and operation of the seals. Allow seals unwound from coils to settle before use.

Trim

Provide mouldings, architraves, reveal linings, and other internal trim using materials and finishes matching the window frames, to make neat and clean junctions between the frame and the adjoining building surface.

23.6TIMBER DOORSInstallation

Generally; To: AS 1909 - 1984 (Available as Obsolescent)


DOORS

Provide timber doors in their frames incorporating the door furniture as specified in the DOOR SCHEDULE and/or HARDWARE section and the following requirements:

- All doors are to have a minimum 850mm clear opening.

- House the hinges into the door stiles.

- Fit doors with an even tolerance of 2 to 3mm to the frames.

- Adjust the threshold clearance to suit the particular floor finish or door seal.

Door thickness (minimum)

- 38 mm for interior doors up to 900mm wide

- 40 mm for doors over 900 mm wide and external doors.

Flush doors

Edge strips: Fix to stiles. Minimum finished thickness; 12 mm top and sides and 20mm bottom. If trimming is required reduce edge strips on either side evenly. Increase overall thickness to not less than 15 mm to accommodate the full depth of the rebate in rebated doors. Form rebates to suit standard rebated hardware.

Cut-outs: If openings are required in flush doors (eg. for louvres or glazing) make the cut-outs a minimum 120 mm from the edges of the doors.

Do not use cellular core and intermediate rail core flush doors.

Priming: Prime all areas subjected to paint removal during the course of fitting, creating rebates for hinge housings and the like, prior to hanging.

Painting: Within 48 hours of hanging and prior to the installation of door handles, weather excluders and the like (latches and locks excepted), undercoat all surfaces, followed by a minimum one finishing coat to all surfaces including top and bottom edges. The final coat may be applied at a later stage.

Warranty: Failure to observe the hanging and paint protection requirements will render the door manufacturer's warranty as null and void and door replacement will be required and at the contractor's expense.

Branding requirements: Display the following information on an exposed edge of the top or bottom rail:

The name or registered trademark of the manufacturer;

Stiles on which the lockblock, hingeblock sets are located.

Special FacingsDecorative laminate sheets: To: AS/NZS 2924.1

Prepainted steel sheet: 0.55 BMT prepainted steel sheet contact adhesive bonded to the door faces.

Typical door types SOLID CORE – FLUSH PANEL DOOR (INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL DOORS)

Thickness: Internal doors up to 900mm wide: 38mm.

External doors and doors over 900mm wide: 40mm.


DOORS

Cross Band Veneer: 1.5 mm minimum, with the grain of the veneer adjacent to the core at right angles to the grain of the core and of the same species on both sides of the door.

Face Veneer: Use exterior grade (B Bond) with face veneer equal to Quality A To: AS/NZS 2271.

Core: Block board or MDF. MDF may only be used in arid areas.

Edge Strips: Kiln dried hardwood:

12 mm minimum top and sides

20 mm minimum bottom.

Adhesives: Face panels (machine pressed) - urea formaldehyde resin, edge strips - melamine fortified urea formaldehyde resin, securely pinned.

INTERNAL HONEYCOMB – CORED FLUSH DOOR

Do not use honeycomb – cored flush doors.

23.7SLIDING DOOR FRAMESDescription

Suspend sliding doors from overhead tracks and wheel carriages appropriate to the size and mass of the doors.

Accessories

Provide overhead track supports and head and jamb linings appropriate to the arrangement of the door, and removable pelmets at the head to allow access to the wheel carriages for adjustment.

Guides and stops: Adjustable nylon floor guides to suit grooved or ungrooved doors, as applicable, and buffer type track stop to limit the travel of the door leaf. Provide a safety device to stop inadvertent total closure of sliding patio doors.

Wheel carriages: Fully adjustable precision ball race type providing smooth quiet operation.

23.8STEEL DOOR FRAMESDescription

Provide frames assembled from coated steel sections, including necessary accessories such as grommet type buffers, strike plates to suit the specified hardware, spreaders, mortar guards, switch boxes, fixing ties or brackets, and cavity flashing with suitable provision for fixing hardware; pre-finished with protective coatings, built in or fixed to prepared openings.

Sections

Incorporate rebates or double rebates where required for side hung doors or glazed transoms.

Coated steel sheet: To: AS 1397.

Frame material: 1.2 mm thick zincanneal (Lysaght GZ-ZF100) except for fire door frames.


DOORS

Assembly method

Welded: Shop assemble frames with a continuous welding across mitred flanges. Grind the welds smooth and cold galvanize the welded joints before shop priming with a primer to APAS 2916.

Shop priming

Shop prime the sections to the specified paint system.

Hardware

Make suitable provision for fixing hardware including hinges and closers, using 4 mm backplates and lugs. Screw fix the hinges into tapped holes in the back plates.

Installation

Building in to masonry: Install galvanized rod ties attached to stiles at 600 mm maximum centres. Build in and grout up solid.

Installing in existing masonry: To: AS 1905.1, Appendix D, install bonded hairpin anchors.

Fixing to stud frames: Use galvanized brackets clipped to the frame stiles at 600 mm maximum centres and fastened to the stud frame.

Steel door frames scheduleReference: Refer to the DOOR SCHEDULE

23.9HINGED SECURITY SCREEN DOORSETSStandard

To: AS 5039

Description

Provide a proprietary system comprising a metal screen door side hung in a metal frame, and inclusive of insect screen, security screen and the necessary hardware and accessories.

Installation

To: AS 5040

23.10ALUMINIUM DOORSETSDescription

Provide a proprietary door set system comprising of aluminium framed, glazed door or doors, hung to or otherwise supported by a fixed aluminium door frame. Include the necessary door hardware and accessories.

Installation

To: AS 2047.

23.11DOOR SCHEDULERefer Door and Window Schedule


HARDWARE

24 HARDWARE



GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. WINDOWS, for window hardware schedules. DOORS, for door hardware schedules. PARTITIONS, for proprietary toilet and shower cubicle hardware. FIXED FURNITURE, for proprietary furniture hardware. FENCING, for gate hardware. NT Climate Zones Table.Standards

AS 1192: Electroplated coatings – Nickel and chromium

AS 1231: Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Anodic oxidation coatings



AS 1428.1: - General requirements for access – New building work

AS 1789: Electroplated zinc (electro galvanized) coatings on ferrous articles (batch process)

AS 1905: Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant walls

AS 1905.1: - Fire-resistant doorsets

AS 2423: Coated steel wire fencing products for terrestrial, aquatic and general use

AS 4145: Locksets and hardware for doors and windows

AS 4145.1: - Glossary of terms and rating system

AS 4145.2: - Mechanical locksets for doors and windows in buildings

AS 4145.3: - Mechanical locksets for windows in building

AS 4145.4: - Padlocks

AS/NZS 4534: Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire

AS/NZS 4680: Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles

24.2CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSManufacturer's data

Submit the manufacturer's published product data for each component, including

recommendations for installation use, care and maintenance; and


HARDWARE

the lock manufacturer's record of the key coding system showing each lock type, number and type of key supplied, key number for re-ordering, and name of supplier.

24.3MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSGeneral

Provide hardware of sufficient strength and quality to perform its function, appropriate to the intended conditions of use, suitable for use with associated hardware, and fabricated with fixed parts firmly joined.

Operation

Ensure working parts are accurately fitted to smooth close bearings, without binding or sticking, and free from rattle or excessive play, lubricated where appropriate.

Metal finishes

The following minima apply to the relevant finishes on hardware items described in generic terms (i.e. not as proprietary items):

Galvanizing: To: AS /NZS 4680.

Minimum coating class: Z275, To: AS 1397.

Coating type for wire: Type ZA, To: AS/NZS 4534.

Climatic Categories: To: AS 2423. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

Electroplating:

Zinc: To: AS 1789.

Nickel and chromium: To: AS 1192. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

Anodizing: Thickness Grade; To: AS 1231. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

24.4 INSTALLATIONGeneral

On completion; leave the hardware properly adjusted with working parts in working order.

Fixings

Use fixings of material compatible with the item being fixed, matching where exposed, and of sufficient strength, size and quality to perform their function. Provide a corrosion resistant finish to concealed fixings.

Support: Provide appropriate back support (for example lock stiles, blocking, wall noggings and backing plates) for hardware fixings.

Security: Locate exposed fixings to lock furniture on the inside faces of external doors and on the inside faces of internal doors to lockable rooms.

Window hardware

Proprietary window systems: Provide the standard hardware. Refer to WINDOW SCHEDULE.

Door hardwareTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 146RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

HARDWARE

Proprietary doorsets: Provide the standard hardware. Refer to DOOR SCHEDULE.

Mounting heights: Mount locks and latches so that the centreline of the door knob or lever spindle is 1000 mm above finished floor. To: AS 1428.1

Hinges

Timber doorsets: Install butt hinges in timber doorsets in housings equal in depth to the thickness of the hinge leaf (except for hinges designed for mounting without housing), and fix with countersunk screws.

Metal frames: Fix hinges using metal thread screws.

Door stops

Install door stops by fixing on the floor or onto the skirting. Prevent the door furniture striking the wall or other surface.

Type: 40 mm diameter rubber, screw fixed to floor.Location: Behind each door.Floor springs

Install floor springs by forming a recess in the floor slab for the floor spring box and grouting the box in place so that the cover plate is flush with the finished floor.

24.5HINGESNumber of hinges

Small door leaves: Door leaves not exceeding any of the following may have 3 hinges each:

2040 mm high.

850 mm wide.

30 kg mass.

Other door leaves:

Provide 4 hinges for all leaves between 2040 mm and 2340 mm high; over 850mm wide; over 30kg mass.

4 hinges for door leaves between 2340 mm and 3050 mm high.

Provide at least 4 hinges for all door leaves controlled by door closers.

Hinge materials

Aluminium hinges: Provide high tensile aluminium hinges, with fixed stainless steel pins in nylon bushes, and with nylon washers to each knuckle joint.

Doors fitted with closers: Use low friction bearing hinges.Wide throw

Where necessary provide wide throw hinges to achieve the required door swings in the presence of obstacles such as nibs, deep reveals and architraves.


HARDWARE

Hinge pins

For exterior or security doors opening out use fixed pin hinges or security hinges.

Hinge types

Timber doors: Loose pin stainless steel butt hinges 100 x 75 mm.

Proprietary item: Lanes 8580, or equivalent product.Aluminium swing doors: Stainless steel interfold hinges 100 x 100 mm.

Proprietary item: Doric SS DH19, or equivelant product.

Cupboard doors: Machined brass butts.

Door leaves up to 760 mm high - 2 x 64 mm.

Door leaves over 760 mm high - 3 x 75 mm.

Concealed hinges: Self closing adjustable hinges giving a door swing of 170°.

Proprietary item: Furnco Varimat - 795 T22 170°.

Cupboard handles: NilColour: N/A

24.6KEYINGKey material

Pin tumbler locks: Nickel alloy. (Do not use brass.)

Identification

Supply each key with a purpose-made plastic or metal label legibly marked to identify the key, attached to the key by a metal ring.

Keyed alike: Key alike the external locks of individual dwelling units.

Group keying

Where cylinder or pin-tumbler locks accept a group key (e.g. master key, maison key) provide to those locks a proprietary keying control security system.

Keying control security system:

Proprietary item: Refer to finishes scheduleExisting system: Obtain the details of any existing group key system to which a new system is required to be an extension.

Future extensions: Provide master group keying systems which are capable of accommodating future extensions.

Stamping: Stamp keys and lock cylinders to show the key codes.

Contractor's keys

Immediately before practical completion, replace any cylinders to which the contractor has had key access during construction with cylinders, which exclude the contractor's keys.


HARDWARE

Master key systems: Do not use any key under a master key system.

Number of keys tableCode Key type Minimum number of keysMK# Master keys 2 per code groupKD Locks keyed to differ 2 per lockKA# Locks keyed alike: 2 per lock

- 2 locks in code group 4- 3-10 locks in code group 6

Delivery

Grandmaster and master keys: Arrange for the manufacturer or supplier to deliver direct to the principal.

Windows

Where window locks are included in building key code groups, provide cylinder or pin tumbler locks so coded.

24.7LOCKS AND LATCHESStandard

To: AS 4145 and To: AS 1428.1

Strike plates

Use only the strike plates provided with the locks or latches. Do not use universal strike plates.

Bolts

Provide bolts including barrel bolts, flush bolts and tower bolts with keepers, including lock plates, staples, ferrules or floor sockets.

Window catches

Provide two catches per sash to manually latched awning or hopper sashes over 1000 mm wide.

Mortar guards

For steel door frame installations provide mortar guards designed to enable the full extension of the lock tongue or similar devices and the correct operation of the locking mechanism.

Rebated doors

For mortise locks or latches to rebated doors, provide purpose-made rebated pattern items.

Lock and Latch Schedule

Proprietary item; Generally refer Door & Door Hardware ScheduleExternal doors; Yale YK16/EXT/SS Entrance set (knob handles) including striker

plate. Wrap around lock protector plate to suit checked into stile.

Internal doors; Yale YK16/PAS/SS Passage Set, Regional preference. Yale YK/PRI/SS Privacy Set for bathroom & toilet (knob handles) stainless steel including striker plate


HARDWARE

WC and Bathroom doors; Yale YL16/PRI/SS Lever Privacy Set with 60mm backset part including striker plate

External windows; nilInternal windows; nilSecurity screen doors: Whitco Tasman Escape Black W807017 with Door Guard for grill

doors W809017. Black powdercoat

Proprietary Item: Whitco double cylinder deadlock with internal snib.

Bolts and Catches Schedule

Handles, push plates and kick plates

24.8HARDWARE FIXTURESCURTAIN ROD BRACKETS

Proprietary item: Lane 320/P 75 mm white double stayed brackets.

Location: Pelmet boards above windows at 1200 maximum centres.

HAT AND COAT HOOKS

Proprietary item: Lane 440.

Location: Bathroom and WC doors.

DOOR WEATHER SEALS

Proprietary item: Raven RP4.Location: To base of each external door.

Colour: BlackSHOWER CURTAIN RAILS

Proprietary item: Lane 532, 25 mm diameter stainless steel rail.

Location: Bathroom, above bath/shower

TOWEL RAILS

Proprietary item: Lane 364T, 19 mm diameter stainless steel.

Size and location: Shown on drawings.

GRAB RAILS

Standard; To: AS 1428.1

Type: Stainless steel grab rail.

Size and location: Shown on drawings.

TOWEL RINGS

Proprietary item: Caroma 'Bathmate'.

Location: Shown on drawings.

TOILET ROLL HOLDERSTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 150RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

HARDWARE

Proprietary item: Lane 730 SS.

Location: Adjacent to each WC.

SHAVING CABINETS

Proprietary item: Caroma 'Collega', vertical.

Location: Above vanity basins.LAUNDRY SHELF BRACKETS

Proprietary item: Lanes 'Strongline' No. 355 - 200 x 150 mm white.

Fixing: Screw fix to wall at 600 max centres.


LINING

25 LINING



GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. WOODWORK, for material and component requirements for timber generally, and for trims. INSULATION, for insulation, sarking and vapour barriers.Standards


AS 1810: Timber – Seasoned Cypress pine – Milled products

AS/NZS 2270: Plywood and blockboard for interior use

AS 2329: Mastic adhesives for fixing wallboards

AS 2334: Steel nails – Metric series

AS/NZS 2588: Gypsum plasterboard

AS/NZS 2589: Gypsum linings – Application and finishing

AS 2753: Adhesives – Mastic – For bonding gypsum plaster linings to wood and metal framing members (1985: Available withdrawn)

AS 2796: Timber – Hardwood – Sawn and milled products

AS/NZS 2908: Cellulose-cement products

AS/NZS 2908.2: - Flat sheets





AS 4785: Timber – Softwood – Sawn and milled products

AS 4785.1: - Product specifications

AS 4785.2: - Grade description


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the substrate or framing prior to installation of linings.


LINING

25.3MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSPlasterboard

To: AS/NZS 2588.

Moisture resistant plasterboard: Designated by the manufacturer for application in high humidity or wet area applications, including as a background for direct stick wall tiling.

Fire resistant plasterboard: Designated by the manufacturer for fire rated wall and ceiling applications.

Fibre cement

To: AS/NZS 2908.2.

Wall and ceiling linings: Type B, Category 2.

Coated steel

Zinc-coated: To: AS 1397; Coating Class Z200.

Fasteners

Steel nails: To: AS 2334, galvanized To: AS/NZS 4680.

Self-drilling screws: To: AS 3566.1 generally and To: AS 3566.2 for corrosion resistance. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

Adhesives

For plasterboard: To: AS 2753 – 1985 (Available Withdrawn)

For wallboards: To: AS 2329.

25.4CONSTRUCTION GENERALLYSubstrates or framing

Before fixing linings check and, if necessary, adjust the alignment of substrates or framing.

Ceiling linings

Do not install until at least 14 days after the timber roof structure is fully loaded.


Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation.

25.5PLASTERBOARD LININGFixing Generally: To: AS/NZS 2589 and in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation manuals.

Supports

Install timber battens or proprietary cold-formed galvanized steel furring channels

Where framing member spacing exceeds the recommended spacing; and


LINING

Where direct fixing of the plaster sheeting is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment of the framing or substrate.

In transverse wall applications locate noggings:

A minimum of 150 mm from the horizontal joint; or

Ensure that noggings do not protrude beyond the face of studs.

Installation

Framed construction: Screw or nail or combine with adhesive.

Masonry construction: By adhesive direct to masonry. Do not fix direct to masonry as a substrate for tiled finish.

Suspended ceilings: By screw or screw and adhesive to ceiling members.

To furring channels: By screw or screw and adhesive.

Joints

Flush joints: Use recessed edge sheets and finish flush; using perforated paper reinforcing tape.

Butt joints: Make joints over framing members or otherwise provide back blocking.

External corner joints: Make over zinc coated steel corner beads.

Dry joints: Use square edged sheet and finish with a PVC joining section.

Control joints: Install purpose-made zinc coated control joint beads at maximum 12 m centres in walls and ceilings and to coincide with structural movement joints.Wet areas: Install additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required.

Joints in tiled areas: Do not apply a topping coat after bedding perforated paper tape in bedding compound.

Plasterboard Lining ScheduleLocation: As per drawingsPlasterboard type: As per drawings Thickness Walls: As per drawings Thickness Ceilings: 10 mm.Cornice: As per drawings

Finish: Refer to the Finishes Schedule in the SCHEDULES section.

25.6 PRE-FINISHED SANDWICH PANEL LININGCeiling LiningProvide a proprietary panel system consisting of an insulated core bonded between double sided Colorbond steel linings.

Proprietary item: RETRACOM or equal approved alternative

Panel thickness: 75 mm.

Joints, corners and edges: Provide and install in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions


LINING

25.7FIBRE CEMENT LININGSupports

Install timber battens or proprietary cold-formed galvanized steel furring channels:

Where framing member spacing exceeds the recommended spacing; and

Where direct fixing of the fibre cement sheeting is not possible due to the arrangement or alignment of the framing or substrate.

Installation

Run sheets across the framing members. In flush-jointed applications, stagger end joints in a brick pattern and locate them on framing members, away from the corners of large openings. Do not fix to top and bottom plates or noggings. Provide supports under all edges and joints.

Framed construction: Screw or nail or combine with adhesive.

Masonry construction: By adhesive direct to masonry, but do not fix direct to masonry as a substrate for tiled finish.

Suspended ceilings: By screw or screw and adhesive to ceiling members. Do not fix sheets to the bottom chords of trusses.

Joints

Flush joints: Use recessed edge sheets and finish flush using perforated paper reinforcing tape.

External corner joints: Make over zinc coated steel corner beads.

Dry joints: Use square edged sheet and finish with a PVC joining section.

Control joints: Install purpose-made zinc coated control joint beads at not more than 7.2 m centres in walls and ceilings and to coincide with structural movement joints.

Wet areas: Install additional supports, flashings, trim and sealants as required.

Joints in tiled areas: Do not apply a topping coat after bedding perforated paper tape in bedding compound.

Fibre Cement Lining ScheduleLocation: As per drawings Thickness: As per drawingsProprietary Item: As per drawings Joint Finish: As per drawings Cornice: As per drawings

Finish: Refer to the Finishes Schedule in SCHEDULES section.


METALWORK

26 METALWORK




STRUCTURAL STEEL, for heavy structural steel framing.

LIGHT STEEL FRAMING, for light steel floor, wall and roof framing.

MASONRY, for lintels and arch bars.

WOODWORK, for straps.

WINDOWS, for louvres and security screens.

DOORS, for door frames and security screens.

CARPETS, for mats and mat wells.

STORMWATER, for grates and manhole covers.

WIRING AND ACCESSORIES, for ducted skirting.

FENCING, for metal fencing and gates.

NT CLIMATE ZONES TABLE

Standards

AS B194: Tapping and metallic drive screws (1970 – Available as Obsolescent)

AS HB50: Glossary of building terms

AS 1111: ISO metric hexagon bolts & screws

AS 1112: ISO metric hexagon nuts

AS/NZS 1163: Cold-formed structural steel hollow sections

AS 1192: Electroplated coatings – Nickel and chromium.


AS 1231: Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Anodic oxidation coatings

AS 1237: Plain washers for metric bolts, screws and nuts for general purposes


AS 1427: ISO metric machine screws

AS 1443: Carbon and carbon-manganese steel – Cold-finished bars

AS 1449: Wrought alloy steels – Stainless and heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip (1994 – Available Withdrawn)

AS 1450: Steel tubes for mechanical purposes


METALWORK

AS/NZS 1554: Structural steel welding.

AS/NZS 1554.1: - Welding of steel structures

AS/NZS 1595: Cold-rolled, unalloyed, steel sheet and strip

AS 1627: Metal finishing - Preparation and pretreatment of surfaces

AS 1627.4: - Abrasive blast cleaning of steel

AS 1665: Welding of aluminium structures

AS/NZS 1734: Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate

AS 1769: Welded stainless steel tubes for plumbing applications

AS 1789: Electroplated zinc (electrogalvanized) coatings on ferrous articles (batch process)

AS/NZS 1865: Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Drawn wire, rod, bar and strip

AS/NZS 1866: Aluminium & aluminium alloys – Extruded rod, bar, solid & hollow shapes

AS/NZS 1867: Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Drawn tubes

AS 1897: Electroplated coatings on threaded components (metric coarse series)

AS 2423: Coated steel wire fencing products for terrestrial, aquatic and general use.

AS/NZS 2728: Prefinished/ prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior building applications-Performance requirements

AS 2837: Wrought alloy steels – Stainless steel bars and semi-finished products (1986 – Available Withdrawn)


AS 3566.1 - General requirements and mechanical properties


AS/NZS 3679: Structural steel

AS/NZS 3679.1: - Hot-rolled bars and sections


AS/NZS 4534: Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire


WTIA TN16: Welding Stainless Steels


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of shop fabricated or assembled items prior to delivery to the site.


METALWORK

26.3MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSSteel

Tube: To: AS/NZS 1163.

Bar sections: To: AS/NZS 3679.1.

Sheet: To: AS/NZS 1595.

Steel for powder coating and electroplating

Electric resistance welded tube: To: AS 1450; Quality "bright"as defined in AS HB50.

Cold rolled bar: To: AS 1443; Quality "bright"as defined in AS HB50.

Cold rolled sheet: To: AS/NZS 1595, Designation: CA2S-E.

Coated steel

Galvanized tube: To: AS/NZS 1163.

Zinc, zinc/iron or aluminium/zinc-coated sheet: To: AS 1397.

Prepainted sheet: To: AS/NZS 2728.

Coating class for sheet: Not less than the recommendations of AS 1397, Appendix D

Stainless steel

Plate, sheet and strip: To: AS 1449. (1994 - available as withdrawn)

Bars: To: AS 2837. (1986 - Available as withdrawn)

Welded tube: To: AS 1769.

Aluminium and aluminium alloys

Bars: To: AS/NZS 1865.

Extrusions: To: AS/NZS 1866.

Drawn tube: To: AS/NZS 1867

Plate and sheets: To: AS/NZS 1734.

Fasteners

Bolts and screws: To: AS 1111.

Hexagon nuts: To: AS 1112.

Metal washers: To: AS 1237.

Machine screws: To: AS/NZS 1427.

Self-drilling screws: To AS 3566.1 generally and to AS 3566.2 for corrosion resistance. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

Tapping and metallic drive screws: To: AS B194. (1970 Available as obsolescent)


METALWORK

Electroplating: To: AS 1897.

Galvanizing: To: AS 1214.

26.4CONSTRUCTION GENERALLYMetals

Use metals so that they transmit the loads imposed and ensure the rigidity of the assembly without causing deflection or distortion of finished surfaces.

Incompatible metals: Separate using concealed layers of suitable materials in appropriate thicknesses.

Fasteners

Use fasteners so that they transmit the loads without causing galvanic corrosion.

To aluminium and aluminium alloys: Use aluminium alloy or non-magnetic stainless steel fixing devices only.

To stainless steel: Use appropriate stainless steel materials only. Passivate the threads of threaded fasteners.

Fabrication

Fabricate and pre-assemble items in the workshop wherever practicable.

Edges and surfaces: Keep clean, neat and free from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive radiusing.

Joints: Fit accurately to a fine hairline.

Tube bends: Form bends in tube without visibly deforming the cross section.

Colour finished work: Match colours of sheets, extrusions and heads of fasteners.

Thermal movement: Allow for thermal movement in joints and fastenings.

Welding

Steel welding: To: AS/NZS 1554.1.

Aluminium welding: To: AS 1665.

Site welds: Do not weld on site without approval. Wherever possible locate site welds in positions for down hand welding.

Stainless steel: Comply with the recommendations of AWRA Technical Note 16 (WTIA TN16).

26.5FINISHESFinishing

Finish visible joints made by welding, brazing or soldering using methods appropriate to the class of work (including grinding or buffing) before further treatment such as painting, galvanizing or electroplating. Ensure self-finished metals are without surface colour variations after jointing.

Preparation for coating


METALWORK

Before applying coatings to metalwork, complete cutting, drilling and other fabrication, and prepare the surface by a suitable method to AS 1627.

Preparation for thermoset powder coating

Unprotected steel: Remove rust to AS 1627.4 Class Sa 2½, clean by immersing in trichloroethylene or an alkaline solution, and apply a coat of iron phosphate.

Galvanized steel: Clean by immersing in a suitable alkaline or acidic solution, apply a zinc phosphate chemical conversion coating, rinse and degrease.

Aluminium: Pretreatment as recommended in AS 3715, Appendix G, including the application of a conversion coating.

Hot-dip Galvanizing

To: AS/NZS 4680.

Minimum coating class: Z200.

Coating type for wire: To: AS/NZS 4534, Type ZA.

Climatic Categories – AS 2423


Electroplating

Zinc: AS 1789.

Nickel and chromium: To: AS 1192.


Anodizing

To: AS 1231, Thickness Grade not less than AA15. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

Thermoset powder coating

To: AS 3715. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

26.6METALWORK ITEMS SCHEDULERefer Finishes Schedule


FIXED FURNITURE

27 FIXED FURNITURE




WOODWORK, for material and component requirements for timber generally.

HARDWARE, for joinery hardware.

METALWORK, for material and component requirements for metals generally.

Standards

AS/NZS 1859: Reconstituted wood-based panels– Specifications

AS/NZS 1859.2: - Dry-processed fibreboard

AS/NZS 1859.4: - Wet-processed fibreboard

AS/NZS 2270: Plywood and blockboard for interior use

AS/NZS 2271: Plywood and blockboard for exterior use

AS/NZS 2924: High pressure decorative laminates

27.2 INSPECTION – WITNESS POINTWitness point

Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of items fabricated off site before delivery.

27.3CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSJoint locations

Submit details of proposed locations of benchtop joints.

27.4MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSPlywood

Interior use generally: To: AS/NZS 2270.

Interior use, exposed to moisture: To: AS/NZS 2271.

Hardboard

To: AS/NZS 1859.4

Medium density fibreboard

Use fine grained uniform density resin-bonded board.

Standard: To: AS/NZS 1859.2.


FIXED FURNITURE

Moisture resistant medium density fibreboard: Designated by the manufacturer as having moisture resistance properties and branded accordingly.

Melamine overlaid medium density fibreboard: Medium density fibreboard overlaid on both sides with low pressure melamine.

Decorative laminated sheets

To: AS/NZS 2924.

27.5CONSTRUCTION GENERALLYGeneral

Build all components square and install plumb and level.

Joints: Use materials in single lengths whenever possible. If joints are necessary make them over supports.

Framing: Frame and trim where necessary for openings, including those required by other trades.

Provide openings for the following: As per drawings


Provide accessories and trim necessary to complete the installation.

Fasteners

Use fasteners to transmit the loads imposed and to ensure the rigidity of the assembly, without splitting or otherwise damaging timber or sheets.

Visibility: Do not use visible fixings except in the following locations:

Inside cupboards and drawer units.

Inside open units in which case use proprietary caps to conceal fixings.

Adhesives

Use adhesives to transmit the loads imposed and to ensure the rigidity of the assembly, without causing discolouration of finished surfaces.

Finishing

Junctions with structure: Scribe bench tops, splashbacks, ends of cupboards, kickboards and returns to follow the line of structure.

Edge strips: Finish all exposed edges of sheets with edge strips which match sheet faces.

27.6CUPBOARD, SHELF AND DRAWER UNITSLegs & FramesMaterial: HDG Steel

Thickness: 30 mm SHS & EA

Leg Height: 300 mm.

Fabrication: As part of the prefabricated frame, refer joinery drawings

Finish: HDGTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 162RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

FIXED FURNITURE

Installation: Screw to floor and secure to wall to provide level platform for carcasses.

Benchtop substrateMaterial: Marine Ply

Thickness: 18 mm.

Finish: Paint

Colour: Black.

Installation: Secure to frame at not more than 600 mm centres with screws to timber or metal framing.

Drawer and door hardwareRefer to HARDWARE As per Schedule

27.7BENCHTOPSMaterial: Stainless Steel

Benchtop thickness: 1.2mm

Finish: Grade 316

Colour: Refer to the Finishes Schedule in SCHEDULES.

Sealing underside: Laminate undersides of benchtops if

Subject to excessive moisture from equipment such as dishwashers; or Benchtop is not restrained against warping by cupboard carcass or support framing.Installation: Scribe to walls. Fix to carcass at not less than twice per 600 mm length of benchtop.

Joint sealing: Fill joint with sealant matching finish and clamp with proprietary mechanical connectors.

Splashback Ceramic Tile

27.8WARDROBESMaterialFrame: HDG Steel, 30 mm SHS & EA

Carcass: Steel FramedFinish: Stainless steel or Colorbond:Doors: Steel Framed and meshed.Finish: Polished / Colorbond

27.9LINEN AND BROOM CUPBOARDMaterialsFrame: HDG Steel, 30 mm SHS & EA

Carcass: Steel FramedFinish: Stainless steel or Colorbond:Doors: Steel Framed and meshed.Finish: Polished / Colorbond


FIXED FURNITURE

27.10SHELVESMaterial: PlywoodFinish: plastic laminate finishFixing: Screw fixed to walls at 600mm centres.

Brackets: Specified in HARDWARE


TILING

28 TILING




CONCRETE, for cementitious toppings.

SANITARY SERVICES, for shower bases.

Standards

AS CA27: Internal plastering on solid backgrounds (1959 – Available Withdrawn)

AS 1672: Limes and limestones

AS 1672.1: - Limes for building

AS 2358: Adhesives – For fixing ceramic tiles

AS 3740: Waterproofing of domestic wet areas.

AS 3958: Ceramic tiles

AS 3958.1: - Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles

AS 3958.2: - Guide to the selection of a ceramic tiling system

AS 3972: General purpose and blended cements

AS 4459: Methods of sampling and testing ceramic tiles

AS 4662: Ceramic Tiles – Definitions, classification, characteristics and marking

AS 4992: Ceramic tiles

AS 4992.1: - Grouts and adhesives – Terms, definitions and specifications for adhesives.

AS 4992.2: - Grouts and adhesives – Test methods for adhesives (ISO 13007-2:2005, MOD)

AS 4992.3: - Products for installation – Grouts: Definitions and specifications

AS 4992.4: - Products for installation – Grouts: Test methods

BS EN 64411: Ceramic tiles. Definitions, classification, characteristics and marking



Completion of waterproof membrane.

Initial or trial set out.


TILING

28.3SAMPLESGeneral

Submit labelled samples of tiles, including fittings, accessories, grout and sealants, illustrating the range of variation in colour and finish.

28.4CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSWaterproofing membranes

Submit a project report on preparation, work-in-progress and completion, including photographic record.

28.5MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSCeramic tiles

To: AS 3958.2

To: AS 4459

To: AS 4662

To: AS 4992

To BS EN 14411for tolerance limits on dimensions, surface quality, physical and chemical properties relevant to the product type.

Exposed edges

In positions where the edge is exposed use tiles which are purpose-made border tiles with the exposed edge (whether round, square or cushion) glazed to match the tile face. If such tiles are not available, mitre tiles on external corners.

Wall tiling scheduleLocation/code WT1 - Splashbacks

Tile type:- Proprietary item

Glazed ceramic tile

Glass Ceramic

- Size 200x200

- Colour Easy white

Bedding As per drawings

- Thickness As per drawings

Tile or bond pattern As per drawings

Grout: Flexible CTA Polyblend G10 anti-mould additive

- Colour #21 Misty Grey


TILING

Floor tiling scheduleLocation/code FT1 - Bathroom

Tile type:- Proprietary item

Fully vitrified ceramic tile

CerAsia International

- Size 200x200

- Colour 2Pramo – M – Mocha or

2Prabk – M - Black

Separation layer: As per drawings

- Type As per drawings

Bedding: As per drawings

- Thickness As per drawings

- Reinforcement As per drawings

Tile or bond pattern As per drawings

Grout: Flexible CTA Polyblend G10 with anti-mould additive

- Colour #24 Graphite Grey

Accessories

Provide tile accessories such as glazed round edge tiles, cove tiles, step treads and nosings to stairs, landings and thresholds, skirtings, sills, copings and tile vents over bath vents to match the surrounding tiles as to composition, colour and finish.

Coves, nosings and skirtings

Provide matching stop ends and internal and external angle tiles moulded for that purpose.

Accessories scheduleLocation Refer drawingsProprietary item Refer drawingsType Refer drawingsSize Refer drawingsColour Refer drawings

Spare tiles

Provide spare matching tiles and accessories of each type for future replacement purposes. Store the spare materials on site where directed.

Quantity: A minimum of 1% of the quantity installed.

Adhesives

To: AS 2358 and To: AS 4992


TILING

PVA based adhesives: Do not use in wet areas or externally.

Mortar

Sand: To: AS CA27 (1959, Available as withdrawn) , graded to Table 1 of the Appendix to that standard and to: AS 3958.1

Cement: To: AS 3972, Type GP.

White cement: Iron salts content not exceeding 1%.

Off-white cement: Iron salts content not exceeding 2.5%.

Lime: To: AS 1672.1

Water: To: AS 3958.1

Bedding mortar

Proportioning: Select proportions from the range 1:3 to 1:4 cement: sand to obtain satisfactory adhesion. Use minimum water.

Mixing: To: AS CA27 (1959 – Available Withdrawn).

Grout

To: AS 4992.3 and AS 4992.4

Cement based proprietary grout: Mix with water. Fine sand may be added as filler in wider joints.

Portland cement based grout: Mix with fine sand. Use minimum water consistent with workability.

Proportioning:

For narrow joints: (up to 3 mm): 1:2 cement: sand.

For wide joints: (over 3 mm): 1:3 cement: sand.

Pigments for coloured grout: Colourfast fillers compatible with the grout material. For cement-based grouts, lime-proof natural or synthetic metallic oxides compatible with cement.

28.6SUBSTRATEDrying and shrinkage

Before tiling, the following minimum times must elapse for these substrates. This is to allow for initial drying-out and shrinkage of the substrate to take place.

Concrete slabs: 42 days.

Concrete blockwork: 28 days.

Toppings on slabs and rendering on blockwork: An additional 21 days.

Preparation

Suitably prepare substrates to receive the bedded finish, including the following:

Remove deleterious and loose material and leave the surface dust-free and clean.

For mortar bedding; wet the substrate as necessary to achieve suitable suction. Alternatively apply a bonding agent to the substrate to improve adhesion.


TILING

28.7WATERPROOFING WET AREASStandard

To: AS 3740 and to the requirements of the BCA.

Shower tray

Provide a purpose-made jointless shower tray, with wall upstands at least 50 mm higher than the hob upstands. Set hob masonry on the inside of the tray hob upstands.


Material: As per drawings

Dimensions: As per drawings

Membrane

Provide a proprietary liquid applied or sheet membrane. Use suitably qualified applicators.


Extent: As per drawings

Warranty period: As per drawings

Floor wastes: Turn membrane down onto the floor-waste puddle flanges, and adhere.

Hobs: Extend membrane over the hob and into the room a minimum 50 mm. For hobless showers extend 1800 mm into the room.

External tiling: Provide a waterproof membrane under external floor tiling, to balconies and over habitable rooms, which forms a drained tank suitable for continuous immersion. Do not run under bounding walls.

Curing: Allow membrane to fully cure before tiling.

28.8TILINGSequence

Fix wall tiles before floor tiles.

Cutting and laying

Cut tiles accurately and neatly to fit around fixtures and fittings, and at margins where necessary. Drill holes without damaging tile faces. Rub edges smooth without chipping. Return tiles into sills, reveals and openings. Butt up to returns, frames, fittings, and other finishes. Strike and point up beds where exposed. Cut recesses where necessary for fittings such as soap holders.

Variations

If necessary, distribute variations in hue, colour, or pattern uniformly, by mixing tiles or tile batches before laying.

Protection

Keep traffic off floors until the bedding has set and attained its working strength.


TILING

Setting out

Set out tiles to give uniform joint widths within the following limits:

Internal ceramic tiling: Minimum 1.5 mm - maximum 3 mm.

Mosaic tiling: Nominal 2 mm or as dictated by pattern.

Quarry tiles: Minimum 6 mm - maximum 12 mm.

Vitrified floor tiles: Minimum 3 mm - maximum 5 mm.

Joint alignment: Set out tiling with joints accurately aligned in both directions and wall tiling joints level and plumb, to a tolerance of ± 4 mm in 2 m from the design alignment.

Margins: Use whole or purpose made tiles at margins where practicable, otherwise set out to give equal margins of cut tiles. If margins less than half tile width are unavoidable, locate the cut tiles where they are least conspicuous.

Fixtures: If possible, position tiles so that holes for fixtures and other penetrations occur at the intersection of horizontal and vertical joints or on the centre lines of tiles. Continue tiling fully behind fixtures - such as WC pedestals, cisterns, basins and urinals - which are not built in to the tiling surface.

Falls and levels

Grade floor tiling to even and correct falls (minimum of 1:100; 1:60 in shower areas) to floor wastes and elsewhere as required. Make level junctions with walls. Where falls are not required lay level.

Deviation: Maximum deviation of the finished floor level between points of contact under a 2 m straight edge laid in any direction on an area of uniform grade to be 1:300 or 3 mm, whichever is the lesser.

Change of finish: Maintain finished floor level across changes of floor finish including carpet.

Preparation of tiles

Adhesive bedding: Fix tiles dry; do not soak.

Mortar bedding: Soak porous tiles in water for half an hour and then drain until the surface water has disappeared.

Bedding

Use bedding methods and materials which are appropriate to the tile, the substrate, the conditions of service, and such as to leave the tile firmly and solidly bedded in the bedding material and adhered to the substrate. Falls must be formed integral with the substrate.

Thin bed: Minimum thickness 1.5 mm, maximum 3 mm. May be used when the substrate deviation does not exceed 3 mm when tested with a 2 m straight edge. Cover the entire tile back with adhesive when the tile is bedded.

28.9JOINTS AND ACCESSORIESMovement joints

Provide movement joints

Over structural (isolation, contraction, expansion) joints;


TILING

At junctions between different substrates; and

To divide large tiled areas into bays, maximum 5 m wide, maximum 16 m².

Depth of joint: Completely through the tile and bed to the substrate.

Sealant width: A minimum of 6 mm. Not more than 12 mm.

Sealant depth: A minimum of 6 mm (12 mm preferred). Not less than half the joint width. Not more than the joint width.

Pre-formed strip: A proprietary expansion joint consisting of a neoprene filler sandwiched between plates with lugs or ribs for mechanical keying. Set flush with the finished surface.

Sealant: Trafficable two-pack self-levelling mould resistant, one-part silicone or polyurethane sealant applied over a closed cell polyethylene foam backing rod with a bond-breaking surface. Finish flush with the tile surface.

Movement joints scheduleLocation As per drawingsProprietary itemJoint side-plate materialJoint fixingSealant:- type- colour- width

Grouting

Commence grouting as soon as practicable after bedding has set. Clean out joints as necessary before grouting.

Face grouting: Fill the joints solid and tool flush. Clean off surplus grout. Wash down when the grout has set. When grout is dry, polish the surface with a clean cloth.

Edges of tiles: Grout exposed edge joints.

Caulked joints

Provide caulked joints filled with sealant and finished flush with the tile surface as follows:

Where tiling is to be cut around sanitary fixtures.

Around fixtures interrupting the tile surface, for example pipes, brackets, bolts and nibs.

At junctions with elements such as window and door frames and built-in cupboards.

At internal corners.

Width: 5 mm.

Depth: Equal to the tile thickness.

Floor finish dividers


TILING

Finish tiled floors at junctions with differing floor finishes with a non-corrosive metal dividing strip securely fixed to the substrate, with top edge flush with the finished floor. Where changes of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below the closed door except for fire doors where the junction must be to one side of the door.

Material: Brass angle screw fixed to the substrate at 250 mm crs.


RESILIENT FINISHES

29 RESILIENT FINISHES

29.1GENERALCross reference

Refer to the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS section.

Concrete for additives and admixtures and their compatibility with adhesions.

Standards

AS/NZS 1859: Reconstituted wood-based panels - Specifications

AS/NZS 1859.4: - Wet-processed fibreboard

AS 1884: Floor coverings – Resilient sheet and tiles – Laying and maintenance practices

AS 1889: PVC floor tiles

AS 1889.1: - Semi-rigid (1984 – Available Withdrawn)

AS 1889.2: - Flexibile (1985 – Available Withdrawn)

AS 2055: Flexible PVC floor - covering

AS 2055.1: - PVC sheet floor – Covering – Unbacked, flexible

AS 2834: Computer accommodation

AS/NZS 2908: Cellulose-cement products

AS/NZS 2908.2: - Flat sheets

AS 3553: Adhesive for floor and wall applications – Resilient vinyl, linoleum and rubber sheet and tiles – Interior and exterior use

AS 4155: Test methods for general access floors

AS 4155.6: - Test for floor resistance for electrostatic control

AS/NZS 4586: Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials

AS/NZS 4663: Slip resistance measurement of existing pedestrian surfaces

BS 1711: Specification for solid rubber flooring

BS EN 548: Resilient floor coverings. Specification for plain and decorative linoleum (Withdrawn)

BS EN 650: Resilient floor coverings. Polyvinyl chloride floor coverings on jute backing or on polyester felt backing or on polyester felt with polyvinyl chloride backing. Specification

BS EN 651: Resilient floor coverings. Polyvinyl chloride floor coverings with foam layer. Specification

BS EN 688: Resilient floor coverings. Specification for cork linoleum

BS EN 1817: Resilient floor coverings. Specification for homogeneous and heterogeneous smooth rubber floor coverings


RESILIENT FINISHES

BS EN 12104: Resilient floor coverings. Cork floor tiles. Specification

BS EN 12199: Resilient floor coverings. Specifications for homogenous and heterogeneous relief rubber floor coverings


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the completion of laying underlay, if any.

29.3CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSManufacturer's data

Submit manufacturer's published product data for each type of finish, including recommendations for its application in the project; and use, care and maintenance requirements in the form of a maintenance manual.

29.4MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSIdentification

Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed containers legibly marked with the manufacturer's identification, product brand name, product type, dimensions, quantity, product reference code and batch number, and handling, storage and installation instructions.

Edges of sheets and tiles

Ensure edges are firm, unchipped, machine-cut accurately to size, and square to the face with tile edges square to each other.

Underlay

Hardboard: To: AS/NZS 1859.4, General purpose, Type M hardboard, manufactured specifically as flooring underlay.

Fibre cement sheet: To: AS/NZS 2908.2, Type B, Category 2 minimum.

Cork and linoleum

To: BS EN 12104 (cork tiles); BS EN 548 (linoleum); BS EN 688 (cork linoleum).

Rubber

To: BS 1711.

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)

Unbacked flexible sheet: To: AS 2055.1.

Semi-rigid floor tiles: To: AS 1889.1. (1984, Available withdrawn)

Flexible floor tiles: To: AS 1889.2. (1985, Available withdrawn)

Cushion backed sheet vinyl

To: BS EN 651


RESILIENT FINISHES

Flexible PVC sheet with an open-cell PVC foam and PVC stabilizing backing.

Slip resistance

Type test: To: AS/NZS 4586.

Site test: To: AS/NZS 4663.

Static control

To: AS 2834

To: AS 4155.6

Vinyl bench topping

Fully flexible homogeneous sheet finished with a laminated surface film.

Spare materials

Provide spare matching covering materials and accessories of each type for future replacement purposes. Store the spare materials on site where directed.

Quantity: A minimum of 1% of the quantity installed.

Adhesives

To: AS 3553 and as recommended by the flooring manufacturer, compatible with the background and suitable for use in areas of high humidity.

Ventilation

When using adhesives provide adequate ventilation and take the necessary fire precautions.

Sheet and tile scheduleLocation/code RF1 RF2 RF3Proprietary item As per DrawingsTypeFormColourPatternSheet widthThicknessVinyl chip sizeSurfaceSlip ResistanceTile dimensionsOther characteristicsUnderlaySlip ResistanceOther


RESILIENT FINISHES

29.5SUBSTRATESubstrate preparation

Suitably prepare the substrate to receive the installation, including the following:

Repairs: Make good to the surface finish as necessary. Fill depressions with a suitable filler, and remove high spots and projections. If necessary lay a steel-trowelled underlay to concrete substrates.

Fixtures and fittings: Remove door stops and other fixtures, and refix in position undamaged on completion of the installation.

Concrete substrates: Test concrete substrates for dryness by the hygrometer test method described in AS 1884 Appendix A. If necessary provide artificial means for drying out the substrate before installation.

Timber, plywood and particleboard substrates: Allow the substrate to achieve equilibrium moisture content before commencing the installation.

29.6FLOOR LAYINGCleaning and protection

Keep traffic off floors until bonding has set or for 24 hours after laying, whichever period is the longer. Do not allow water in contact with the finish for seven days after the completion of laying.

On completion: Buff and polish.

Sheet set out

Set out sheets to give the minimum number of joints. Run sheet joints parallel with the long sides of floor areas, vertically on walls.

Tile set out

Set out tiles from the centre of the area. Wherever possible; cut tiles at margins only, to give a cut dimension of a minimum 100 mm x full tile width. Match edges, and align patterns. Arrange the material so that variation in appearance is minimized.

Joints

Butt edges together to form tight neat joints showing no visible open seam.

Junctions

Scribe neatly up to returns, edges, fixtures and fittings. Finish flush with adjoining surfaces.

Levels

Maximum deviation of the finished floor level, between points of contact under a 2 m straight edge laid in any direction on an area of uniform grade to be 1:300 or 3 mm, whichever is the lesser.

Change of finish

Maintain finished floor level across changes of floor finish including carpet.


RESILIENT FINISHES

29.7VINYL SHEETINGWelded joints

Heat welding: After fixing, groove the seams with a grooving tool and weld the joints with matching filler rod and hot air welding gun. When the weld bead has cooled, trim off flush.

Cold welding: Apply seaming compound 100 mm wide to the substrate centrally under the seam. Roll the seam until the compound is forced up into the joint. Clean off flush with a damp cloth.

Epoxy jointing: Join seams with epoxy adhesive.

Finishing

Finish in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

29.8JOINTS AND ACCESSORIESJunctions

Finish junctions flush with adjoining surfaces. If changes of floor finish occur at doorways make the junction directly below the closed door except for fire doors where the junction must be one side of the door.

Accessories

If available; use purpose-made matching moulded accessories for nosings, coves, skirtings, edge cover strips and finishes at junctions, margins, and angles. Otherwise form the item from the sheet material. Provide solid backing for radiused coves and nosings.

Type: As per drawings

Location: As per drawings

Cover strips

Provide edge cover strips at junctions with different floor finishes and as protection strips to exposed edges.

Type: Feather edge PVC strip.

Movement joints

Provide movement joints

- Over structural (isolation, contraction, expansion) joints; and

- At junctions between different substrates.

Depth of joint: Completely through to the substrate.

Sealant width: A minimum of 6 mm. A maximum of 25 mm.

Sealant depth: Not less than 6 mm (12 mm preferred). Not less than half the joint width. Not more than the joint width.

Pre-formed strip: A proprietary expansion joint consisting of a neoprene filler sandwiched between plates with lugs or ribs for mechanical keying. Set flush with the finished surface.


RESILIENT FINISHES

Sealant: Trafficable two-pack self-levelling polysulphide or polyurethane sealant applied over a closed cell polyethylene foam backing rod with a bond-breaking surface. Finish flush with the resilient finish surface.

Vinyl skirting

Moulded skirting: Moulded PVC feather edge skirting section.

Fixing: Scribe as necessary. Mitre corners. Fix to walls with contact adhesive complying To: AS 3553.

Height: 100 mm.



PAINTING

30 PAINTING




STRUCTURAL STEEL, for application of the initial protective coating to structural steel and restoration of damaged shop coats.


Interpretation

In those parts of AS/NZS 2311 and AS/NZS 2312 which are referenced in this section, treat the advisory recommendations as minimum contractual requirements.

Australian Paint Approvals Scheme

For paint types identified by an Australian Paint Approvals Scheme (APAS) specification number, conform to the specification represented by that number.

Standards

AS/NZS 2311: Guide to the painting of buildings

AS/NZS 2312: Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by use of protective coatings


AS/NZS 3750: Paints for steel structures

AS/NZS 3750.9: - Organic zinc-rich primer

AS 4506: Metal finishing – Thermoset powder coatings

APAS 0155: Thermosetting Powder Coatings

APAS 0155/2: Exterior grade thermosetting powder coating

APAS 2916: Organic zinc rich coating for protection of steel

30.2SAMPLESCoated samples

Submit, on representative substrates, 1 m2 samples of each coating system showing colour, gloss level, texture, and physical properties.

Refer to colour scheme as chosen by resident


PAINTING

30.3MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSPremium Paints

Use only premium paints from approved manufacturers.

Paint Manufacturer

Prior to placing orders provide a list showing the brand of the paint proposed for use and the trade names of the paint types referred to by generic type and APAS specification number in the painting schedule.

Combinations

Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.

Clear timber finish systems: Use only the combinations of putty, stain and sealer recommended by the manufacturer of the top coats.

Delivery

Deliver paints to the site in the manufacturer's labelled containers. Ensure containers of materials identified by an APAS specification number are labelled accordingly.

Thinners

Use only the type and quantity recommended by the manufacturer.

Tinting

Use only products which are colour tinted by the manufacturer or supplier.

Putty

Oil based or polymeric based.

Putty for timber finishes: Lacquer or water based, or 2K inert putty. Do not use oil based or glazing putty.

Toxic ingredients

Comply with the requirements of the Northern Territory Poisons and Dangerous Drugs Regulations – 2010 and to the Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons (SUSDP), Appendix 1 Uniform Paint Standard.


Give sufficient notice so that each of the following stages may be inspected:

Substrate immediately prior to commencement of painting.

Prior to application of final coat.

30.5PAINTING – HOLD POINTStandards


PAINTING

To: AS/NZS 2311

To: AS/NZS 2312

Surface preparation

Unpainted surfaces: To: AS/NZS 2311, Section 3.

Previously painted surfaces: To: AS/NZS 2311, Sections 7, 8 and 10. This includes cleaning down with Sugar Soap, treatment of mould growth, rubbing back existing painted surfaces with abrasive paper and patching and priming of damaged areas.

Application

Keep copies of manufacturers’ product datasheets and application specifications on site. Handle and apply the protective coatings strictly in accordance with them.

Keep copies of products Materials Safety Data Sheets, for all products used, on site at all times, during application and drying or curing of the products. Safety precautions in MSDS to be followed.

Order of work

Complete clear timber finishes before commencing opaque paint finishes in the same area.

Protection

Remove door furniture, switch plates, light fittings and other fixtures before starting to paint, and refix in position undamaged on completion of the installation. Protect adjacent finished surfaces liable to damage from painting operations.

Wet Paint warning

Place “Wet Paint” warning notices close to areas of wet paint so that they are conspicuous and easily read. Do not remove them until the paint is dry.

Restoration

Clean off marks, paint spots and stains progressively and restore damaged surfaces to their original condition. Touch up damaged decorative paintwork or misses only with the paint batch used in the original application.

Substrate preparation

Use filler tinted to match the substrate if the finish is transparent.

Do not apply filler directly to structural steelwork surfaces.

Paint application

Apply the paint immediately after its substrate has been prepared, and before contamination of the substrate can occur. Ensure each coat of paint or clear finish is uniform in colour, gloss, thickness and texture, and free of runs, sags, blisters, or other discontinuities.

Spraying

Hold point - Obtain prior approval for spray painting.

Clear finishes: Do not use airless spray for clear finishes.


PAINTING


PAINTING

Priming before fixing

Apply one coat of wood primer (two coats to end grain) to the back of external fascia boards, timber door and window frames, bottoms of external doors, associated trims and glazing beads before fixing in position.

Repair of galvanizing

Where galvanized surfaces have been subsequently welded, prime the affected area with a organic zinc rich coating.

To: APAS 2916.

To: AS/NZS 3750.9, Type 2.

Paint system description

If a paint or clear finish system is referred to only by its final coat (for example by the manufacturer's brand name, or the generic name) use in addition to the final coat, the appropriate stains, primers, sealers and undercoats, suitable for the substrate and compatible with the finish coat and each other.

No system description given: If a surface is to be painted but no system is nominated select the system from AS/NZS 2311, Section 5, using System 1 for exterior applications or first option for interior application where a choice is offered.

Number of coats

Unless specified as one coat or two coat systems, each paint system consists of not less than three coats. Provide additional coats if necessary to

prepare porous or reactive substrates with prime or seal coats consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations;

achieve the total film thickness or texture; or

achieve a satisfactory opacity.

Tinting

Tint each coat of an opaque coating system so that each has a noticeably different tint from the preceding coat, except for top coats in systems with more than one top coat.

Colour selectionRefer to the Finishes Schedule in SCHEDULES.

30.6POWDER COATINGStandards

Aluminium surfaces: To: AS 3715.

Steel or zinc coated surfaces: To: AS 4506

Preparation and pre-treatment: To: AS 4506, Appendix I and To: AS 3715, Appendix G

Epoxy powder coating To: APAS 0155

External use; Polyester powder coating: To: APAS 0155/2


PAINTING

Service conditions

Atmospheric Classifications: To: AS 3715


Finish; Full gloss


30.7PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULEThis schedule specifies, for each of the paint types and application locations listed in it, and for each substrate to which those paint types are applied in this project.

The number and order of coats; and

The paint code for each coat. Codes are APAS Specification codes unless otherwise stated.

The first coat referred to in these tables is the coat applied to the stated substrate. As indicated, the substrate may actually be another paint coating, for example, the initial protective coating applied to structural steelwork.

Preparatory Coats: The codes and names of the preparatory coats for general applications are:

0134 Exterior Latex primer for galvanized steel and zincalume (buildings)

0016/1 Solvent borne undercoat for exterior and interior use (buildings)

0171 Solvent borne sealer for concrete and masonry (buildings)

0172 Interior Latex Sealer (buildings)

0181 Solvent borne wood primer (buildings)

0183 Latex wood primer (buildings)

The preparatory coats for steel are to be durable catalysed epoxy primer for protection of steel in atmosphere. Their codes and names are:

0032 Metal primer - lead & chromate free (Buildings)

0035/1 Two pack etch primer

0035/2 One pack etch primer, chromate free


PAINTING

Paint Systems ScheduleFlat latex: InteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Cement render/Masonry/Fibre cement products/Plasterboard/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal

0172 0260/4 0260/4

Set plaster/Fibrous plaster/Glass reinforced gypsum plaster

0172 0260/4 0260/4

Iron and steel 0032 0260/4 0260/4Aluminium 0035/2 0260/4 0260/4Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel 0134 0260/4 0260/4Timber/Hardboard, un-primed 0183 0260/4 0260/4Existing paintwork (solvent-borne)/ Existing paintwork (latex)/ Oil-based air-drying primed metal/ Pre-primed board

0183 if required

0260/4 0260/4

Low gloss latex: InteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/ Cement render/ Masonry/ Sprayed ceiling/ Fibre cement products/ Plasterboard/ Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal

0172 0260/3 0260/3


0172 0260/3 0260/3

Iron and steel 0032 0260/3 0260/3Aluminium 0035/2 0260/3 0260/3Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel 0134 0260/3 0260/3Timber/Hardboard, un-primed 0183 0260/3 0260/3Existing paintwork (solvent-borne)/Existing paintwork (latex)/Oil-based air-drying primed metal/Pre-primed board

0183 if required

0260/3 0260/3

Flat or low gloss latex: ExteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Cement render/Masonry/Fibre cement products/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal/Oil-based air-drying primed metal/Cat. epoxy zinc phosphate primed metal/Existing paintwork (solvent-borne)/Existing paintwork (latex)

0280/3 0280/3

UPVC 0016/1 0280/3 0280/3Iron and steel 0032 0280/3 0280/3Aluminium 0035/1 0280/3 0280/3Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel 0134 0280/3 0280/3Timber/Exterior grade hardboard 0183 0280/3 0280/3


PAINTING

Semi-gloss latex: InteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Cement render/Masonry/Sprayed ceiling/Fibre cement products/ Plasterboard/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal

0172 0260/2 0260/2


0172 0260/2 0260/2

Iron and steel 0032 0260/2 0260/2Aluminium 0035/2 0260/2 0260/2Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel 0134 0260/2 0260/2Timber/Hardboard, un-primed 0183 0260/2 0260/2Medium Density Fibreboard 0183 0260/2 0260/2Existing paintwork (solvent-borne)/Existing paintwork (latex)/Oil-based air-drying primed metal/Pre-primed board

0183 if required

0260/2 0260/2

Semi-gloss latex: ExteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Cement render/Masonry/Fibre cement products/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal/ Oil-based air-drying primed metal/Cat. epoxy zinc phosphate primed metal/Existing paintwork (solvent-borne)/Existing paintwork (latex)

0280/2 0280/2

UPVC 0016/1 0280/2 0280/2Iron and steel 0032 0280/2 0280/2Aluminium 0035/1 0280/2 0280/2Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel 0134 0280/2 0280/2Timber/Exterior grade hardboard 0183 0280/2 0280/2


PAINTING

Gloss latex: InteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Cement render/Masonry/Sprayed ceiling/Fibre cement products/ Plasterboard/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal

0172 0260/1 0260/1


0172 0260/1 0260/1

Iron and steel 0032 0260/1 0260/1Aluminium 0035/2 0260/1 0260/1Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel 0134 0260/1 0260/1Timber/Hardboard, un-primed 0183 0260/1 0260/1Medium Density Fibreboard 0183 0260/1 0260/1Existing paintwork (solvent-borne)/Existing paintwork (latex)/Oil-based air-drying primed metal/Pre-primed board

0183 if required

0260/1 0260/1

Gloss latex: ExteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Cement render/Masonry/Fibre cement products/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal/ Oil-based air-drying primed metal/Cat. epoxy zinc phosphate primed metal/Existing paintwork (latex)/Existing paintwork (solvent-borne)

0280/1 0280/1

UPVC 0280/1 0280/1Iron and steel 0032 0280/1 0280/1Aluminium 0035/1 0280/1 0280/1Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel 0134 0280/1 0280/1Timber/Exterior grade hardboard 0183 0280/1 0280/1


PAINTING

Semi-gloss, solvent-borne: InteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Cement render/Masonry/Sprayed ceiling/Fibre cement products/Set plaster/Fibrous plaster/Glass reinforced gypsum plaster

0171 0015/3 0015/3

Plasterboard (paper faced) 0172 0015/3 0015/3Iron and steel 0032 0015/3 0015/3Aluminium 0035/2 0015/3 0015/3Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal

0134 0015/3 0015/3

Timber/Hardboard, un-primed/Pre-primed board/ Oil-based air-drying primed metal

0016/1 0015/3 0015/3

Medium Density Fibreboard 0183 0015/3 0015/3

Existing paintwork 0016/1 0015/3 0015/3

Full gloss, solvent-borne: InteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Cement render/Masonry/Sprayed ceiling/Fibre cement products/Set plaster/Fibrous plaster/Glass reinforced gypsum plaster

0171 0015/1 0015/1

Plasterboard (paper faced) 0172 0015/1 0015/1Iron and steel 0032 0015/1 0015/1Aluminium 0035/1 0015/1 0015/1Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal

0134 0015/1 0015/1

Timber/Hardboard, un-primed/Pre-primed board/ Oil-based air-drying primed metal

0016/1 0015/1 0015/1

Medium Density Fibreboard 0183 0015/1 0015/1Existing paintwork 0016/1 0015/1 0015/1

Full gloss, solvent-borne: ExteriorSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatIron and steel 0032 0015/1 0015/1Aluminium 0035/1 0015/1 0015/1Zinc-coated and zinc-alloy-coated steel/Organic or inorganic zinc primed metal

0134 0015/1 0015/1

Timber 0181 015/1 0015/1UPVC/Cat. epoxy zinc phosphate primed metal 0015/1 0015/1Oil-based air-drying primed metal/Existing paintwork/Pre-primed exterior grade board

0016/1 0015/1 0015/1


PAINTING

Paving paint - semi-glossSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd CoatConcrete/Clay brick/Fibre cement products 0200/1 0200/1Timber/Cork 0200/1 0200/1Existing paintwork 0200/1

Clear Water Repellent for Masonry - OvercoatableSubstrate 1st Coat 2nd CoatMasonry 0116/2 0116/2


MISCELLANEOUS FIXTURES

31 MISCELLANEOUS FIXTURES




GLAZING, for mirrors.

METALWORK, for metals and finishes.

FIXED FURNITURE, for cupboard and shelf units and bench tops.

WATER, for hose reels.

Standards

AS/NZS 1841: Portable fire extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.1: - General requirements

AS/NZS 1841.2: - Specific requirements for Water type extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.3: - Specific requirements for Wet chemical type extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.4: - Specific requirements for Foam type extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.5: - Specific requirements for Powder type extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.6: - Specific requirements for Carbon dioxide type extinguishers

AS/NZS 3000: Electrical installations – (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring Rules)

AS/NZS 3084: Telecommunications installations – Telecommunications pathways and spaces for commercial buildings

AS/NZS 3504: Fire blankets

31.2CLOTHES HOISTSProvide a clothes hoist in the position shown on the drawings.

Type: Refer drawings

Proprietary item: Custom – refer drawings

31.3LETTER-BOXESProvide a letter box in the position shown on the drawings.

Proprietary item Refer drawings

Mounting Refer drawings


SANITARY SERVICES

32 SANITARY SERVICES




GROUNDWORKS, for trench excavation bedding and backfilling.

STORMWATER, for stormwater and subsoil drains.

Standards

AS 1172: Water Closets (WC)

AS 1172.1: - Pans

AS 1172.2: - Cisterns



AS/NZS 1229: Laundry troughs and tubs

AS 1371: Toilet seats of moulded plastics

AS/NZS 1546: On site domestic waste water treatment units

AS/NZS 1546.1: - Septic tanks

AS/NZS 1547: Onsite domestic wastewater management

AS/NZS 1730: Washbasins

AS 1756: Household sinks

AS/NZS 2023: Baths for ablutionary purposes

AS 2439: Perforated plastics drainage and effluent pipe and fittings

AS 2439.2: - Perforated effluent pipe and associated fittings for sewerage applications

AS/NZS 3500: Plumbing and Drainage

AS 3588: Shower bases and shower modules

AS 3996: Access covers and grates

AS 4072: Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant separating elements

AS 4072.1: - Service penetrations and control joints

National Construction Code (NCC) Volume 3: The Plumbing Code of Australia

BCA: Building Code of Australia


SANITARY SERVICES

NT Building Regulations

Department of Infrastructure, Planning and Logistics Standard Specification for small building worksPower and Water Corporation Remote Operations Design and Construction Guidelines

32.2SCOPEThe work covered by this section of the specification includes the following:

General Requirements

The work covered by this specification includes the following:

The provision of a Hydraulic Services installation that satisfies all statutory legislative and code requirements and satisfies the general details herein.

The planning, scheduling, procurement of components and installation to meet the programme, coordination and liaison with the head contractor and other trade packages.

Full responsibility for the execution of the complete installation in accordance with the specification and drawings.

The installation, testing, commissioning, maintenance, service and warranty and all sundry and material items, whether mentioned in detail or not, required to complete the installation and place into working order.

Compliance with all relevant Work Health and Safety legislation and best practice including any site specific requirements or regulations such as attendance at site inductions and adherence to the procedures covered in such inductions.

Full responsibility for the execution of the complete installation in accordance with the specification and drawings, and related authority requirements. Provide all manufactured items, materials, labour, cartage, tools, plant, appliances, and fixings necessary for the proper execution of the works, together with all minor and incidental works.

Final co-ordination, manufacture, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and subsequent maintenance service and warranty for the stipulated period, of the work specified herein and shown on the accompanying drawings.

The whole of the works shall comply with all relevant Regulations and to all Local Authority requirements. The cost of any materials or equipment required to meet such regulations and requirements shall be included in the Tender whether specifically shown or described in the documents or not.

Out of hours works as necessary to meet construction program – refer also clauses Working Times and with the permission of the Superintendent.

32.3 INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIREMENTSLocate and connect into sewer points provided under PWC works.

All above works to include all associated applications to authorities and payment of fees.

Note - Temporarily maintain sewer connections for connection to Builder’s Amenities, with final scope of works to be resolved with Main Contractor. Liaise with PWC Remote for access to these services.

Note- Contractor shall bear full reasonability for verified and establishing sewer connection location and depth prior to commencement of any works. Abortive work caused due to failure to verify the above shall be at the cost of the plumbing contractor.


SANITARY SERVICES

Note – Contractor shall confirm locations of new services with utilities personal prior to commencement of works and pay all associated fees.

32.4 BUILDING SERVICES REQUIREMENTSWaste Drainage System

External sewer drainage system extending from provided lot connection sewer points in accordance with AS/NZS 3500.2.

Internal sanitary drainage and vent system in accordance with AS/NZS 3500.2.

Identification Labels to pipework, Tags to equipment and valves and in ground detectable identification tape to sanitary drainage systems.

Provision of an overflow relief gully set at 100mm below FFL. The grate to the overflow relief gully is to be screwed in place. Refer to NT building Regulations.

Provision of disconnector traps complete with screwed down grates.

Provision of a head vent to roof level complete with bird and mosquito proof cowls.

General Requirements

Provision and installation of metal trimmers in walls for securing of fixtures and water pipework connection points.

Trenching and backfilling associated with service connections to the site. All compaction shall be strictly in accordance with the requirements of Local Council. Apply for permits and pay all necessary fees for temporary road and/or footpath closure where applicable.

Set-out or cause set-out of all plumbing penetrations in coordination with the Architectural drawings and project plumbing fixture specification, including the installation of all necessary sleeves. The plumber shall be responsible for this set-out and any rectification works necessary by incorrect set-out.

Provision of roof over and under flashing to all pipe penetrations through roof where applicable, under flashing to be provided by roofing contractor. Roof penetration flashings are to be installed to AS3500.2 and match roof sheeting colour.

Allow for trenching and backfilling necessary to complete the work. Upon completion of backfilling, the work area and its surrounds shall be left tidy and level, and all surplus soil removed from site and disposed of by the plumber and at the plumber’s entire cost.

All rubbish is to be disposed of in the designated waste disposal area as directed on site. All rubbish is to be disposed of in this manner the same day that it is generated.

Apply for all necessary approvals to perform the described works and pay all relevant and required fees.

Provision of puddle flange to all pipework risers penetrating wet areas where applicable.

Provision of tapset and outlet fluid aprons to all pipework and fittings penetrating through wet area wall surfaces where applicable.

Provide compaction testing of service trenches as per the project superintendent’s approval. Provide testing certificates (ITP) as part of handover documents.

Provide traffic control/management to works required. (where applicable)

Temporary service connections to site amenities. Refer to Builder’s scope of works in relation to temporary connections required during the construction period.

Maintenance and Defects Liability Period of 12 months.


SANITARY SERVICES

On completion of works, provide a complete maintenance manual inclusive of all material, plumbing fixtures, tapware, as-constructed drawings and inspection test documents.

Substitutions Where a substitution to the specification is proposed, the contractor shall submit each substitution, incorporating technical details and a cost breakdown, to the head contractor. The substitution shall be reviewed by the consulting engineer and the client for consideration. Unless approved by the consulting engineer and the client, the substitution will not be acceptable as an equal or approved approach to the specification.


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of work ready for testing.

32.6TESTS – HOLD POINTHydrostatic tests

Hold Point - Fill the piping with water and test at the required pressure and duration. Obtain the Superintendent's approval of the test results.

UPVC piping

Cure solvent cement joints for at least 24 hours before testing.

32.7CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSWork-as-executed drawings

Submit drawings showing the "as installed" locations of pipes, fittings, pits, inspection openings, fixtures and equipment. Show the depth of underground piping.

32.8CONNECTIONConnection

Liaise and coordinate with Lot Connection design and installation and provide final connection.Carry out the excavation necessary to locate and expose the connection point. On completion reinstate surfaces and elements which have been disturbed such as roads, pavements, kerbs, footpaths and nature strips.

32.9WORKMANSHIPGeneralThis section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with all other sections of this specification and the drawings.Workmanship shall be of a high standard and each section of the work shall be properly and neatly executed to the best trade practice.Untidy work whether exposed to view or concealed will not be accepted and rectified at nil cost. Quality AssuranceImplement a Quality Assurance System for the works in accordance with the following Australian Standards: AS 3900 AS 3901


SANITARY SERVICES

The Quality Assurance System shall cover the following minimum aspects: Detailed plan setting out supervision, quality control and checking (witness point)

procedures.Details of the Plumbing Contractor’s Quality Assurance Plan shall be submitted to the Consulting Engineer upon request.Existing Site ConditionsThe Plumbing Contractor shall check with all relevant authorities as to possible locations of any underground services in adjacent footpaths and locate same before commencing excavation.The Plumbing Contractor shall determine the location of all existing services on site before commencement of demolition. The Plumbing Contractor shall allow terminating redundant services as necessary to allow demolition to commence.The contractor shall verify the depths of existing sewer connection on site prior to commencement of drainage works on site.The Contractor shall employ a pipe location service contractor to detect all existing services below the ground.The Contractor shall also carry out their own investigations of the existing services reticulation to verify the details indicated on the tender drawings.The contractor shall visit the site to familiarize himself with the extent of work involved in this contract. No extras shall be considered arising from neglect of this provision.Any loss or damage arising from negligence in not carrying out the above requirements shall be made good in a manner acceptable to the proprietor and no claim shall be made for costs incurred due to this negligence. The Contractor shall allow sealing off all existing services that may become redundant during the progress of the works. All such services shall be sealed off at the connection to the associated supply main, and removed where practicable.The Contractor shall allow for satisfactory supervision on site to prevent any damage to new or existing (still in use) plumbing services as a result of the contract works. WarrantiesWarranties shall extend for a minimum of twelve (12) months.

All equipment and workmanship is to be provided with a warranty.

Warranty is to commence at date of practical completion handover acceptance, not the date of installation.

Installation CoordinationCheck on site at regular intervals the building working dimensions, tolerances and the setting out of the associated works. Immediately report any discrepancy.

GeneralThe positions of equipment shown on Drawings accompanying the Specification are for Tender purposes and are diagrammatic only. Check on site for positions and obtain approval and verification of all locations with the Principal prior to installation.

When any relocating is required to conform to the above, undertake such relocation without additional costs to the Principal. Allow relocation of accessories and equipment a distance of three metres (3m) without variation to the contract.

Verify locations of all equipment, including controls to ensure:-

Co-ordination with final layouts; Co-ordination with other trades construction workshop drawings;


SANITARY SERVICES

The work of any other trade does not interfere with the hydraulic installation; Equipment is not obstructed by door swings and tracks, furniture or equipment; Full compliance with relevant Authorities and Australian Standards.

Discrepancies Promptly report any discrepancies, for consideration and instructions. Work proceeding without obtaining approval, and subsequently rejected by the Consulting Engineer shall be made good at nil additional expense to the Principal.Co-ordinationEnsure all equipment has been coordinated with all other trades and reviewed by the consulting engineer and architect before placing orders and before commencement of the relevant trade construction workshop drawings.

32.10INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSThe following clauses set out the general requirements for the works. These requirements are not intended to cover all aspects of the installation and must be read in conjunction with the Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, other sections of the Specification and the drawings.Working Dimensions and TolerancesCheck on site at regular intervals the building working dimensions, tolerances and the setting out of the associated works. Immediately report any discrepancy.

32.10.1 Core Holes and Penetrations Set OutSet out and provide all sleeving and/or core holes as required for the passage of pipes and/or conduits throughout the structure. NOTE: Coring and cutting of concrete elements to be approved by structural engineer. 32.10.2 Equipment, Materials and InstallationObtain approval for and maintain uniformity of the manufacturer and type of all materials and equipment. Use only new, current manufacture, first quality materials and equipment.

Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations in respect to installation techniques and the requirements for associated materials, access clearances, equipment, components and devices.

Ensure compatibility of materials and equipment with the installed environment in respect of ambient temperatures, utilities supplies and vibration.

Support all Hydraulic services equipment including pipework, cabling and the like, independently of other services and/or non-structural building elements.32.10.3 PenetrationsProvide treatment to the penetrations as follows. Refer to architectural drawings for indication of all fire walls, floors ceilings, and the like, for allowance required to fire rated penetrations throughout:-

Flashing through Roof

Supply and install weatherproof over flashing to all penetrations, under flashing to be provided by nominated roofing contractor.

The over flashing shall be of the same material as the pipe passing through the roof and shall be securely fixed to it. Colour match to suit roof sheeting.

On completion the Plumbing Services Contractor shall test all penetrations for leaks to the satisfaction of the Architect.

Exposed Penetrations


SANITARY SERVICES

In addition to the above, flash pipework and penetrations where exposed to view with colourbond sheet metal escutcheon plates. Sheet metal shall be to the architects approved colour.

Protection of Penetrations

All floor and wall penetrations shall be protected to ensure no personnel can fall through or be injured from the penetration at all times during works.

Concealed Services

Conceal all services in areas other than plant or utility areas. Install services as follows:

Cavity walls, hollow block and dry walls – install services concealed within cavity.

Single leaf brickwork, concrete – surface mounted conduit or “mini-duct” and seek approval prior to installation.

Do not chase walls or floors without prior approval from structural engineer.32.10.4 ProtectionAll pipework shall be protected against the entry of foreign matter at all times. Temporarily seal wastes, open ends of pipes, tundishes with fitted covers of pressed steel or UPVC. Rags, paper or wood plugs are not acceptable.

Sanitary fixtures are to be adequately protected against damage. Any item not considered to be in first class condition at the completion of the work shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost upon receipt of notice from the Architect.32.10.5 Flushing of ServicesAll hydraulic sanitary services shall be thoroughly flushed to remove all foreign matter including silt, metal particles, etc. Valves, taps and washers shall be inspected and repacked or rewashed if necessary.

Sewer service – ensure floor traps and waste drainage pipes are clear of debris and construction material during and upon practical completion of the project. Floor trap shall be tested to ensure they run at full volume.

CCTV inspection of sewer may be requested during construction or upon practical completion of the project if sewer blockages occur, work shall be carried out and NIL cost to rectify the pipework

Flushing of water services shall be carried out according to volume capacity.32.10.6 Cleaning UpThoroughly clean all fixtures and fittings and leave the installation in a first class working condition.

Remove all floor grates and inspection covers, clean all threads, grease up and refit.32.10.7 General Piping Installation RequirementsAll screwed joints shall be made with the best quality pipe jointing compound, carefully placed on the threads of the pipe and not through fittings.

All cut and threaded pipe shall have the cutting burrs and sharp edges reamed out.

When erecting pipework, care shall be taken to protect the pipe. Dented or otherwise damaged pipework shall be replaced at the Contractors expense.

The general pipework arrangements shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

Pipework shall be installed as directly as possible between connecting points and run parallel to walls or ceilings.


SANITARY SERVICES

32.10.8 Pipe SupportsAll pipes shall be adequately supported and appropriately restrained by proprietary hangers and brackets designed to suit the requirements of each piping system. All pipework shall be fixed clear of each other with galvanised or stainless steel pipe clamps. Between pipe clamps the bracket shall be supplied or wrap tube with 4 layers of approved EPDM rubber.

Pipework must be free to move without causing stresses in the pipework or pipe joints. Where provision has been made for movement in mains, the branch lines shall be unrestrained. Where this is not achieved, some other approved provision for movement shall be made. Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be supported at a maximum of 1800mm centres.

Any noise from movement shall be rectified during the maintenance period.

All steel supports and associated fittings exposed to moisture, condensation or external elements shall be hot dip galvanised after fabrication. Dissimilar metals shall be isolated from one another as specified elsewhere in this specification.32.10.9 Installation Requirements for Pvc Piping and FittingsThe installation of UPVC pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with Power and Water requirements and AS/NZS 3500 as amended and AS2032.

Pipes and fittings must not be stressed by straining into grade or alignment. Pipe ends must be cut square. Butts and swarf shall be removed.

Care must be taken to ensure that the end of the pipe is entered into the socket squarely and in correct alignment to match the grade of the preceding pipes or fittings.

Joints shall be solvent welded joint to AS2032 and in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.

Surplus solvent cement is to be cleaned off.

All UPVC pipes cast in concrete shall be wrapped in 20mm thick minimum FORMFLEX polyethylene foam expansion material and shall be over wrapped in plastic surround. Pipework cast in slab shall be fixed at 500mm intervals, hydrostatic tested and remain under test until concrete placement. Flexible connections shall be provided where pipework exits the floor slab.

All pipework cast in slab shall be approved by structural engineer prior to installation.

PVC Pipework receiving discharges from mechanical plant shall be provided with thermal lagging extending up to connections with other services branches to prevent condensation.32.10.10 Installation Requirements for Pvc Piping and Fittings IngroundAll UPVC pipes cast in concrete shall be wrapped in 40mm thick FORMFLEX polyethylene foam expansion material and shall be wrapped in plastic surround.

Where UPVC Piping and Fittings are installed in soils of moderately, highly or extremely reactive classification the following shall apply:

The base of trenches shall be sloped away from the building. Trenches shall be:

Backfilled with clay in the top 300 mm within 1.5 m of the building. The clay used for backfilling shall be compacted.

Where pipes pass under the footing system, the trench shall be backfilled full depth with clay or concrete to restrict the ingress of water beneath the footing system.

Where pipes pass under the footing system, the trench shall be backfilled full depth with clay to act as a barrier to the ingress of water beneath the footing system. Alternatively, a plastic membrane across the cross-section of the trench, taped to the pipe and keyed into the sides and base of the trench may be used.


SANITARY SERVICES

Penetrations of the edge beams of a raft and perimeter strip footings shall be avoided where practicable, but where necessary shall be detailed to allow for movement. Closed-cell polyethylene lagging shall be used around all stormwater and sanitary plumbing drain pipe penetrations through footings. The lagging shall be a minimum of 20 mm thick on Class H1 sites and 40 mm thick on Class H2 and Class E sites. Vertical penetrations do not require lagging.

NOTE: Sleeves allowing equivalent movements may be used as an alternative to the lagging.

Drains attached to or emerging from underneath the building shall incorporate flexible joints immediately outside the footing and commencing within 1 m of the building perimeter to accommodate a total range of differential movement in any direction equal to the estimated characteristic surface movement of the site (ys). In the absence of specific design guidance, the fittings or other devices that are provided to allow for the movement shall be set at the mid-position of their range of possible movement at the time of installation, so as to allow for movement equal to 0.5ys in any direction from the initial setting. This requirement applies to all sanitary plumbing drains and discharge pipes.

Drainage risers under slab shall be provided with Swivel/expansion joints and where piping systems are reduced 100mm long expansion joints shall be fitted.

32.10.11 Installation Requirements for Cross Linked Polyethylene PipesSupporting of pipework in both horizontal and vertical direction shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in any case shall not exceed AS/NZS 3500,

Pipework and fittings shall be mechanically joined by proprietary compression sleeves. Bends shall be formed and held utilising proprietary bend bracket (bending radius = 8 x outer diameter).

Note: The contractor shall refer to the pipe sizing detail to ensure the nominal bore indicated on drawing is maintained. Pipe sizes shall be equivalent internally.

Note: The pipework supplier’s representative shall be required to inspect the first fix and or periodically during construction first fix installation and certify in writing that the system has been installed to their recommendations.32.10.12 SleevesAll service piping passing through walls, floors and footings shall be provided with sleeves, the location of which shall be accurately determined and installed to the approval of the Structural Engineer during construction. Provide shop drawings indicating location and size of all service penetrations for approval by the Structural Engineer.32.10.13 Chromium Plating Any pipes exposed within buildings excluding store rooms, are to be heavily nickel plated and then chromium plated. Where such pipes pass through walls or floors, a chromium plated wall plate is to be fitted unless otherwise detailed. All basin wastes and traps are to be chrome plated where exposed. –

Chromium plated pipework or stainless steel pipework shall be secured by chromium plated clips. Screws and bolts shall be chromium plated brass or be manufactured from 316 gauge stainless steel. 32.10.14 Dissimilar MetalsWhere clips, brackets, and pipe supports are of dissimilar metal to the actual piping used, completely insulate the piping at all fixing points with at least four layers of 50mm wide black polyethylene tape wrapped around the pipe prior to fixing in position.


SANITARY SERVICES

32.10.15 GradesAll grades and inverts indicated on the drawings shall be established with the use of approved surveying instruments. Check the topography and finished floor elevations before commencing any excavation work.

The setting of all inverts, etc. at correct elevations is a prime and definite requirement of this Specification. Grades to drains shall generally be as shown on the drawings or where this information is not provided, as required by the relevant authorities and plumbing standards.32.10.16 Inspection and Tests Hydrostatic Tests – Water Services

All pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to a head of one and a half times the working head and not less than 1500 kPA. Hydraulic (testing) pumps shall be disconnected immediately after pressurisation and all test heads shall be maintained until the Consulting Engineer’s representative or Regulatory Authority has satisfied himself as to the soundness of the pipework and equipment.

In no case shall the period of test be less than 2 hours.

Before applying specified test head, all air shall be expelled from the piping being tested.

Equipment is not to be connected to the respective services while hydrostatic tests are being carried out.

Provide a suitable pump and gauge and do all necessary work for carrying out the tests.

All testing of pipework is to be carried out before:

Ceilings are installed. Pipework insulated prior to testing shall have the ability to inspect joints to

confirm compliance.

At completion of testing cold water lines shall be kept charged full of water at all times.

Air Testing – Sewer Services

Air testing of drains shall or may be carried out to all drainage pipework where domestic mains water used for a hydrostatic test is not recycled or stored on site for reuse. Contractor shall perform an air pressure test by pressurising the drains as follows:

The sewer drainage pipework shall be pressurised to the initial pressure of 20KPA for sewer drains to 0- 1.5 meters in depth and 25KPA for sewer drains 1.5metres -3.0meters in depth for a minimum of 3minutes to stabilise the temperature.

After the 3 minute stabilisation period the pressure shall be dropped to the test pressure of 15KPA for sewer drains to 1.5meters in depth and 20 KPA for sewer drains 1.5meters – 3.0 metres in depth and the test timing for the particular sewer shall then commence.

A pressure of not more than 5kpa pressure drop over 3 minutes shall be achieved prior to the test procedure being passed.

All pressure tests to be inspected and passed in accordance with AS3500 and Power and Water Corporation requirements.

Hydrostatic Tests – Sanitary Services


SANITARY SERVICES

All sanitary drains shall be water tested by plugging at the lowest or other approved positions, and filling with water to provide 1.0m of head above the invert level of the highest section of drain being tested. Provide an inspection test report witnessed and signed by a third party.

Tests shall be maintained until the authorities, including Architect, have satisfied themselves to the soundness of the pipework.

In no case shall the period of test be less than one hour.

Fixtures are not to be connected to the respective services while tests are being carried out.

Provide all necessary plugs and do all necessary work for the carrying out of these tests.

All testing of the above systems shall be carried out before:

Finishing trades have commenced their work. Backfilling has commenced.

32.10.17 FixturesFixtures shall be filled to spill level with water after installation and visually checked for leaks.32.10.18 Test of CompletionUpon completion the Hydraulic works shall be tested under normal working conditions and as directed by the Consulting Engineer’s representative. Such tests shall continue until Consulting Engineer’s representative is satisfied that the terms of this specification has been complied with and that the Hydraulic works are capable of meeting all requirements.

All defects disclosed during the tests shall be remedied immediately and, if required by the Architect, additional tests shall be carried out.

The duration of the tests will be decided by the Consulting Engineer’s representative and the maximum duration of any one test will not exceed eight hours.

The Consulting Engineer’s representative shall be given five (5) days clear notice that any system is ready for test.

Provide all equipment and labour required for tests.

The Consulting Engineer reserves the right to check any aspect with his own equipment.

All tests shall be carried out in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of, all local authorities, as well as the Consulting Engineer’s representative.

Record Keeping

Contractor shall keep a record of all tests completed and inspection requested by the authorities or engineer with dates the tests were performed for each level and noting type of test, pressure applied to the relevant pipe being tested and end result as a pass or fail. Records shall include the name of the operator performing the test and witness of the result. Records shall be inserted within manuals for future reference.

32.11TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION32.11.1 Trench ExcavationThe Contractor shall do all excavation of whatever substances encountered to the required depths, lengths, breadths, grades and alignment as may be necessary for the construction of the pipe drains in accordance with the drawings.


SANITARY SERVICES

Where trenches are to be in bitumen or concrete paving, the surface shall be saw-cut where paving consists of unit pavers, blocks shall be removed.

Trenches are to be excavated to the correct line and level with vertical sides at least 300 mm wider (150 mm on each side) than the external diameter of the pipes to be laid in them. Sufficient extra width and depth is to be excavated at each joint to allow the pipes to be properly jointed. Excavation shall be 75mm lower than required for 75mm thick compacted sand base or 10mm sieve metal screenings for pipework bedding.

Trenches must be kept clear of water at all times and timbered where necessary to prevent collapse. They shall be excavated only sufficiently in advance of pipe laying to allow that work to proceed without delay.

Excess excavation below the required level shall be backfilled at the Plumbing Contractor's expense with sand, gravel or other material as directed by the Consulting Engineer, and thoroughly compacted. Any soft or yielding material shall be removed and replaced with sound material and compacted to the satisfaction of the Consulting Engineer.

Suitable safety barriers shall be provided around the excavation at all times. The barriers shall be suitably defined by approved lighting during the appropriate light up time for the area.

The barriers shall not be removed until completion of all work.

Excavated material shall be removed off site. All cartage costs and tipping fees shall be paid by the Plumbing Contractor. 32.11.2 Pipe Bedding/SupportPipes shall have a minimum 75mm bed of compacted sand base or 10mm sieve metal screening provided in accordance with AS3500.

The bedding surface shall provide a firm foundation, carefully shaped true to line and grade.32.11.3 Laying PipesPipes shall bear evenly on the bed prepared as specified above and laid with the sockets pointed up-grade. All pipes shall be laid in straight lines, to true invert levels.32.11.4 Trench Backfilling No joints shall be covered or trench backfilled until pipe laying and jointing has been approved by Consulting Engineer’s representative.

It shall be the Plumbing Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the inspection and approval of the pipe drains prior to the backfilling.

Failure to observe this clause shall render the Plumbing Contractor liable for re-opening at his own expense any trench backfilled without approval.

Backfill material shall comply with the relevant services specification section. Generally, backfill, including the overlay zone shall be:

In paved areas or under buildings - quarry sand

Backfill shall be placed in layers not greater than 150 mm thick and compacted to:

In paved areas or under buildings - 98% Modified Compaction Maximum Dry Density

Note: Contractor shall engage independent engineer to perform compaction testing of trenches on completion. Test results shall confirm 95% compaction has been achieved. A minimum of 4 compaction tests are required for the ground floor drainage with test sheets inserted within manuals for review.


SANITARY SERVICES

32.11.5 Weather Damage and Flooding of ExcavationsKeep excavations free from water and seepage and take all necessary precautions throughout the duration of the Contract to maintain the safety and stability of the excavation.32.11.6 Over ExcavationBackfill over-excavated trenching with approved granular material or concrete as directed by Consulting Engineer’s representative and/or the Technical Regulator.32.11.7 Barriers and AccessibilityProvide all necessary barricades and lighting to excavations to protect the public, as well as the work during the course of all excavations.

All necessary arrangements for access over trenches and safety lighting shall be made so that paths and doorways are trafficable at all times.32.11.8 Shoring of TrenchesWhere necessary and/or required by the Authorities for safe and efficient completion of the work, supply, erect shoring, timbering, planking, etc. of sufficient strength and quality to prevent earth and other materials entering the excavations, tunnels, etc.

Work shall be carried out in accordance with Safe Work requirements.

Remove all shoring and timbering in an approved manner on completion of the work and after the inspections have taken place.32.11.9 Minimum Cover to All PipesAll service pipes shall be installed with the minimum cover as noted hereafter or in excess of these as noted on the drawings or specified elsewhere.

Sewer 600mm in areas subject to vehicular traffic

450 elsewhere

Water 450mm minimum

Separation 100mm for services up to and equal to 50mm

300mm for services above 65mm

32.12PIPEWORK MATERIALSFinishes

Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports as follows:

Copper and copper alloy piping in internal locations such as ablution, toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate to AS 1192 Service Condition 2, bright.

Metal pipe-work including protective coatings, except chrome plating: A full gloss solvent-borne paint system or equivalent (interior or exterior as appropriate), colour to match adjacent surfaces.

Pipe-work in concealed but accessible spaces (including ducts and non-habitable enclosed spaces): Leave unpainted except for required identification marking.

Pipe-work finishes scheduleLocation Pipe material FinishWhere Exposed uPVC Chrome Plating


SANITARY SERVICES

32.13PIPING AND MATERIALGeneral Materials

Type Application Jointing Bracketing Insulation Location

UPVC Sewer Cleaning Fluid. Solvent cement.

N/A N/A Internal, external, inground

32.14SANITARY DRAINSInspection chambers

Metal access covers: To: AS 3996

Cover levels: Top level of cover including frames:

In paved areas, flush with the paving surface.

In landscaped areas, 25 mm above finished surface.

Cleaning

During construction provide temporary covers to openings and keep pipelines free of debris. On completion flush the pipelines with water and leave them clean.

Sanitary drainage pipeline scheduleLocation Pipe material

and sizeClass Jointing Bedding

Internal. Inground, External

uPVC SN10:DN40 -DN150

Cleaning fluid solvent cement

Refer trenching and excavation section

32.15SANITARY FIXTURES AND TAPWARE

32.15.1 GeneralSupply and install sanitary fixtures and tapware, complete with chrome plated on brass outlet, brackets, fixing bolts and screws wherever required etc, as required to complete the installation in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines.

All fixing shall be plumb and level, neatly finished in a tradesman-like manner and without damage.

Upon taking delivery, if any of the Sanitary fixtures are damaged during installation, the Hydraulic Services Trade shall replace the fixture at no expense to the proprietor.

Except where otherwise specified, all vitreous sanitary fixtures shall be white.

White sanitary fixtures where inset or vanity shall be finished with white non-setting mastic.32.15.2 Fixing of Fixtures and Fittings in Cupboards etcWhere fittings and fixtures are fixed in vanity units, cupboards etc, the Contractor shall co-operate with and allow for attendance of the Joiner to ensure:


SANITARY SERVICES

That the fixtures, fittings and taps are on site to allow the Joiner to cut holes in the bench tops before the benches or cupboards are permanently fixed and sealed in position.

That the fixtures are fixed and sealed as recommended by the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of Consulting Engineer’s representative.

That no sealant putty shall be visible beyond the sealing rim of the fixture.32.15.3 Fixing of Fixtures to WallsSupply and install timber trimmers as necessary for the fixing of sanitary fixtures to walls.32.15.4 Sanitary Fixtures and Tapware ScheduleRefer to Architectural Sanitary Fixtures and Tapware Schedules for details of fixtures to be supplied as part of these works. Install Sanitary fixtures where shown ready for connection to drainage system.

The Plumbing Contractor shall allow to provide suitable secure storage on site for same.

32.16SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES32.16.1 GeneralSupply and install all soil, waste and vent pipes as detailed on the drawings and in accordance with the Directions of the authority and AS/NZS 3500 Part 2 and as specified in Materials and Workmanship Subsections.

The whole of the work shall be carried out by, or under the direct supervision of a Fully Licenced Plumber in strict accordance with the regulations and requirements of the Power and Water Corporation, Local Authorities, AS3500 and to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.

The systems shall be complete with all necessary bends, junctions, expansion joints, traps, fixed points, clips, bolts and inspection openings provided with screwed or bolted covers.

Set all floor traps, inspection openings tops and gully grates flush with the finished floor level or as indicated on the drawings.32.16.2 Installation Requirements For Pvc Piping And FittingsThe installation of UPVC pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with AS2032 requirements and AS/NZS 3500 as amended.

Pipes and fittings must not be stressed by straining into grade or alignment. Pipe ends must be cut square. Butts and swarf shall be removed.

Care must be taken to ensure that the end of the pipe is entered into the socket squarely and in correct alignment to match the grade of the preceding pipes or fittings.

Joints shall be solvent welded joint to AS2032 and in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.

Surplus solvent cement is to be cleaned off.

All UPVC pipes cast in concrete shall be wrapped in 20mm thick FORMFLEX polyethylene foam expansion material and shall be wrapped in plastic surround.

32.17PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS32.17.1 Material TypesInstall all pipework as shown as drawings and as scheduled.


SANITARY SERVICES

32.17.2 Waste PipesProvide and fix waste branch lines, which shall be in UPVC to all sanitary fixtures, except where noted otherwise. All waste pipe risers within all wet areas through all floors shall be fitted with approved puddle floor flange, fully sealed to riser and structural floor.32.17.3 Plug and Washers Provide plug and washers to fixtures in accordance with the manufactures requirements and as required to ensure correction operation of the fixture:

Hand Basin - chrome plated brass plug and washer, unless integral or stated otherwise.

Kitchen Sink, stainless steel to manufactures requirement

Baths -chrome plated brass plug and washer.

Cleaners sink - chrome plated brass plug and washer32.17.4 Floor WastesProvide floor wastes adjacent to sanitary fixtures of the sizes indicated on the drawings and provide risers as required to accommodate the wastes shown discharging into riser. Riser shall be complete with 80mm minimum (shower) or 80mm minimum (floor) chrome plated brass grating. Grates shall be set at a level to enable floor to be graded to same.

The set-out of the floor wastes shall be closely coordinated with the tiling layout. Refer Architectural Drawings for specific set-out requirements.32.17.5 Floor Grates PVC

All floor grates shall be connected to drainage pipework utilizing approved connections, puddle flanges and provide water tight seal.

Vinyl:

All floor grates used covered with vinyl shall be provided with approved clamping and grate.

Vent Pipes

Vents where applicable shall be UPVC unless otherwise indicated.

All roof penetrations shall be sealed waterproofed utilising ‘Dektite’ over flashing to match roof colour.

On completion, the Plumbing Contractor shall test all penetrations for leaks to the satisfaction of the Consulting Engineer.

Inspection Points

Inspection points shall be approved brass, chrome plated brass or cast iron suitable for application required.

In the following positions these shall be:

150mm chrome plated non slip brass trap screws where set in external concrete paving and subject to foot traffic only.

As for above but 100mm chrome plated non slip type, in internal tiled floor areas, set flush with finished tile level.

Cast iron where located in carparks, roadways or areas subject to vehicular traffic (Marked 'S').32.17.6 MATERIALSShall be generally as noted on drawings and as follows:


SANITARY SERVICES

All sewer drains below ground shall be PVC pipe as shown on drawings.

Fixture traps to hand basins, shall be 40mm polypropylene P-Trap or S-Trap where concealed and chrome plated copper traps and waste pipes where visible.

Fixture traps to sinks, etc. shall be 50mm Polypropylene where concealed and chrome plated copper traps and waste pipes where visible.

Stainless steel fittings, fixtures and pipework to all external equipment.32.17.7 PIPEWORK FINISHESIn addition to the protective coating specified in the Materials and Workmanship Subsection of this Section provide the following:

Pipework Finishes Schedule

Specification Cross Reference: PAINTING

There is no requirement to paint exposed pipework.

Thermal Piping Insulation

Insulation shall possess the following characteristics or a minimum – Spread of Flame Index – 0, Smoke Developed Index – 3, Thermal Conductivity 0.038w/mk at 0C mean temperature.

Split insulation and duct tape shall not be approved.

32.18SANITARY PLUMBING – HOLD POINTPipe supports

Materials: The same as the pipe, or galvanized or non-ferrous metals, with suitable sleeves where needed to separate dissimilar metals.

Steel fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized to AS 1214.

Fixing to masonry: Fix supports to masonry and concrete with galvanized steel or non-ferrous metal bolts or screws with expanding metal masonry or chemical anchors. Do not use explosive powered fixings.

Building penetrations

Hold Point - Limitations: Unless prior approval has been given do not penetrate

Existing structural members including external walls, fire walls, floor slabs and beams; or

Membrane elements including damp-proof courses, or waterproofing membranes.

Membranes: Where approval is given to penetrate membranes, provide a waterproof seal between the membrane and the pipe.

Sleeves: Where pipes pass through building elements provide purpose-made metal or plastic sleeves formed from pipe sections. Prime paint ferrous surfaces. If the building element is acoustic rated, maintain the rating by packing the annular space with suitable insulation.

Fire-rated elements: Seal the penetration using a system conforming to AS 4072.1.

Hold point - Concrete building elements: Obtain approval for the location of sleeves or core holes.

Vent pipes

Terminations: Provide bird proof vent cowls made of the same material and colour as the vent pipe.


SANITARY SERVICES

Sealing

During construction provide temporary seals to open ends of pipes and fittings and keep the pipe systems free of debris. Do not use rags or other material that may foul the system.

32.19SANITARY FIXTURESStandards

Baths: To: AS/NZS 2023.

Cisterns: To: AS 1172.2.

Laundry troughs: To: AS/NZS 1229.

Toilet seats: To: AS 1371.

Showers: To: AS 3588.

Sink & drainages: To: AS 1756.

Wash& vanity basins: To: AS/NZS 1730.

Water closets (WC) - Pans: To: AS 1172.1.

Accessories

Provide accessories necessary for the correct installation of the fixtures.

Floor wastes: Provide chrome plated brass floor waste and shower grates.

Waterproofing

Install and seal fixtures in wet areas using material and methods which ensure the long term integrity of the fixture and prevent water penetration into adjoining areas.

Sanitary fixtures scheduleLocation Fixture Proprietary ItemKitchen Refer Finishes Schedule Refer Finishes ScheduleBathroom Refer Finishes Schedule Refer Finishes ScheduleBathroom Refer Finishes Schedule Refer Finishes ScheduleWC Refer Finishes Schedule Refer Finishes ScheduleLaundry Refer Finishes Schedule Refer Finishes Schedule

32.20MAINTENANCE HOLES – HOLD POINTConstruction

Requirement: Construct maintenance holes in accordance with Power Water Drawing No. W2-2-01.

Hold Point: Obtain approval in writing to use precast maintenance holes or inspection chambers. If given, approval will be to construct in accordance with Power Water Drawing No. W2-2-02.

Level: Locate the top of the maintenance hole:

150 mm above finished surface level when not in a road reserve.


SANITARY SERVICES

Flush with the level, slope and curvature of adjoining finished surface in road reserve.

Concrete: N20, 20 mm aggregate.

Air voids: Pour concrete so that there are no air voids around incoming or outgoing pipes.

Ladders in maintenance holes: In accordance with Power Water Drawing No. W2-2-04.

Drops at maintenance holes: In accordance with Power Water Drawing No. W2-2-03.

Testing of Maintenance Holes

Testing: Test all maintenance holes after completion and curing.

Sealing: Seal all openings for future sewers with permanent sealing plugs.

Location: Seal all pipes connected to the maintenance hole, with the exception of future sewers, with plugs located at least 300 mm outside the walls of maintenance hole.

Testing: Fill the maintenance hole with water to the top of the maintenance hole cover frame.

Measurement: Measure the loss of water after 15 minutes. This loss of water shall not exceed 2 mm drop in level for every 1000 mm depth of the maintenance hole.

Failure: Any maintenance hole failing the above test will be rejected. Repair leakage points in maintenance holes both internally and externally. Re-test the maintenance hole according to the above test until satisfactory results are obtained.

Testing of Maintenance Hole / Pipeline Connection

Hold point - Plugs: Fit plugs to upstream inlets of the maintenance hole to be tested and the upstream inlet of the next maintenance hole downstream.

Filling: Fill the maintenance hole and its downstream sewer with water to the top of the maintenance hole cover frame.

Measurement: Measure the loss of water after 15 minutes. The loss of water shall not exceed 2 mm drop in level for every 1000 mm depth of the maintenance hole plus loss acceptable for sewer as previously specified.

Failure: Any maintenance hole connection failing the above test shall be rejected. Replace connections and re-test until satisfactory results are obtained.


WATER

33 WATER




GROUNDWORKS, for trench excavation bedding and backfilling.

Standards

AS 1056: Storage water heaters

AS 1074: Steel tubes & tubulars for ordinary services



AS/NZS 1221: Fire hose reels

AS 1361: Electric heat – exchange water heaters – For domestic applications

AS 1432: Copper tubes for plumbing, gas fitting & drainage applications

AS 2441: Installation of fire hose reels

AS/NZS 2712: Solar and heat pump water heaters – Design and construction

AS/NZS 3350.2.35: Safety of household and similar electrical appliances – Particular requirements – Instantaneous water heaters

AS/NZS 3500: Plumbing and Drainage

AS/NZS 3500.1: - Water services

AS/NZS 3500.4: - Heated water services

AS/NZS 3500.5: - Domestic installations


AS 4072.1: - Service penetrations and control joints

AS 4809: Copper pipe and fittings – Installation and commissioning

AS 5601: Gas installations

Additional References


AS 2118: Automatic fire sprinkler systems

AS 2419: Fire hydrant installations

AS 2441: Installation of fire hose reels

AS 4118: Fire Sprinkler Systems


WATER

National Construction Code (NCC) Volume 3: The Plumbing Code of Australia

Building Code of Australia (BCA)

Power and Water Corporation Remote Operations Design and Construction Guidelines

NT Building Regulations


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of work ready for testing.

33.3TESTS – HOLD POINTHydrostatic tests

Hold Point - Fill the piping with water and test at the required pressure and duration. Obtain the Superintendent's approval of the test results.

Preparation for testing

Seal off items of equipment not designed to withstand the test pressure. Securely anchor pipes and fittings in position to prevent movement during the tests.

Testing

Check pipe joints, valve seats, tap washers, strainers and other elements for leaks. Repair or replace if damaged, and retest.

33.4CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSWork-as-executed drawings

Submit drawings showing the "as installed" locations of pipes, fittings, tanks, water heaters, control valves and accessories. Show the depth of underground piping.

33.5CONNECTIONLocal authorities

If the authority elects to perform or supply part of the works, make arrangements and pay and bear the fees payable for the work.

Connection

Connect the cold water supply system to the supply authority's main through a stop valve and meter. Carry out the excavation necessary to locate and expose the connection point. On completion reinstate surfaces and elements which have been disturbed such as roads, pavements, kerbs, footpaths and nature strips.

33.6PIPEWORK MATERIALSCopper pipe

To: AS 1432, Type B.

Jointing methods: Use capillary fittings, compression fittings, silver brazed slip joints or screwed joints.


WATER

Galvanized steel pipe

To: AS 1074, with screw threaded joints.

Wall thickness: Heavy for sizes up to and including DN 80, medium for sizes above DN 80.

Finishes

Finish exposed pipe-work, including fittings and supports as follows:

Copper and copper alloy pipe-work in internal locations such as ablution, toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate to AS 1192 Service Condition 2, bright.

Metal pipe-work including protective coatings, except chrome plating: A full gloss solvent borne paint system or equivalent (interior or exterior as appropriate), colour to match adjacent surfaces.

Pipe-work in concealed but accessible spaces (including ducts and non-habitable enclosed spaces): Leave unpainted except for required identification marking.

Valves

Finish valves to match connected pipe-work.

Pipe-work finishes scheduleLocation Pipe material FinishExposed Pipework Stainless Steel none

33.7PIPEWORK INSTALLATIONGeneral

Copper piping: To: AS 4809

Install piping in straight lines and uniform grades. Arrange and support the piping so that it remains free from vibration, whilst permitting thermal movement. Keep the number of joints to a minimum. Prevent direct contact between incompatible metals.

Concealment

Where practicable conceal piping and fittings requiring maintenance or servicing so that they are accessible within non-habitable enclosed spaces such as roof spaces, sub-floor spaces and ducts. Do not run pipelines in masonry cavities. Keep pipelines in sub-floor spaces at least 150 mm above ground. Provide not less than 25 mm clearance between adjacent pipelines (measured from the pipe insulation where applicable).

Building penetrations

Limitations: Unless prior approval has been given do not penetrate

existing structural members including external walls, fire walls, floor slabs and beams; or

membrane elements including damp-proof courses, or waterproofing membranes.

Membranes: Where approval is given to penetrate membranes, provide a waterproof seal between the membrane and the pipe.


WATER

Sleeves: Where pipes pass through building elements, provide purpose-made metal or plastic sleeves formed from pipe sections. Prime paint ferrous surfaces. If the building element is acoustic rated, maintain the rating by packing the annular space with suitable insulation.

Fire-resistant separating elements: Seal the penetration using a system conforming to AS 4072.1.

Concrete building elements: Obtain approval for the location of sleeves or core holes.

Pipe supports

Materials: The same as the pipe, or galvanized or non-ferrous metals, with bonded PVC or glass fibre woven tape sleeves where needed to separate dissimilar metals.

Steel fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized to AS 1214.

Fixing to masonry: Fix supports to masonry and concrete with galvanized steel or non-ferrous metal bolts or screws with expanding metal masonry or chemical anchors. Do not use explosive powered fixings.

Cleaning

On completion flush the pipeline with water and leave it clean.

33.8ACCESSORIESGeneral

Provide the accessories and fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the hot water and cold water systems, including taps, valves, outlets, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and pumps.

ACCESSORIES SCHEDULETAPWARE:Proprietary item: Ram are good quality Australian made taps for general use. Replace

with other selected types if desired or refer to hydraulic fixtures and Fittings Schedule

Finish: Norfolk rangeHandles: Series T4OTHER ITEMSLOCATION FIXTURE ACCESSORIESKitchen Sink Type: Hob mounted hot and cold sink set.

Spout: High rise swivel spout withaerator.

Bathroom Vanity basin Type: Hob mounted hot and cold basin set.Spout: Upswept spout with aerator.

Bathroom Bath Type: Recessed hot and cold bath set.Spout: 115 mm, fixed.

Bathroom Shower (Over bath) Type: Recessed hot and cold shower set.Shower head: Double elbow all directional shower rose and arm, complete.


WATER

WC WC cistern Cistern Cock.Laundry Trough Type: Recessed hot and cold set.

Spout: Wall mounted overslung plain swivel.

Laundry Washing machine outlets Type: Washing machine hose cocks with screwed caps.

External positions shown on drawing.(2 per dwelling)

Hose cocks 20 mm T head polished brass hose cocks.

Cover plates

Where exposed water lines emerge from wall, floor or ceiling finishes, provide cover plates of non-ferrous metal, finished to match the pipe, or of stainless steel.

Cover plate sizes tablePipe diameter Cover plate diameter (nominal)Up to 20 mm 65 mm21 mm to 50 mm 100 mmLarger than 50 mm 50 mm larger than pipe

33.9COLD WATER SYSTEMReticulation

Extend the supply from the water meter to draw off points and fixtures.

Cold water pipeline schedulePipeline location Material Nominal size Other requirementsConcealed, in ground Cross linked

polyethylene PE100 SDR11 PN12 (min)

DN15-DN32 N/A

Where Exposed Stainless Steel DN18-DN25 N/A

33.10HOT WATER SYSTEMReticulationSupply hot water piping to connect the heater to the supply and to draw off points and fixtures.Tap positionsLocate hot tap to the left of, or above, the cold water tap.Hot water pipeline schedulePipeline location Material Nominal size Other requirements

Stainless steel DN15 -DN20 Fittings to matchElsewhere concealed Cross linked poly DN15-DN20 Not to be used within 1m

of HWUAs per drawings and Schedules


WATER

33.11HEAT PUMP HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMUse a proprietary, integrated system with standard 200 litre water tank or higher in accordance to the Superintendent. Split system heat pump heating system can be considered as well. Installation should be in accordance to manufacturer’s specifications. It is not recommended for areas with low annual average temperature (Below 19C) such as NTCZ01. Refer to NT Climate Zones Table.

Proprietary item: Dux Airoheat Subzero Heat Pump 250 Litres

The contractor is to install the HWS pipes flushed to the block wall to prevent potential damage. The electrical switching on the HWS is to be installed 1.6mtrs high.

33.12IRRIGATION SYSTEMRefer to the LANDSCAPE section.


GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

34GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

34.1SCOPE The following works generally describe the Electrical Services installation and shall be

carried out under this specification:

Co-ordination with Lot Connection design and installation for the connection to site electrical supply.

Installation of a new authority electrical meter and meter panel.

Payment of Electricity Supply Authority standard fees and charges.

Provision of new aerial consumers mains, and house meter panel and load centre / switchboard including all switchgear, controlgear and auxiliary panels.

Earthing systems to all accessories, outlets, equipment, luminaires, other services, building structure, switchboards and communications cabling systems including provision of equipotential earthing system to slab reinforcement in all wet areas in accordance with AS3000 and in co-ordination with the Builder.

General power installation throughout including access provisions, supports, cabling and outlets.

RCD protection of all socket outlet circuits, lighting circuits and other circuits and equipment as nominated.

Power supplies to hydraulic and mechanical services including provision of supplies, outlets or isolators as nominated.

Provision of general lighting throughout including luminaires, lamps and controls to suit BCA power density and energy efficiency requirements.

Access conduits for telecommunications cabling for connection to Telecommunication Authority (Telstra/NBN) lead in.

Internal telecommunication system inclusive of distribution frames, outlets and connection to Authority connection point.

Interconnected thermal (fire) alarm system, complying with the NCC and AS3786, including cabling detectors.

Digital TV distribution system, including cabling, antenna, head-end equipment, auxiliary equipment and accessories as required to complete the installation. Provide a provisional sum for a VAST certified satellite-based Free-To-Air (FTA) high definition system.

Liaise with electrical and telecommunication authorities and utilities for all infrastructure and connections associated with the project on behalf of the Proprietor/Principal to meet the construction program milestones.

Testing and commissioning of the above systems.

Maintenance and servicing, defects liability and warranty for 12 months from the date of practical completion.

Bound volumes of Installation and Operating Manuals, and work-as-executed drawings.




Refer to the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS section.

Standard



AS 4072.1: - service penetrations and control joints

Operating environment

Provide an electrical system and elements, which are suitable for the ambient service conditions and operating environment with components and equipment suitable for the system application.

Service conditions: Ambient Air Temperature 40C

Maximum Relative Humidity 100%

Attack by Vermin High (provide nylon-jacket type cabling where exposed)



Concealed cabling prior to covering.

Required tests.

34.4CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSShop drawings

Submit shop drawings for all switchboards, and other nominated appliances / apparatus, showing dimensions of equipment, location, circuit identification and labelling details.

Work-as-executed drawings

Prior to practical completion submit work-as-executed drawings showing the "as installed" location of electrical cables, services and equipment including the depth of underground cables, in relation to permanent site features and other underground services.

34.5CONSTRUCTION GENERALLYSystem integration

Interconnect the elements so that the system performs its required functions.

Wiring

Conceal all wiring runs within ceiling and wall cavities, unless otherwise specified.



Where approval has been granted to surface run wiring, the wiring shall be enclosed in suitably sized conduit, trunking or ducting systems fixed to the wall or ceiling. The surface wiring systems shall be run parallel with walls and ceilings.

Building Penetrations

Limitations: Unless prior approval has been given do not penetrate:

Existing structural members including external walls, fire walls, floor slabs and beams

Membrane elements including damp -proof courses, weatherproofing membranes and roof coverings

Membranes: Where approval has been given to penetrate membranes, provide a waterproof seal between the element and the penetrating pipe, conduit or cable.

Fire Rated Elements: Seal the penetration using a system conforming to AS 4072.1.

Non Fire Rated Elements: seal penetrations around conduits and sleeves with a weak sand: cement mix or other approved material. Seal the space between cables within sleeves with a pliable waterproof compound. If the building element is acoustic rates, maintain the rating by packing the penetration with a suitable insulating material.

Concrete Building Elements: Obtain approval for the location of sleeves or core holes, prior to drilling or coring.

Labelling

General: Provide labels to operable control devices and indicators.

Wiring: Identify the origin of wiring by means of legible indelible marking.

34.6COMMISSIONINGTesting on Completion

Test the complete installation to ensure that all systems are safe, function and operate satisfactorily and comply with Australian Standards (AS 3000, 3017 etc), National Construction Code and Utility requirements. Arrange for a practical completion inspection and complete any defect items to the satisfactory of the Superintendent at no additional cost

Balancing of Load

Balance the load of the installation, at each switchboard, prior to handing over.

Services Review and Tests

Demonstrate that the whole of the electrical services, communications systems, fire detection and alarm systems, warning systems and security systems operate in accordance with the intent of the design documents.

Carry out all tests required by the Superintendent.

Operating and maintenance instructions

Prior to handing over, instruct the principal's staff in the recommended methods for operating and maintaining the system.



Certification

Prior to practical completion the Contractor shall provide the Superintendent the Electrical Safety Certificate of Compliance in approved written for the complete electrical installation. The certificate shall be fully completed with the signature, names, dates, qualifications and registration number clearly shown.

34.7MAINTENANCE AND DEFECTS LIABILITYUnless otherwise stated in the preliminary sections of this specification the Defects Liability period shall be 52 weeks from the date of practical completion.

The maintenance period shall be co-existent with the defects liability period. During this period the Contractor shall:

Attend site regularly to perform all maintenance required by equipment manufacturers, Australian standards and as detailed in this specification, or other relevant document.

Attend site at any time during the maintenance period on request of the Superintendent to carry out remedial work required to keep the plant in good operating condition.

Make good any/all defects which become apparent during the contract maintenance and defects liability period.

Any equipment replaced during the defects liability period is to attract a further 12 months warranty from the date of replacement.


WIRING AND ACCESSORIES

35 WIRING AND ACCESSORIES



GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS.

Standards

AS/NZS 2053: Conduits and fittings for electrical installations


AS 2201: Intruder alarm systems

AS 2201.3: - Detection devices for internal use


AS/NZS 3008.1: Electrical installations – Selection of cables – Cables for alternating voltages up to and including 0.6/1 kV

AS/NZS 3008.1.1: - Typical Australian installation conditions.

35.2CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSPower cable ratings

If cable sizes are not given, submit calculations of current ratings and voltage drop, to AS/NZS 3008.1.1

35.3WIRING SYSTEM INSTALLATIONInstallation methods

Solid Block Walls: Use flush wall boxes and chase conduits into walls

Hollow Block Walls: Use flush wall boxes and conceal conduits/cables in blockwork cores

Rendered brick partition: Use flush wall boxes and chase conduits into wall.

Face brick partition: Use flush wall boxes and conceal conduits in brickwork.

Face brick external cavity wall: Use flush wall boxes or stud mounting brackets and run conduits and/or cables in cavity.

Stud partition: Use flush wall boxes or stud mounting brackets and run conduits and /or cables in cavity.

Straight-through joints

Unless unavoidable due to length or difficult installation conditions, run cables for their entire route length without intermediate straight-through joints.

If cable joints are required the cable joints are to be readily accessible.



35.4POWER CABLE SELECTIONCable

Use nylon-jacketed (NJ) multi-stranded XLPE or PVC insulated and PVC sheathed copper cable.

Minimum size: 1.5 mm2 for lighting circuits and 2.5 mm2 for power circuits.

PVC insulated cables: Use V90 minimum insulation.

XLPE insulated cable: Use X-90 minimum insulation

35.5CONDUITSInstallation

If exposed to view, install conduits in parallel runs with right angle changes of direction.

Inspection fittings

Use accessible type.

Draw cords

Provide draw cords in conduits not in use. Leave 1 metre of cord coiled at each end of the run.

Material: Polypropylene cord, or insulated stranded earth wire, 2.5 mm2 minimum size.

Non-metallic conduits and fittings

To: AS/NZS 2053.1

Corrugated conduit: In slabs, use high compression corrugated conduit and restrain at regular intervals to achieve a nominally straight run.

35.6UNDERGROUND CABLESStandards

To: AS/NZS 3000 and Austel regulations.

All underground cables must be installed to AS/NZS 3000 Category A system.

Trenches

Carry out all trenching and back filling required for the installation of underground cables.

Excavate trenches to the minimum depths required by the relevant authorities.

Clear bottom of trenches of all rocks, stones and other hard and sharp materials. Fill trench to a depth of 50mm with a sand or select filling.

Where trenches are left open, protect trenches by barriers or other suitable means to prevent their creating any hazard to the public. Take all necessary precautions to prevent flooding and caving in of trenches, and make good any damage resulting from neglect of these precautions.

Care must be taken during excavation to prevent soil blocking drains or causing an obstruction on roadways or pathways.



Backfill may be the excavated material provided it is reasonably well graded from a maximum of 75mm down to fines.

After laying of cables and/or conduits, the trench is to be backfilled to approval.

Place backfill in layers not exceeding 200mm loose thickness and compact to the required density.

Leave fill level with the surrounding ground.

Remove excess soil from site.

Make good roads and paths to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.

Repair concrete and/or bitumen surfaces, to approval, by tradesman experienced in this work.

Make good all grassed surfaces and replant all trees and shrubs that are uprooted in the course of laying the underground cables.

Conduit/Cable Installation

Bed conduits on the 50mm compacted depth of sand or selected fill, extending the full length

of the trench. Conduit barrel must bear evenly for its full length on the bedding material.

Changes in conduit diameter must not be made underground.

Seal the buried entries to ducts, pipes and conduits with a pliable, non-setting waterproof compound. Seal spare conduits, pipes and ducts immediately after installation and seal others after cable installation.

Install cable in unbroken lengths between terminations. Underground joints are not permitted.

Attach cables, to be drawn in, to the drawing rope by suitable snotters, hooks or cumalongs.

A swivel must be used to prevent damage to the cable.

Required lengths of cable must be checked on site before ordering cables.

Where cables are drawn into conduits with several pits along the route length, rollers must be provided to adequately support the cable at each pit.

Lubricate cables with liberal application of french chalk or approved fluids when they are to be drawn into long conduit runs.

Survey

Prior to backfilling accurately record the routes of underground cables.

Location Marking

Accurately mark the location of underground cables by route markers consisting of a marker plate set flush in a concrete base not less than 200mm diameter x 200mm deep, placed at each joint, route junction, change of direction, termination and building entry point and in straight runs at intervals of not more than 100m.



Cable Marker Tape

Supply and install cable marker tape over all underground cables and conduits at a depth of 150mm below finished ground level. The marker tape shall be 150mm wide and marked ‘Caution Electric Cables Below!’, on orange background.

Cable PITS

Proprietary cable pits

Use proprietary moulded pits up to and including 1200 x 1200 mm.

Proprietary item: ACO Cablemate, BVCI, Gatic, TRI Underground or equal approved

Thickness: 10 mm minimum or to suit the expected loading.

Material: Reinforced concrete, fibre cement, glass reinforced concrete, or polymer concrete.

Pit cover

Provide a pit cover, which will withstand the expected loads and fit flush with the top of the pit.

Expected loading (kg): 2670 kg (Nominal Wheel Load, to AS3996:2006 Class B)

Material: Concrete, cast iron, galvanized steel or other material suitable for the application, environment and loading.

Weight: Maximum 40 kg for any section of the cover.

Lifting handles: Supply lifting handles for each size of pit cover.

Drainage

Provide drainage from the bottom of the cable pit to an absorption trench filled with rubble or to the stormwater drainage system.

Absorption trench: Minimum size 300 x 300 x 2000 mm long.

35.7ACCESSORIESFlush mounting

Provide accessories of the flush mounted type except in plant rooms.

Surface mounting

Use proprietary mounting blocks.

Restricted location

Do not install wall boxes across the junction of wall finishes.

General purpose outlets

Mount the outlet with the earth pin at the 6 o'clock position.

Pin arrangement: Five round pins mounted with the earth pin at the 6 o'clock position, the neutral pin in the centre, and the red, white and blue phases in a clockwise sequence when viewed from the front of the socket.



Plug: Provide a matching plug top for each outlet.

Construction: Surface mounted type of impact-resistant polycarbonate, with flap lid on the socket, having a minimum degree of protection of IP55.


SWITCHBOARDS

36 SWITCHBOARDS


Refer to the GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS section.

Supply authority's equipment

Install current transformers, potential fuses, test links and other equipment supplied by the supply authority, and provide the wiring necessary to complete the installation.

Approved manufacturers

Obtain the switchboard from an approved switchboard manufacturer.

Installation

Fix switchboards into position so that they are level and plumb.

Standards


AS 1627: Metal finishing - Preparation and pretreatment of surfaces – method selection guide

AS 2700: Colour standards for general purposes


AS/NZS 3008.1: Electrical installations – Selection of cables – Cables for alternating voltages up to and including 0.6/1 kV

AS/NZS 3111: Approval and test specifications – Miniature overcurrent circuit-breakers

AS/NZS 3133: Approval and test specifications – Air-breaks switches

AS/NZS 3190: Approval and test specifications – Residual current devices (current-operated earth-leakage devices)

AS/NZS 3439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies

AS/NZS 3439.1: - Type-tested and partially type- tested assemblies

AS/NZS 3947: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear

AS/NZS 3947.3: - Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units

AS 60269: Low voltage fuses

AS 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

AS 60947: Low-voltage switchgear and control gear

AS 60947.1: - General rules


SWITCHBOARDS

AS 60947.2: - Circuit-breakers

AS 60947.4.1: - Contactors and motor-starters – Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters

AS 60947.5.1: - Control circuit devices and switching elements – Electromechanical control circuit devices

AS/NZS 61558.1: Safety of power transformers, power supplies and reactors and similar products – General requirements and test (IEC 61558-1 Ed2, Mod)

36.2DESIGNStandard

To: AS/NZS 3439.1 or AS/NZS 3439.3 as required.

Circuit protection

Provide circuit protection by means of automatic circuit breakers.

Conductors

Busbars: Provide busbar circuits within the switchboard, extending from the termination of the incoming functional unit to the line side of protective equipment for outgoing functional units.

Cable interconnections: Do not use to link adjacent circuit breakers where proprietary multi-pole busbar assemblies are readily available.

Fault levels

The values given are prospective symmetrical r.m.s. values of the short-circuit current at the switchboard input terminals. Provide conductors and equipment suitable for a rated prospective short-circuit withstand current.

Fault current limiting

Do not use fuses or circuit breaker combination for fault current limiting.

Degrees of protection

To: AS 60529

Minimum degrees:

General: IP41.

Switchboards for outdoor use: IP56.

Spare facilities

Provide minimum 20% spare pole capacity.

36.3PROPRIETARY SWITCHBOARDSDefinition

Switchboards of standard design and manufacture comprising standard components and equipment layout in a single enclosure.


SWITCHBOARDS

Additional equipment or wiring

Match the switchboard manufacturer's standard of construction.

36.4ACCESSORIESIndicator lights

Standard: To: AS 60947.5.1

Incandescent:

Type: Oil tight, minimum 22 mm diameter or square.

Lamps: Changeable from the front of the panel without removing the holder.

Lamp rating: Minimum 1.2 W and maximum 5 W.

Neon lamps: 240 V, 12 mm diameter with in-built resistor.

LED: 12 or 24 V in chromium plated bezel, nominal 5 mm diameter.

Extra-low voltage transformers

Standard: To: AS /NZS 61558.1

Primary and secondary windings: Terminate on opposite sides of the transformer case.

Output loading: Do not exceed 80% of the transformer continuous rating taking account of the degree of ventilation and ambient temperature of the transformer and supplied load.

36.5LABELSMarking

For each switchboard, include labels for switchboard designation, functional units, control switches, circuit designations and ratings, fuses, warning notices, switchboard manufacturer's name and source of electrical supply for other than main switchboards. Identify separate sections of enclosures.

Fixing

Screw fix or rivet each label adjacent to the relevant item of equipment.

Material

Two colour laminated plastic, or photo anodized rigid aluminium.

36.6CIRCUIT SCHEDULEGeneral

Provide a schedule holder and typed circuit schedule and install in a purpose made holder on the inside face of the switchboard door.


LUMINAIRES

37 LUMINAIRES


Refer to the GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS section.

Additional Information

To AS 60598.1

Emergency evacuation lighting: To: AS 2293.1, AS/NZS 2293.2, and AS 2293.3

Standards

AS 2293: Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings

AS 2293.1: - System design, installation and operation

AS/NZS 2293.2: - Inspection and maintenance

AS 2293.3: - Emergency escape luminaires and exit signs

AS/NZS 60269: Low-voltage fuses


AS/NZS 60269.2.0 - Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)

AS/NZS 60269.2.1 - Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application) – Section I to VI: Example of types of standardized fuses

AS/NZS 61048: Auxiliaries for lamps – Capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent and other discharge lamp circuits – General safety requirements

37.2LUMINAIRESGeneral

Supply luminaires complete with lamps and required accessories.

Proprietary luminaires

Definition: Luminaires in current production normally available as a standard catalogue item.

Packaging

Pack luminaires and components in robust, sealed packages.

Accessories

Use starter switches, control gear and lamp holders, which are suitable for use with the lamps supplied and which allow the lamps to achieve the performance given in the lamp manufacturer's published data sheets.


LUMINAIRES

Thermal characteristics

To: AS/NZS 60269.1, AS/NZS 60269.2.0 and AS/NZS 60269.2.1

Power factor correction

Provide correction which achieves a power factor of not less than 0.85 lagging after 2 hours of continuous operation.

Standard: To: AS /NZS 61048.

37.3 INSTALLATION – HOLD POINTGeneral

Hold point - Mount luminaires on proprietary supports, brackets and hangers. If the specified mounting cannot be used, submit proposed mounting arrangements for approval. Provide screws, battens, trims, noggings, roses and packing material, as required.

Noggings: Minimum size 75 x 50 mm.

Location

Position luminaires to provide an even level of illumination throughout the room, and as follows:

Where one luminaire is required position it centrally within the room.

Position rows of luminaires so that the distance from the wall is half the distance between rows.

Suspension

Stainless steel wire

Rod: Steel pipe suspension rods fitted with gimbal joints.

Chain: Electroplated welded link chain.

Levelling: Adjust the length of suspension rods or chains so that the lighting system is level and even, maximum tolerance ± 3 mm.

Height: As indicated on the drawings

Surface mounted luminaires

Fit packing pieces to level luminaires and prevent distortion of luminaire bodies. Use packing strips to align end to end luminaires.

Fixing: Use two fixings at each end of fluorescent luminaires. A single fixing at each end in conjunction with 1.6 mm backing plates may be used for narrow luminaries. Securely fix luminaires to structural members of ceilings or walls as follows:

Fixing to timber: Steel wood screw No. 10 x 25 zinc-plated round head.

Fixing to concrete: Expanding bolts M5 x 40mm.

Fixing to hollow blocks: M5 galvanized round head screws with spring loaded butterfly toggles.

Washers: Use zinc-plated washers 3 x screw diameter under all screw heads.


LUMINAIRES

Recessed luminaires

Connect recessed troffer fluorescent luminaires to a plug socket outlet.

Low voltage luminaires

Maximum voltage drop: 5% of the transformer output voltage between the transformer and each lamp.

Light Emitting Diode / Solid State LuminairesThe luminaire must be supported by an LM-79 photometric test from a certified test laboratory.

The operating Tc temperature of the LED board and control gear must be tested in accordance to AS/NZS 60598.1 2003.

The lumen maintenance life projection must be provided for the luminaire, not just the LED board.

The colour rendering of the LED must be Ra80 or greater.

The LED must have an initial McAdams ellipse rating of 4 McAdams SDCM’s or lower.

The luminaire must conform to Australian Standards:

- AS/NZS 60598.1 2003 Luminaires Part 1: General requirements and tests. - AS/NZS CISPR 15:201 1 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance

characteristics of electrical lighting. - IEC/PAS 62722-2-1 Luminaire performance Part 2-1: Particular requirements for LED

luminaires. The luminaire's control gear must have a Certificate of Approval for prescribed items (in the case of remote drivers) or a Certificate of Suitability (for internal drivers) complying with AS/NZS 61347.1:2002 and IEC 6 1347.2.13.2006.

Standard: To: AS /NZS 61048.


COMMUNICATIONS

38 COMMUNICATIONS

38.1TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLINGGeneral

Provide a complete operational telecommunications cabling system, tested and commissioned in conformance with AS/NZS 3080, AS/ACIF S009, SAA HB 29 and as appropriate SAA HB 252 and the

NBN Co. Limited - Installation Pit and Conduit Infrastructure-Guidelines for Developers

Comply, also, with the requirements of NT Government ICT Standard "Data and Voice Cabling - Specifications and Guidelines"

Cross references


GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS.

WIRING AND ACCESSORIES, for installation requirements.

Standards

AS/NZS 3080: Telecommunications installations – Generic cabling for commercial premises (ISO/IEC 11801:2002, MOD)

AS/NZS 3084: Telecommunications installations – Telecommunications pathways and spaces for commercial buildings

AS/NZS 3085.1: Telecommunication installations – Administration of communications cabling systems – Basic requirements

AS/ACIF S009: Installation requirements for customer cabling (Wiring Rules)

SAA HB 29: Telecommunications cabling handbook

SAA HB 252: Communications cabling manual, module 3: Residential communications cabling handbook

38.2SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONAccommodation

Provide accommodation for telecommunications cabling infrastructure in conformance with AS/NZS 3084 including the detailed requirements of Appendix ZA, ZB and ZC. Include the following as documented:

Building distributor.

Backbone cabling.

Floor distributors.

Consolidation points.

Horizontal cabling.

Telecommunications outlets.

Fly leads.Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 231RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

COMMUNICATIONS

System Performance

Application class to AS/NZS 3080 clause 6.3: E.for Cat 6A and FA for Cat 7

Balanced system to AS/NZS 3080 clause 7 (data): Category 6A and Category 7

Balanced system to AS/NZS 3080 clause 7 (voice): Category 6A and Category 7

Conformance: Certify the design and installation for conformance with AS/NZS 3080 in conformance with the detailed requirements of clause 4.

System warranty: Warrant the specified communications cabling performance for a minimum of 15 years.

38.3DISTRIBUTORSCoordinate and arrange with Telecommunication Authority (Telstra, NBN) for the provision of all incoming cabling and its termination in coordination with the project programme. Pay all associated fees and charges

38.4TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETSOutlets:

Provide RJ45 8 way modular jacks except where documented otherwise.

Pinouts:

The pinouts vary with the application. Determine required pinouts before making cable terminations.

38.5CABLESInstallation

Crossover: Install cables neatly and without crossovers between cables.

Loom size: Loom cables into groups not exceeding 50 cables, and hold looms in place using re-usable cable ties at least 20 mm wide. Do not exert compressive force on the cables when installing cable straps.

Cable Separation

Low voltage cables: Separate telecommunications cables not enclosed in conduits or ducts from low voltage services by at least 150 mm.

Electromagnetic interference (EMI): Provide clearance to minimise the effect of EMI where communications cables are installed parallel and adjacent to power cables carrying loads in excess of 200 A.

Fly Leads

Quantity: Provide fly leads to 50% of the outlets installed.

Patch Cords

Provide terminated patch cords for 100% of the total incoming and outgoing ports used.

38.6EARTHING SYSTEMTender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 232RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road

COMMUNICATIONS

Communications System earth

Communication earth system (CES): Provide a communications earth terminal (CET) adjacent to each electrical switchboard. Connect the CET to the local protective earth (PE) system at the switchboard.

38.7CABLE MANAGEMENTRecord book: Provide a record book at each cross connect.

Records in pencil: Complete the records in pencil for each termination and jumper, providing origin and destination and type of service.

Location: Secure log books in each distribution frame records holder.

Identification and labelling, and record documentation: To: AS/NZS 3085.1.


MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION

39 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION

39.1GENERALRequirement

General: Provide a complete operational digital television distribution system, including cabling, antennae dish, head-end equipment, auxiliary equipment and accessories as required to complete the installation.

Provide a provisional sum (terrestrial antenna reception not available) to supply and install a VAST certified satellite free to air digital television distribution system, including cabling, antennae dish, head-end equipment, auxiliary equipment and accessories as required to complete the installation

Standards

AS/NZS 1367: Coaxial cable and optical fibre systems for the RF distribution of analogue and digital television and sound signals in single and multiple dwelling installations

39.2GENERALPerformance

General: To: AS/NZS 1367.

Signal Sources

Free-to-air bands: Provide a system suitable for the reception of all local Free-to-air services.

Cable: Arrange with the cable network operator for the connection to their cable network. Conform to the cable network operators' requirements.

Local signal source: Provide video input sockets at the premises cabling head-end for the distribution of three in-house video channels on the free-to-air network.

39.3EXECUTIONFree-to-Air Antennae

Installation: To: AS/NZS 1367.

Distribution equipment

Enclosure: Locate all active and passive distribution equipment in proprietary purpose built enclosures, located as documented.

Coaxial Cable

Standard: To: AS/NZS 1367 Appendix G.

Bending Radius: Conform to minimum bending radius manufacturer's recommendations for the size of cable.


MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION

39.4COMMISSIONING – WITNESS POINTTests

Witness point - Give notice of intention to carry out tests and demonstrate compliance with contract requirements.


FIRE DETECTION

40 FIRE DETECTION

40.1 GENERAL



WIRING AND ACCESSORIES, for cabling and accessories requirements

DOORS for fire and smoke doors

WINDOWS for window schedule

ELECTRONIC SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL for linking to fire alarms

SUSPENDED CEILINGS for maintenance access panels

DUCTWORK for in duct smoke detectors.

40.1.2 StandardsAS 1603 Automatic fire detection and alarm systems

AS 1603.2 - Point type smoke detectors

AS 1603.5 - Manual call points

AS 1603.7 - Optical beam smoke detectors

AS 1603.8 - Multi-point aspirated smoke detectors

AS 1603.11 - Visual warning devices

AS 1603.13 - Duct sampling units

AS 1670 Fire detection, warning, control and intercom systems - System design, installation and commissioning

AS 1670.1 - Fire

AS 1670.4 - Emergency warning and intercom systems

AS 1670.6 - Smoke alarms

AS 1851 Routine service of fire protection systems and equipment

AS 3013 Electrical installations - Classification of the fire and mechanical performance of wiring system elements

AS 3786 Smoke alarms using scattered light, transmitted light or ionization

AS 4178 Electromagnetic door holders

AS 4391 Smoke management systems - Hot smoke test

AS 4428 Fire detection, warning, control and intercom systems - Control and indicating equipment


FIRE DETECTION

AS 4428.1 - Fire

AS 7240 Fire detection and alarm systems

AS 7240.2 - Control and indicating equipment (ISO 7240-2:2003, MOD)

AS 7240.5 - Point type heat detectors (ISO 7240-5:2003. MOD)

AS 7240.11 - Manual call points (ISO 7240-11:2005, MOD)

AS 7240.21 - Routing equipment

40.1.3 RequirementSupply, install, connect, test and commission an automatic fire alarm system as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.

40.2 CONTRACTOR’S SUBMISSIONS - HOLD POINTHold Point - Before or on practical completion, submit the following:

An installer's statement and certificates in the form set out in AS 1670.1, Appendix F.

A system commissioning statement in the form set out in AS 1670.1 Appendix G.

Sound pressure level measurements for each occupiable compartment and acoustically separate area as in AS 1670.1 Appendix H.

An electronic copy of the As-Installed drawings in PDF and in CAD format.

At the end of the defects period make a final service visit and, upon satisfactory completion of the required procedures, submit a certificate stating that the installation is operating correctly. This is in addition to all other certificates required under this contract.

40.3 DETECTORS

40.3.1 StandardsDuct sampling detectors: To: AS 1603.13

Point type heat detectors: To: AS 7240.5

Point type smoke detectors: To: AS 1603.2

Multi-point aspirated smoke detectors: To: AS 1603.8

Optical beam smoke detectors: To: AS 1603.7

Self-contained smoke alarms: To: BCA and AS 3786

40.3.2 GeneralThe detectors shall be selected to suit the operating environment and with a view to reducing false alarms. Duct detectors shall not obstruct filters access panels and the like and shall be readily accessible.

Generally smoke detectors shall be of the photo-optical type unless noted otherwise.


FIRE DETECTION

Where detectors are fitted within the ceiling void or roof space over a fixed ceiling an access panel shall be provided to enable maintenance of the detector. (The access panel shall be provided by the builder.) The access panel shall be a minimum size of 450 mm x 450 mm.

The detector shall be small and of modern appearance to blend unobtrusively into the architectural surroundings and shall be base compatible with thermal and ionisation detectors to permit system alteration with a minimum of cost.

Field wiring to each detector shall terminate at a twist-lock base. It shall be possible to remove and replace detectors without disturbing field wiring termination. Detectors shall be of a low profile design, protruding no more than 60 mm from the installation surface when installed in the base.

The detector shall operate with two way communication over a two or three wire circuit. Self test facilities shall be incorporated into each sensor so that they can be tested remotely from the fire indicator panel.

40.3.3 IdentificationClearly and permanently mark each detector and detector base with a unique circuit or serial number engraved on the detector body. In non-habitable spaces the number may be printed on a plastic adhesive label fixed to the escutcheon plate or to a surface adjacent to the detector.

40.3.4 Self-indicating detectorProvide a light emitting diode (LED), mounted in a clearly visible position, which illuminates whenever the detector operation causes an alarm condition to register on the fire indicator panel.

Mounting position of LED:

Visible detectors: On the outside of the detector or its base.

Detectors concealed above ceilings: On the underside of the ceiling immediately below the detector.

Detectors in other concealed spaces: On a visible panel close to the entry to the concealed space housing the detector.

40.3.5 InstallationInstall detectors so that they can be easily inspected and tested in situ, and readily withdrawn from service for testing or replacement.

Integral smoke detector alarm circuits: To AS 1670.6.

40.4 CONVENTIONAL IONISATION SMOKE DETECTORSIonisation detectors, where used, shall be capable of being operated by both visible and invisible procures of combustion, and be of the dual chamber type utilising the principles of ionisation. They shall be small and of modern appearance to blend unobtrusively into the architectural surroundings and shall be listed by ActivFire as approved for use as commercial smoke detectors and shall comply with AS 1603.

The detectors shall be base compatible with conventional thermal and photo-optical detectors to permit system alteration with a minimum of cost. They shall be connected back to the fire alarm communications loop via Addressable Detector Module.


FIRE DETECTION

40.5 CONVENTIONAL PHOTO OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTORSThe photo-optical detectors shall be used unless noted otherwise and where used, shall be of the solid state photo-electronic type and shall operate on the light scattering principle. All detectors shall be factory set and shall be designed to ignore invisible air borne particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set alarm point. Maximum stability against effects of aging and dust and film accumulations shall be provided by the use of self-compensating circuitry within each detector. The detectors shall have a symmetrical optical system and a protective cover to allow good penetration of smoke, while maintaining high immunity to the effects of wind and dust accumulation. An LED shall be utilised as the detector light source. The detectors shall be designed to latch into alarm condition after a number of pulses verify the presence of smoke in the design chamber.

Where detectors are used in conjunction with air conditioning or ventilation systems, they shall be of the photo-optical type mounted in an air-sampling device. The unit, detector and sampler, must be approved for this purpose. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the correct positioning of these units to ensure there are no false alarms.

The detectors shall be connected back to the fire alarm communications loop via Addressable Detector Modules.

40.6 CONVENTIONAL THERMAL HEAT DETECTORSThe thermal detectors shall be of electro-pneumatic design and shall be available in types A, B, C and D. Generally Type A shall be installed but the tenderer shall select, subject to approval, the most suitable type of thermal detector for the environment conditions. All types of detectors shall be compatible electrically and physically.

The thermal detectors shall operate using two distinct modes of operation - rate of rise and fixed temperature. They shall be open-circuit devices and the contacts must be pure silver, operate with a wiping action and have adequate current-carrying capacity. They must also be rugged and unaffected by vibration, with all exposed parts adequately insulated and protected against corrosion. When the detector is in the alarm condition an LED indicator on the detector or on the detector mounting base shall be illuminated.

The detectors shall be connected back to the fire alarm communications loop via Addressable Detector Modules.

40.7 COMMISSIONING - WITNESS POINT

40.7.1 Commissioning testsThe Contractor shall, prior to Practical Completion, test and commission the entire installation in accordance with AS 1670.1 and in the presence of the Superintendent.

Witness Point - Submit a commissioning program to the Superintendent prior to testing:

Minimum 2 days for metropolitan location

Minimum 5 days for rural location

Minimum 8 days for remote location.

All defects found during commissioning testing or during inspections by shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Principal.

Test reports shall be delivered to the Superintendent on completion.


FIRE DETECTION

The Contractor shall supply all test equipment, instruments, tools and labour necessary to conduct the system tests. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing Contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the Superintendent if required.

All fire alarm circuits shall be tested for continuity, earth faults and short circuits.

40.7.2 Acceptance testingWitness Point - Submit a written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for compliance with this Speciation for approval by the Superintendent.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the acceptance test, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, circuits and programming. A complete listing of all device labels for alpha-numeric annunciator displays shall be prepared by the installing Contractor prior to the test. The Superintendent shall use the system record drawings in combination with the specification during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed.

In conducting the test, the Superintendent may request demonstration of any or all input and output functions. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:

System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and correct subsequent system operation in the event of:

Open and shorted analogue signalling circuit

Open and shorted device communications loop

Open and shorted remote display unit communications circuit

Open and shorted zone circuits

Removal of detectors

Power failure at the fire indicator panel

Removal of analogue sensors or addressable devices.

System indications shall be demonstrated as follows:

Correct message display for each alarm input at the fire indicator panel and each remote display

Correct zone indication for each alarm input at each annunciator.

If printer fitted, correct printer logging for all system activity.

System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows:

Correct signal transmitted for each alarm input

Fault signals received when alarm zone circuits are disconnected.

Battery and battery charger capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows:

Mains power shall be disconnected and an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified. System primary power shall be restored for twenty-four hours and the system charging current shall be at the normal charge rate for a fully charged battery bank. System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the fire indicator panel.

In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed during the acceptance test procedure, at the discretion of the Superintendent, the test shall be terminated.


FIRE DETECTION

The installing Contractor shall re-test the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test documentation to the Superintendent.

The Superintendent may elect to require the complete ATP to be performed again if, in their opinion, modifications to the system hardware or software warrant complete re-testing.

40.7.3 Hot smoke testsCarry out Hot Smoke Testing. Submit a copy of the test results to the Superintendent.

The fire Contractor shall liaise with the mechanical services Contractor to coordinate and attend Hot Smoke Testing of the smoke management system.

A separate Hot Smoke Test shall be carried out for each of the major sections of the buildings i.e. the Hot Smoke Testing shall be to AS 4391. The fire Contractor is to submit the test procedure for approval.

The Hot Smoke Tests shall be used as functional tests of the combined detection, EWIS, smoke exhaust system and any defects that arise from the test shall be rectified.

40.7.4 Additional testsRun addressable air sampling systems with logging device connected and the air handling system operational for fourteen days to verify stability of all detectors and devices.

40.8 OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE

40.8.1 Maintenance periodRoutine testing and routine maintenance and servicing will be carried out under the existing NTG Period Contract by the Principal.

Rectify faults and defects identified during the defects liability period at your own cost.

40.8.2 GeneralAttend to faults and defects within 2 hours of being notified for immediate attendance required faults and defects, within 2 working days for urgent faults and defects, within 10 working days for other faults and defects. Promptly rectify the faults and defects, including the replacement of faulty materials or equipment. Pay the cost of attendance, rectification and replacement if the fault was caused by defective materials, equipment or installation.


REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

41 PAVING




CONCRETE, for reinforced concrete pavements.

ROADS, for bituminous road pavements.

Standards

AS 1289.5: Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes - Soil compaction & density tests

AS 1289.5.4.1: - Compaction control test – Dry density ratio, moisture variation and moisture ratio

AS 1289.5.6.1: - Compaction control test – Density index method for a cohesionless material

AS 1379: Specification and supply of concrete

AS 1720: Timber structures

AS 1720.2: - Timber properties

AS 2150: Hot mix asphalt – A guide to good practice

AS 3700: Masonry structures

AS/NZS 4455: Masonry units, pavers, flags and segmental retaining wall units

AS/NZS 4455.2: - Pavers and flags

AS/NZS 4586: Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials


Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at completion of trial set-out for unit paving.

41.3MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSBedding sand

Use clean coarse sand, free from deleterious material including soluble salts or other contaminants liable to cause efflorescence or reduce skid resistance.

Particle size: Maximum particle size 4.75 mm, with a maximum of 30% passing an 0.3 mm sieve.

Mortar

To: AS 3700, Materials section, Mortar sub section.

Mix proportions: 1:3 cement: sand.



41.4PAVING GENERALLYCleaning substrates

If the paving is to be bonded to the substrate, remove oils, greases, retarders and loose material and leave the surface clean and dust-free.

Grading

Grade paving to even falls to drain away from buildings to drainage outlets without ponding. Minimum fall for drainage 1:100. Where falls are not required, lay level.

Tolerances

Pavement thickness: + unspecified, - 0.

Surface level: ± 25 mm from the specified level, ± 10 mm from a 3 m straight edge.

Adjacent surfaces: Maximum deviation across paving finish junctions: 2 mm.

Units: Maximum deviation between the surfaces of adjacent paving units such as bricks, blocks, or flags: 2 mm.

Movement joints

Provide movement joints over structural joints in the base (isolation, contraction, expansion) right through the paving and bed to the substrate. Fill joints with a compressible material.

Joint filler: Nil. Sand brush joints

Abutment with building

Where paving more than 1.5 m wide abuts the wall of a building provide a 10 mm thick Abelflex closed cell compressible filler strip between the paving and the wall.

Paving finish junctions

Where changes of paving finish occur in doorways, make the junction directly beneath the closed door or gate.

Dividing strip: Insert a dividing strip the full width of junctions between different paving finishes, with the top edge flush with the finished paving. Embed in solid finishes, or screw fix to the substrate.

41.5BASE COURSEGeneral

Provide base course for bituminous paving and unit paving.

Preparation

Prepare the subgrade by regrading as necessary to accommodate the thickness of the base course and paving. If necessary, loosen the ground to a depth of 200 mm and adjust the moisture content before compaction. Compact the ground to the required density.



Base course material

Use crushed rock consisting of hard, dense, durable particles free from deleterious material, of nominal size 25 mm, uniformly graded, with not more than 10% passing an 0.075 mm sieve.

Placing

Spread and compact the base course to the required thickness and density. Adjust the moisture content as needed to facilitate compaction.

Required density

To: AS 1289.5

Sub-grade:

Cohesive soils: Minimum dry density ratio (modified compaction) to AS 1289.5.4.1: 100%.

Cohesionless soils: Minimum density index to AS 1289.5.6.1: 80%.

Base: Minimum dry density ratio (modified compaction) to AS 1289.5.4.1: 100%.

Levels

Finished surface tolerance: + 5, - 20 mm from the correct level.

Base course schedulePavement type Minimum base course thickness (mm)

2 100 – refer civil drawings

41.6BITUMINOUS PAVINGHot mix paving

Use 25 mm thick asphaltic concrete paving placed and compacted over the prepared base course to AS 2150.

Mix designation: AC7.

Binder type: Class 320 bitumen.

Tack coating: Cut back bitumen or bitumen emulsion.

41.7UNIT PAVINGMasonry units

Use paving units of clay, natural stone or concrete masonry, purpose-made for use as paving, or units made for bonded masonry construction but suitable for paving.

Minimum compressive strength:

Clay units: 7 MPa when tested to AS/NZS 4455.2

Concrete units: 12 MPa when tested to AS/NZS 4455.2

Slip resistance: To: AS/NZS 4586



Cutting units

Cut paving units to maintain sharp arrises and accurate joints and margins.

Laying unit paving

Sand bedding course: Over the base course lay the units on bedding sand screeded to a uniform thickness not exceeding 50 mm, and to the required falls and levels. Do not disturb the screeded sand bedding before the units are laid. Provide a 1 mm to 3 mm wide gap between adjoining pavers. After laying tamp the units with a vibrating plate compactor. Provide edge restraint where needed to support the sand bedding and maintain the paving shape.

Mortar bedding course: Over concrete base slabs, lay units on a mortar bedding course a minimum 12 mm thick.

Laying pattern: Refer drawings – or “off-set square” if not detailed

Edge restraint: Feathered (150mm) concrete edge and then backfilled over feathered edge with natural ground / earth

Paving joints

Dry joints: Fill the joints flush with clean, fine sand or screened bedding sand passing a 1.18 mm sieve, vibrated into the joints with two further passes of the vibrating plate compactor.

Mortar joints: Fill the joints flush with mortar and trowel smooth. Clean paving progressively to remove mortar smears and discolouration.

41.8 IN SITU CONCRETE PAVINGConcrete

To: AS 1379; Grade N25.

Minimum Thickness

Foot and bicycle traffic and light domestic traffic occasionally up to 3 tonne gross; 100mm.

Preparation

Trim the ground to accommodate the required thickness of concrete and compact to a firm, even surface. Provide formwork for sides and stop ends.

Sand bed: > or = 50mm

Control joints

Form tooled joints at maximum 2m spacing.

Expansion joints

Cast in 10 mm thick Ableflex closed cell compressible filler strip at maximum 6m spacing.

Finishing

Wood float and broom to an even textured slip-resistant surface with steel tooled margins. On gradients steeper than 10% roughen the surface by scoring across the slope at 50 mm centres.



41.9GRAVEL PAVINGStabilized gravel paving

Use 3% Portland cement content.

Laying: Lay the mix to finish 100 mm thick minimum after compaction.

Compaction: Compact to achieve a dry density ratio of 100% when tested to AS 1289.5.4.1 (Modified compaction).

Edge restraint

100 mm by 50 mm timber edging fixed to 50 mm square timber pegs at 1200 mm centres or as required to maintain the paving shape. Place pegs on the planting side of the edging with the top flush with the edging.

Timber: Use hardwood with Natural Durability Class 1 to AS 1720.2.

Gravel driveways

Location: Hardstand, driveways and paths as shown on the drawings.

Material: Approved road gravel - Type 3.

Thickness: Minimum 100 mm after compaction.

Falls: Minimum 1:100.

Compaction: Compact to achieve dry density ratio of 95% when tested to AS 1289 5.4.1. (Modified compaction)



42 FENCING


Refer to MASONRY for block fences and walls.

Refer to PAVING.


Standards

AS 1074: Steel tubes & tubulars for ordinary services

AS/NZS 1163: Cold-formed structural steel hollow sections


AS 1379: Specification and supply of concrete


AS 1926: Swimming pool safety

AS 1926.1: - Safety barriers for swimming pools

AS 2423: Coated steel wire fencing products for terrestrial, aquatic and general use.

AS/NZS 2728: Prefinished/ prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior building applications-Performance requirements






42.2MATERIALS AND COMPONENTSSteel tubesPosts, rails, stays: to AS 1725.1 - 2010 - class 1 medium quality.

Refer tables B1.

Metal ComponentsSelf-drilling screws: To meet AS 3566.1 for General requirements and AS 3566.2 for corrosion resistance.

Steel fence framing: To meet AS 1725.1 - 2010 - class 1 medium quality.

Galvanise steel components as follows:



Threaded fasteners: To meet AS 1214. Other components: To meet AS 1650 or AS/NZS 4680

WireCable wire, tie wire: To meet AS 1725.1 - 2010. Class 1 medium quality.

Coating mass for galvanized wire: Type A. 2mm diameter wire, same coating quality as the chain link fabric. Consideration may be given to approved stainless steel zip ties in lieu of wire ties.

Chain link fabric fencing Heavy duty galvanised, W10Z/HG/KB, 1200mm wide, 3.15 mm diameter wire woven to

form uniform 50 mm mesh. With selvedge’s linked and folded over (Knuckle-Knuckle). Selvedges must not be

barbed. Tie Fix detail – Secure Fencing Mesh to Top Rail with tie wire on every second diamond

with twitch at the bottom– CONTINUOUS SPIRAL WIRE FIXING SHALL NOT BE USED.

42.3 INSPECTIONSThe Contractor must.

Give a minimum of 48 hour written or verbal and confirmed notice to the tenants:

(a) For inspection of sites and scoping.(b) For fencing set out and preliminary ground marking.(c) Prior to excavation and the placing of posts & concrete.It is a requirement for the contractor to paint/mark the ground along the proposed installation boundary this will enable the tenants and neighbours to see the proposed construction line, to give feedback about the location and to articulate any concerns they may have.

The contractor will;

a) Advise the tenants and neighbours of the intended location.b) Paint/mark the intended location on the ground.c) Re confirm with all parties that the proposed location has been agreed upon and is

approved. d) Ensure that there are no outstanding impediments prior to proceeding with the works.

42.4CONSTRUCTION GENERALLYAustralian StandardsThe contractor is required to acquire, maintain and have available all the relevant Australian Standards used and referenced within this document.

Clearing

Site work will only commence when and if AAPA certificates are in hand and when all other site and community approvals have been issued and noted in writing.

This process must be undertaken for each specific site or lot where works will be taking place and advice given to all the adjacent properties where the works may encroach.

When approved, clear vegetation from the fence alignment, grub out the stumps and roots of removed trees or shrubs and trim the grass to ground level, but do not remove the topsoil.



Setout

Setout the fence lines and mark the positions of gates, posts and bracing panels.

Excavation

With all approvals in hand excavate post holes so that they have vertical sides and a firm base.

Spread any surplus material on the principal's side of the fence.

SpotterIt is a mandatory requirement that during all digging and excavation activities that there be a spotter or watchman on hand to continually monitor the excavation works and to advise the operator of any potential or identified dangers associated with sacred sites, sites of cultural significance, power, water, sewage, or any other underground or overhead services.

Minimum footing sizes for galvanised chain mesh fencingA minimum of 300mm diameter or 300mm square X 600mm deep for intermediate posts and 900mm deep for strainer, corner or gate posts is required.

Line and level

Erect posts vertically to follow the contours of natural ground level.

There is to be a minimum gap of 100mm or less between the finished ground level and the bottom of the finished fence or gates at any point along the entire boundary. Infill with soft and removable soil is not acceptable practice to minimise this gap.

Concrete footings

Place mass concrete around posts and finish with a weathered top falling from the post to ground level.

Steel panel fencing

Ensure bottom rails have drain holes and are at least 50 mm clear of the ground or mowing strip.

Mowing strips

Where required provide a 200 x 75 mm deep concrete mowing strip under the centreline of the fence to finish 20 mm above finished ground level.

42.5GATESGeneral

Construction: Construct gates to match the fencing and in the locations shown on drawings or as directed.

Hardware: Provide the following:

Drop bolt and ferrule to each leaf of double gates.

Latch to one leaf of double gates.

Provision for locking by padlock.

Hinges to ensure smooth operation.

Hand access: Provide hand holes to give access from outside to reach locking provision.



Gates to swimming pool enclosures: To: AS 1926.1

42.6 CHAIN-LINK MESH FENCINGGenerallyProvide chain-link mesh fencing and all associated components as required for the installation and to meet the best quality standards of. AS 1725.1 – 2010, class 1, medium quality.

Fence height: Nominally 1200mm chain wire. Post spacing: 3000 mm maximum. Number of rails: Top rails only. Chain Wire: Heavy duty galvanised, W10Z/HG/KB,1200mm wide,

3.15 mm diameter wire woven to form uniform 50 mm diamond mesh with selvedge’s linked and folded over (Knuckle-Knuckle). Selvedges must not be barbed.

Galvanised post and rail sizesComponent sizes to match those specified - compliant with AS1725.1-2010

Intermediate posts: 40 mm N.B., 3.2 mm wall thickness

End, corner and gate posts: 80 mm N.B., 4.0 mm wall thickness

Top Rails: 40 mm N.B., 3.2 mm wall thickness

Gate frame & brace tubes: 32 mm N.B., 3.2 mm wall thickness

Straining wires: 3.15mm diameter heavily galvanised

NOTE:

All welds are to be treated with a cold gal paint system or preferably all posts can be pre finished, hot dip galvanised.

All posts will have 75mm concrete cover from the bottom of the footing when installed.

All extended posts or rails will have firm fitting galvanised end caps fitted.

Tie wire: 2 mm diameter.

Ties are to be installed individually at every second diamond, not in a continuous spiral.

Tie twitch is to be located at or near the bottom of the rail and bent over to ensure that any sharp edges are finished tightly against the bottom of the rail.

Consideration may be given to approved stainless steel zip ties in lieu of wire ties if deemed suitable and affordable.

GatesConstruction: Construct gates to match the fencing and in the locations shown on drawings or as determined on site.

Hardware: Provide the following:

Drop bolt and ferrule to the 2.4 wide gates. (Drop bolt should not be removable) Latch to one leaf of double gates. Provision for locking by padlock. Supply and install two x 300sq x 300 deep concrete drop bolt blocks fitted with a 25mm

diameter bolt ferrule. 1 x close location, 1 x open location. All hardware to be welded in place



Ensure that all gates do not rub, scrape or bind on the surrounding ground level and that they are fully operational through their entire travel as intended.

Hand access: Install a locking provision in a position allowing access from outside or provide hand holes to give access from outside to reach locking provision to all gates.

Gates widthsCar gates: (comprising 2 leaves) minimum 3500 mm opening and up to 4000mm maximum

Personal gates: 1000 mm minimum gate width.

Installation – Generally

Fit tightly fitting steel caps to all extended posts. Connect posts and rails with approved pipe fittings. Use fixed fittings for 90 degree connections only. For all other angle connections use multi-purpose fittings.

Footing type: Concrete to meet AS 1379 Grade N25.

Footing size: As shown on drawings (Detail 1)

Hinges: Approved clamp-on hinges in required positions

42.7 FENCING - DETAILED CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTSAs referenced on drawings:

Detail 1 – Chain link fabric fencing construction requirements – minus the bottom rail

The supplied drawings are generic only, and should be referenced as a guide. Top rail only with tensioned bottom wire.



43 LANDSCAPE




GROUNDWORKS, for environmental protection, site clearing, trees to be retained, spoil disposal, filling and topsoil removal.

STORMWATER, for drainage.

PAVING and ROADS, for paths and paving.

FENCING, for fences.

IRRIGATION, for water reticulation to landscape areas.

Standards

AS 1289.5: Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes - Soil compaction & density tests

AS 1289.5.4.1: - Compaction control test – Dry density ratio, moisture variation and moisture ratio

AS 1604: Specification for preservative treatment

AS 1604.1: - Sawn & round timber

AS 1684: Residential timber-framed construction.

AS 1684.3: - Cyclonic areas

AS 3600: Concrete structures

AS 3610: Formwork for concrete

AS 4373: Pruning of amenity trees

AS 4419: Soils for landscaping & garden use




Subgrades cultivated or prepared for placing topsoil.

Grassing bed prepared prior to turfing, seeding, or temporary grassing.

Set out of planting holes prior to excavation.

Plant holes excavated and prepared for planting.



43.3CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONSGeneral

Submit the following data:

Supplier's data: Including

certificate identifying seed species and germination viability;

material source of supply; and

recommendations for planting and maintenance of plants.

Product warranty: The supplier's written statement certifying that plants are true to the required species and type, are free from diseases, pests and weeds, and comply with contract requirements.

43.4PREPARATIONWeed eradication

Eradicate weeds by environmentally acceptable methods using a non-residual glyphosate herbicide in any of its registered formulae, at the recommended maximum rate.

Vegetative spoil

Remove all vegetative spoil from site. Do not burn.

Earth mounds

Place clean filling in layers approximately 150mm thick compacted to 85% of the dry density ratio of the surrounding soil as determined by AS 1289.5.4.1. Minimize slumping and further internal packing down. Construct changes in grade over a minimum width of 500mm to smooth, gradual and rounded profiles.

43.5SUBSOILRipping

Rip parallel to the final contours wherever possible. Do not rip when the subsoil is wet or plastic. Do not rip within the dripline of trees to be retained.

Ripping depths: Rip the subsoil to the following typical depths:

Compacted subsoil: 300mm.

Heavily compacted clay subsoil: 450mm.

Ripline planting areas: 800mm.

Cultivation

Cultivate to a minimum depth of 150mm below required subgrade levels. Do not disturb services or tree roots; if necessary cultivate these areas by hand. During cultivation, thoroughly mix in any materials required to be incorporated into the subsoil. Cultivate manually within 300 mm of paths or structures. Remove stones or, clods of earth exceeding 50mm, and any weeds, rubbish or other deleterious material brought to the surface during cultivation. Trim the surface to the required design levels after cultivation.



Cultivation depths: Cultivate the subsoil to the following typical depths:

Grassed areas: (Seeded, turf, strip turf, stolonized): 150mm.

Direct seeding areas: 150mm.

Hydroseeded or hydromulched areas: 150mm.

Planting areas: 300mm.

Additives

Apply additives after ripping or cultivation and incorporate into the upper 100mm layer of the subsoil.

"Tropigro Clay Breaker": Incorporate at the rate of 0.25 kg/m² or 0.5 kg per hole.

43.6TOPSOILDefinitions

Site topsoil: Soil excavated from the site which has the following characteristics:

Contains organic matter.

Supports plant life.

Free from unwanted matter.

Approved for reuse on site as topsoil.

Imported topsoil: Described by the following terms (or their equivalents) which comply generally with the texture classifications and typical uses of AS 4419:

Fine (loam, silt, clay loam).

Medium (sandy loam).

Coarse (sandy soil).

Topsoil mixture: Topsoil, soil conditioners or other additives, thoroughly mixed before placing.

Top dressing: Coarse soil to AS 4419, suitable for application to turf or grass areas.

Source

Import topsoil from an approved off-site source unless the topsoil type can be provided from material recovered from the site.

Placing topsoil

Spread the topsoil on the prepared subsoil and grade evenly, making the necessary allowances to permit the following:

Required finished levels and contours may be achieved after light compaction.

Grassed areas may be finished flush with adjacent hard surfaces such as kerbs, paths and mowing strips.

Consolidation

Compact lightly and uniformly in 150 mm layers. Avoid differential subsidence and excess compaction and produce a finished topsoil surface which has the following characteristics:



Finished to design levels.

Smooth and free from stones or lumps of soil in excess of 50 mm diameter.

Graded to drain freely, without ponding, to catchment points.

Graded evenly into adjoining ground surfaces.

Ready for planting.

Topsoil depths

Spread topsoil to the following typical depths:

Planting areas: 300mm.

Irrigated grassed areas generally: 150mm.

Non-irrigated grass areas: 100mm.

Surplus topsoil

Spread surplus topsoil on designated areas on site, if any; otherwise, dispose off site.

43.7 IRRIGATIONStandardsAS 1074: Steel tubes & tubulars for ordinary servicesAS 2698: Plastic pipes and fittings for irrigation and rural applications

AS 2698.2: Polyethylene rural pipe

DescriptionUse a fixed location type with automatically operated drippers to all plants. The system shall have a life span of at least 2 years.Grassed areas to be watered manually.Performancecoverage (mm of water over area to be watered): 50 mm per week during the establishment period and then progressively hardening off the local conditions.

43.8PLANTING ESTABLISHMENTPeriodThe planting establishment period commences at the date of practical completion.Required period: 3 months.Recurrent worksThroughout the planting establishment period, carry out maintenance work including watering, mowing, weeding, rubbish removal, fertilizing, pest and disease control, reseeding, staking and tying, replanting, cultivating, pruning, aerating, reinstatement of mulch, renovating, top dressing, and keeping the site neat and tidy.ReplacementsContinue to replace failed, damaged or stolen plants.Grassed areasCommence grass maintenance works at the completion of sowing.Stakes and tiesRemove those no longer required at the end of the planting establishment period.



Temporary fencesRemove temporary protective fences at the end of the planting establishment period.



44 GENERAL EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS

44.1 SCOPEThis section specifies requirements applicable to all types of water supply and sewerage construction works and includes requirements for establishment, notice of stages of work, preparatory work, construction safety, protection of the works and as constructed information.

If Site Services drawings are not provided within the RFT, the Tenderer shall make allowance for the excavation and to a length of 20 meters of site services excavations and to the full requirements of the Local Supply Authorities, and Local Government.

If further distance is required, this shall be at a negotiated and approved sum with the Principal, prior to works commencing.

44.2 ALLOWANCE FOR BUILDING PAD EARTHWORKS: Where site preparation drawings and information for specific sites are not provided within the RFT, the Tenderer is to make allowance for the following:

(a) Allow for cut of 500mm, and compacted selected fill of 500mm for the building pad, making further allowance for appropriate batters(s). Refer to clause 5.1 for any additional fill required.

Materials for building pad earthworks are as described within the RFT.

Where required, use material cut from the site as fill, and subsequently compacted to 95mmdd.

These options are to be priced within the Response Schedule, and the selected rate(s) used in adjusting the Contract Sum after site preparation details are provided to the Contractor.

44.3 STANDARDSThe following standards are referred to and form part of this specification:

AS 1742.3 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices - Traffic Control Devices for Works on Roads

AS 2187.1 Explosives - Storage Transport and Use - Storage

AS 2187.2 Explosives - Storage Transport and Use - Use of Explosives

AS 2865 Safe Working in a Confined Space

44.4 ESTABLISHMENT44.4.1 MobilisationMake all necessary arrangements for mobilising labour and plant, accommodation including inspection, liaison and all other works necessary for the proper commencement of the Works. Not more than 10% of total contract price (check measurement section)

44.4.2 DemobilisationProvide for removal from site of all plant, excess materials, clean-up, administration and all other Works necessary for vacating the site at the final completion of the Works. Not more than 5% of the total contract price (check measurement section).

44.4.3 Ongoing ItemsProvide for all necessary ongoing costs, surveys, site offices, and the like.



44.5 NOTICE OF STAGES OF WORK - WITNESS POINTWitness Point: Give not less than 24 (48) hours notice to the Superintendent of commencement of the following stages of work:

Setting out Clearing Excavation Sample collection for conformance testing Placement of pipe bedding Pipe laying and jointing pouring of concrete in foundations and structures. Placement of side support Placement of overlay Pipe testing Backfilling Surface ReinstatementThe stages of the work shall be as agreed between the Contractor and the Superintendent

44.6 PREPARATORY WORK44.6.1 Inspection of Site - Hold PointHold Point: Before commencing work on site. Assess restrictions and access, the locations of all obstructions over or near the line of the work, and the condition and dimensions of the existing sewers, sewer structures, house drains, house drainage structures, water mains and water services. Liaise with all authorities to determine the extent of all fees and charges applicable to the work, including road reinstatement.

Hold Point: Before commencing excavation, arrange to be accompanied on a site inspection by the Superintendent. Note all services pointed out by the Superintendent and any other instructions regarding the extent of clearing, protection of existing structures, etc.

Before commencing excavation or use of explosives, provide to the Superintendent a photographic record of the pipeline route, and in particular, structures, buildings and facilities that may be affected by the construction works.

Contact all relevant authorities to determine locations and depth of all existing services.

Where work is to be carried out within an existing road reserve contact the relevant road authority to confirm requirements, e.g. for line or thrust boring, special provision for traffic, road opening permits, etc.

44.6.2 Work in Private Property - Witness PointBefore entry into private property, or starting work in private property, give at least 48 hours verbal and written notice to the owner and occupants.

Witness Point: Advise the Superintendent at least 24 hours before making this approach, so that the Superintendent may attend, if desired. Include in this notice:

The intended extent of clearing and temporary relocation of structures as required. The period for which work within or access to the particular property is required. The name and telephone number of the Superintendent. The name and telephone number of the Contractor’s Representative.Provide an undertaking to reinstate the site to as near as practicable of its original condition, immediately after work is completed in the property.Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 258RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road


Do not enter into any dispute or disagreement with the owner or occupier. Refer all disagreements to the Superintendent.

Only the Contractor’s Representative nominated in the above notice shall have any communication with the occupant for the duration of the Contract.

44.6.3 Work in Road Reserves and Council LandBefore commencing work in road reserves and Council lands, give a minimum of 14 days notice to Council of the works proposed including clearing or pruning works or works affecting traffic access.

44.6.4 Surveys for Hydraulic Works - Hold PointSet out the works as shown on the drawings.

Obtain the services of a Licensed Surveyor to re-establish boundary pegs in order to set out the works and record the ‘As Constructed’ location of the works to MGA 94 coordinates and AHD levels.

Bench marks are available at the locations shown on the drawings. Check the accuracy of all temporary bench marks before setting out the works.

Hold Point: Obtain the Superintendent’s approval of all pegged pipeline alignments and structure locations prior to commencing excavation.

Protect all survey and boundary pegs from damage during execution of the works. Reinstate disturbed or damaged marks with the services of a licensed surveyor at no cost to the Principal.

44.6.5 Provision for Traffic and Property Access – Witness PointGENERAL: Conduct all operations so as to offer the least possible obstruction and inconvenience to the public. Ensure safe and efficient conduct of traffic through or around the site of the works at all times.

Conform to AS1742 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices: Part 3 Traffic Control Devices for Works on Roads.

‘Traffic’ includes, but is not limited to, all vehicles licensed to operate on public roads as well as bicycles, pedestrians, animals and animal drawn vehicles.

‘Road’ means any road, pavement, track, footpath, structure or area used by traffic.

Provide and maintain such side tracks, traffic control and warning devices as may be required and as further defined herein. Make all applications to the relevant authorities and comply with any requirements of those authorities. Make such applications not less than 14 days before work on roadways is required.

Witness Point: Approved traffic management plan to be submitted to the Superintendent 48 hours before commencement of related section of works.

Adhere to the approved Traffic Control Plan at all times.

Advise Superintendent of any approved amendments to Traffic Control Plan.

ACCESS TO ADJACENT PROPERTY AND SIDE ROADS: At all times provide reasonable and satisfactory access to adjacent properties and side roads. Take into account the type of traffic normally requiring access and the frequency with which access is required. Where it is necessary to provide alternative access, supply and erect signs identifying the route to be followed. The detail and size shall be in accordance with AS 1742.3 and as approved by the Superintendent.

TEMPORARY BRIDGING OF EXCAVATIONS: Construct temporary bridging soundly and of sufficient strength to carry the loads imposed in accordance with the requirements of the Ausroads Bridge Design specification. Provide return fencing or guard railing so as to prevent Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 259RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road


accidental entry to the excavation or the feature being bridged. Fix decking securely so as to prevent dislodgement by the traffic.

44.6.6 Clearing - Hold PointHold Point: Obtain the approval of the Superintendent as to the extent of clearing to be undertaken at least seven days before commencing clearing.

Generally, clearing will be permitted in a strip located centrally over the pipeline in accordance with the Construction Environmental Management Plan. Storage of spoil and construction materials including movement of vehicles is to be limited to this strip.

Clear trees, shrubs, undergrowth, roots, rubbish and obstacles from the area of the excavation excluding those trees and obstacles specified in the drawings or directed by the Superintendent to be preserved.

Protect existing trees from damage which are required to be retained. Do not remove topsoil from the areas within the dripline of the trees and keep the area free of construction equipment and materials.

If a tree, which is marked to be retained, is damaged and repair work is considered impractical, or is attempted and fails, remove the tree and the root system, if so directed. Replace the tree with a tree of the same species and similar condition and size or pay compensation.

Compensation for damage to trees to be retained shall be borne by the Contractor as a negative variation to the Contract and determined Refer Tree Valuation rate table – section 12.4 : Error: Reference source not found – Page 55

Burning of cleared material is not permitted. Remove all such material from the site and pay any disposal fees.

Do not damage trees and other property outside the area approved for clearing.

PRIVATE PROPERTY: In addition to the above requirements, comply with the following:

Hold Point: Before commencing work on site provide a photographic or video record of the site as directed by the Superintendent.

There shall be no extra costs to the Principal if the Superintendent does not permit the extent of clearing requested by the Contractor.

Where the size of plants in private gardens permits, remove plant intact, care for and replant them after backfilling. Where the plant size does not permit removal, employ tunnelling or other suitable methods to allow the plants to remain in position.

EXCESS CLEARING: Where excess clearing has taken place beyond that specified or shown on the drawings, pay compensation for the damage and rehabilitate the areas in accordance with the reinstatement requirements.

COMPENSATION: Pay compensation (To be charged as a negative variation to the Contract) for excess clearing at the rate of $ 150.00 per square metre.

44.6.7 Grubbing - Witness PointGrub out tree roots, stumps, etc. only where these will interfere with construction work.

Grub out all trees, stumps, roots and scrub on a strip of width (to be inserted in accordance with Construction Environmental Management Plan centrally over the pipe alignment.

Witness Point: Dispose of all grubbed material in an approved manner.

44.6.8 Mulching - Witness PointGENERAL; Mulch all cleared vegetative matter in mechanical brush chippers to a maximum size of 100mm as the clearing work proceeds. Do not stockpile cleared material for later mulching.



STUMPS; Stumps and other material unsuitable for mulching may be buried in disused gravel pits during rehabilitation of the pits.

GRASSES; Do not mulch grass clods, roots or other components containing viable propagules. This material may be buried in disused gravel pits.

STOCKPILES; Stockpile mulched material on the site at a maximum height of 2m for use during reinstatement work.

URBAN AREAS; Stockpile mulch on the site for reuse and deliver surplus mulch as directed by the Superintendent (within 10 kms of the site) for use in local landscaping projects.

RURAL AREAS: Stockpile mulch on the site for reuse and power blow surplus mulch into the adjacent natural vegetated areas adjacent to the works.

44.6.9 Stripping Topsoil and Pavement Material - Witness PointWitness Point: Strip topsoil from the area to be excavated and stockpile in an approved manner for later surface reinstatement.

Topsoil, lawn sods, etc. may be excavated with all other materials and on backfill replaced with approved topsoil. Similarly pavement material may be excavated without separation, provided it is replaced with similar approved material.

44.6.10 Precutting Bituminous or Concrete SurfacesPrior to excavation of trenches, precut bituminous seal, bituminous concrete and concrete by a suitable method to obtain a clean straight edge 200mm wider than the excavation width against which surface repairing material can be finished to a standard comparable to the adjacent surfaces prior to commencement of work.

44.7 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF THE WORKS 44.7.1 GeneralCarry out construction work in accordance with the current Northern Territory of Australia Workplace Health and Safety Act, Dangerous Goods Act and any associated Regulations and Codes of Practice.

Provide safe exit and entry to the work place and as prescribed in the Work Health Act and maintain a safe working environment.

Inform the NT Worksafe at least 7 days prior to the intention to start work, pay all fees due and obtain any necessary permits. Comply with all directions of NT WorkSafe Officers.

44.7.2 Use of Explosives - Hold Point Use of explosives is not permitted. Before undertaking any work with explosives, obtain advice from NT Worksafe.

Hold Point: Use explosives only where approved by the Superintendent.

Hold Point: Supply all explosives, detonators and associated materials and all ancillary plant and other materials. Obtain all necessary licences and permits and approval of the Superintendent before commencing blasting in any section. Keep such permits on site at all times. All storage, handling, transport and detonation of explosives is to be controlled by the holder of a current NT Shotfirer’s Certificate.

Certificates or authorisations will be required for people carrying out certain classes of work associated with dangerous goods.

CODES AND STANDARDS: Comply with AS 2187, Parts 1 and 2, AS 1742 and The Northern Territory Dangerous Goods Act and Regulations.



DEFINITION OF APPROVED: The definition of Approved as defined in AS 2187.1 applies where there is a Statutory Authority (NT Worksafe). In all cases, approved means approved by the Superintendent.

VEHICLE FOR TRANSPORT OF EXPLOSIVES: Use vehicles having the body constructed without any exposed iron or steel in the interior thereof, and closed or otherwise suitably covered over.

The vehicle must be registered and in a state of good repair.

To minimise fire hazard keep the engine, pan chassis and body clean and free from grease with the batteries and wiring located so that neither may come into contact with the explosives, and with all wiring completely insulated and securely fastened so as to prevent short circuiting and the risk of fire.

Ensure that the explosives are suitably contained in packages which will prevent metals coming into contact with the explosives. Under no circumstance carry loose explosives on any vehicle.

Do not transport explosives after sunset or before sunrise.

BLASTING MATS: Use blasting mats when working in the vicinity of roads, streets, houses or other public buildings or in any area where flying stones or other material may possibly cause damage to persons, animals or property, or where directed by the Superintendent.

TIMING, SIZE AND NUMBER OF CHARGES: The Superintendent shall have the power to limit the size and number of charges to be fired at any one time, and the times at which blasting will be permitted.

Hold Point: PUBLIC UTILITIES AND PRIVATE PROPERTY: Do not blast within 5 metres of any existing water main, sewer pipeline, other public utility, or any building or structure, without approval in writing by the Superintendent.

VIBRATION CONTROL: The NT Worksafe and/or Superintendent may require a shotfirer to monitor, in an approved manner, the intensity of ground vibration arising from blasting, where blasting is carried out in the proximity of a building or other structure. The shotfirer shall monitor the ground vibrations with approved equipment.

Monitor the intensity of ground vibrations at private buildings, water reticulation lines or other locations as directed by the chief Inspector and/or the Superintendent.

Ensure that peak particle velocities resulting from blasting operation do not exceed the values given in Table 11.2 of AS 2187.2.

Treat cement lined water mains and concrete drainage pipes as Type 1 structures.

44.7.3 Shoring of Excavation Supply, put in place and maintain such sheeting and bracing as required to support the wall of the excavation and to prevent any movement which can in any way injure or endanger persons, any adjacent pavements, building, conduits or other structures as prescribed in the construction safety rules.

Alternative methods of ensuring safety of trenches, such as shoring with materials other than timber, provision of shields, batters or shelving may be submitted to NT Worksafe for consideration. The Superintendent retains the right to withhold permission to use any proposed method. If approval is given to battering or shelving the sides of trenches, no additional payment will be made. Meet the full costs of extra excavation and restoration and for any required increase in pipe strength. The responsibility for stability of any such battering or shelving remains with the Contractor.

The Superintendent may direct to leave in place, to be embedded in the backfill, any sheeting or bracing except that within 1.5 m of the finished surface. Do not construe the right of the Superintendent to order sheeting and bracing to be left in place as an obligation on his part to Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 262RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road


issue such orders. The Contractor has total responsibility for any caving or moving of the ground adjacent to the excavation and subsequent damage irrespective of whether the Superintendent issues orders to leave shoring in place.

All sheeting and bracing which is not necessary to leave in place for the protection of the sewer or adjacent structures as provided for above may be removed as the excavation is backfilled in such a manner as not to endanger the pipeline or adjacent structures. Remove all sheeting and bracing within 1.5 m of the surface unless otherwise directed by the Superintendent.

44.7.4 Fencing of Excavations Fence excavations, open access chambers and mounded spoil in accordance with the Workplace Health and Safety Regulations, and NT Worksafe requirements. A contractor undertaking construction work has an obligation under the Workplace Health and Safety legislation to ensure that the public and workers are protected from hazards associated with the work. Approved prefabricated modular type temporary fencing at least 1800mm high securely anchored to the ground is to be provided around the site perimeter.

44.7.5 Special Precautions Ensure that all persons on site are supplied with and use appropriate safety equipment including but not limited to: hard hats, safety glasses, safety footwear, hearing protection, and any other equipment required by law, Statutory authority requirement or industry practice where it exceeds the requirements of this specification.

Wear safety helmets when working in trenches.

Live sewers, access chambers, pumping station sumps, sewer siphons and other deep excavations are considered to be confined spaces. Adhere to the requirements of AS 2865, the Workplace Health and Safety Act and current Power and Water work directives. Ensure that only persons competent to work in confined spaces, trained by the Power and Water Corporation and authorised to do so are permitted to work in those places. Ensure that one person capable of effecting rescue, is on safety watch at the surface at all times.

When working in or near live trunk sewers, be aware of the dangers resulting from the presence of toxic hydrogen sulphide gas and irregular surges of sewer flow which may result from pumps starting up. Provide forced ventilation to disperse dangerous gases whenever work is being done in access chambers or near trunk sewers.

Do not smoke or use cigarette lighters, matches or any other form of open flame in the vicinity of open sewer mains and access chambers.

When working inside access chambers, pump station, or other deep pits provide rescue equipment and facilities as required by Work Health (Occupational Health and Safety) Regulations. This may include, but is not limited to: safety harness, gas masks, gas detection equipment, air bottles and lines, tripod, winching apparatus, field aid facilities.

44.7.6 Construction LoadsDo not subject pipes to loads during construction which exceed the loads to which they will be subjected during normal service in the finally installed situation. Handle pipes in such a manner, and with such equipment as to preserve their dimensional and physical properties, and to avoid damage to the pipes.

Take all precautions necessary to prevent damage, including excessive deflection, to pipelines during construction. This is particularly important during compaction of pipe bedding and backfill. Make good any damage to pipes, including if necessary, replacement of pipes and pipeline reconstruction at own expense.

44.7.7 Protection and Support of Existing Services and Structures Provide support and protection to all existing structures and services that might be affected by the works but are not required to be shifted. This includes, but is not limited to, trees, shrubs, Tender - National Public Works Council (NPWC) PAGE 263RFT-0854-384-001 – Katherine – Borroloola – Redevelopment of Borroloola Government Business Hub Lot 384 Robinson Road


water mains, electrical and Telstra/communications conduits, sewers, stormwater pipes, power poles, railway lines, retaining wall and buildings. Support includes all necessary measures, such as shoring, bracing and underpinning. To avoid damage to existing items or structures, excavated by hand if necessary instead of machinery.

Where existing items such as trees, walls etc. but not services are damaged, restore or replace to their original condition.

Where it is necessary to have existing services diverted in order to construct the works, obtain the concurrence and approval of the Superintendent, then arrange the diversions with the appropriate authorities and pay all charges. Unless otherwise specified submit a claim for the cost of such diversions, supported by receipts from the appropriate authorities.

44.7.8 Power LinesCarry out work in accordance with the requirements of NT Worksafe and PWC. Do not permit any part of construction plant such as an excavator or crane or any part of a load carried by such plant to come closer than 3m from the power line conductors At all times when such plant is in operation below or within 6 m of overhead lines, position an observer whose sole duty is to provide advice and warning to the operators regarding proximity of the lines and potential breaches of required clearances. Refer to NT Worksafe Information Bulletins.

44.7.9 Demolition and Removal of Existing Pipework and StructuresWhere new pipelines are to be laid on the same alignment as existing pipelines being replaced, remove the redundant pipes and dispose of them in an approved manner. Follow required procedures for Asbestos Cement (AC) pipe removal.

Where the new pipeline is at a higher level than the existing pipeline, the existing pipeline may be left in place, provided the specified thickness of pipe underlay can be placed and compacted under the new pipeline. Seal all open ends of the abandoned existing pipeline with concrete to the approval of the Superintendent (fill pipe to prevent future collapse).

Carefully remove all pipes, fittings, valves, etc. nominated by the Superintendent for salvage and deliver them to the location nominated by the Superintendent.

44.8AS CONSTRUCTED INFORMATIONProvide as constructed information as appropriate for the following:-

pipeline alignment; maintenance structure; valve chamber locations; where other services cross the works; location of open unlined drains; location of all existing structures adjacent to the works; pond invert levels; tank floor levels; electrical circuit diagrams;Provide hand copies of field measurements to Superintendent prior to backfilling any corresponding pipeline sections.

Prior to issue of Certificate of Practical Completion, provide ‘As Constructed’ information in the following manner:

Two sets of marked up prints of the works. All deviations from the project drawings are to be marked and detailed clearly in red ink. Mark each drawing "As Constructed", and sign and date each drawing.



Field books and level books giving all relevant information completed by a licensed or engineering surveyor. All entries are to be neat, legible and in accordance with generally accepted survey practice. The Surveyor must sign and certify all books.

“As Constructed” drawings in electronic CAD format.Hand copies of field measurements to Superintendent prior to backfilling corresponding pipeline sections.

Provide CAD as constructed drawings, in Microstation dgn format or similar approved by the Superintendent of all ‘As Constructed Drawings’ Where applicable, the Superintendent will provide CAD copies of project drawings to the Contractor for use in production of “As Constructed” drawings.

AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGSProvide As Constructed drawings. Show information of building elements, plant, and equipment across all disciplines. Show co-ordinate dimensions where applicable.

Refer to the specific deliverables in the NTG Technical Drawings Part 1 – Requirements for Technical Records Management.pdf document. As Constructed includes and means the same as; works as executed, and as installed, and as built.


https://dipl.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-records/technical-records-application-building

https://dipl.nt.gov.au/infrastructure/technical-standards-guidelines-and-specifications/technical-records/technical-records-application-building


45 GRAVITY SEWER CONSTRUCTION

45.1GENERALThere is no utilities mains Gravity Sewer construction required within these works other than the required normal infrastructure for domestic piping and connection to the utilities service provider. Refer to requirements within the Hydraulics and Sanitary section(s) and Preliminary Section - Building Approvals.

Make allowance for length of services required and in reference to clause 40, Error: Reference source not found



46 SCHEDULES

46.1 GENERALThe following is a generic schedule for Buildings and may include several items that do not necessarily apply to the particular works under this contract. Reference shall be made to this generic schedule and the relevant technical specification clauses that reflect the works described on the drawings.

No order of precedence applies to the documents comprising in this Finishes Schedule. If there is a contradiction within the Finishes Schedule, the following rules apply

- The requirement that requires the higher standard of materials prevails.

- The requirement that requires the higher standard of workmanship prevails.

- The requirement that requires the most work prevails.

- The requirement that requires the higher capacity or higher performance prevails.

Obvious Work

This generic schedule, the technical specification & the drawings describe the Scope of Works in general terms. The contractor is deemed to have made all allowances for materials, plant, equipment, incidentals and obvious works necessary to complete the works as scheduled whether specifically described in the schedules or not.

46.2 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULEINTERIOR PAINT SYSTEM

Element Substrate Paint system

Walls (HMB) Concrete Block Wattyl ID Silky Satin Low VOC Arcrylic

Anti mould additives to all wet areas.

Roof Nom. 0.48BMT steel Colorbond Surmist

Ceiling Lining Nom. 0.48BMT steel Colorbond Surmist

Door Frames Zinc plated steel Wattyl Aquatrim Water-based Gloss Enamel

Door Leaf Solid core door Wattyl Aquatrim Water-based Gloss Enamel

Window Frames Aluminium Finish: Dulux Duralloy Powdercoat – Satin

Colour: Refer FINISHES SCHEDULES



EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEM

Element Substrate Paint system

Walls (HMB) Concrete Block Wattyl ID Silky Satin Low VOC Arcrylic

Anti mould additives to all wet areas.

Wall Cladding Colorbond sheeting Proprietary pre coated Colorbond

(HMB) Concrete Block Wattyl Solargard Stain Acrylic

Steelwork Primed steel Wattyl – 15 year warranty

Door Frames

Door Leaf

Zinc plated steel

Solid core door

Wattyl Aquatrim Water-based Gloss Enamel

Wattyl Aquatrim Water-based Gloss Enamel

Security Door Aluminium Dulux Duralloy Powdercoat – Satin

Colour: Black

Window Frames Aluminium Dulux Duralloy Powdercoat – Satin

Colour: Refer FINISHES SCHEDULE

Meter box Galvanised steel Proprietary pre coated

46.3 COLOUR SCHEDULECOLOURSPaint colours have been selected from the Wattyl Professional or ID range. Colour options change depending on the community and/ or resident and are outlined in the generic house drawings. The mix of selected colour options will be based on the existing community colours & determined in conjunction with the Principal & the community. Refer to the drawings

46.4 TILING SCHEDULEItem Propriety Item Colour

Floor Tiles – Wet areas 200 x 200mm fully Vitrified

Alternate colour scheme

CerAsia International

2Pramo – M – Mocha (Light Brown)

2Prabk – M – Black

Floor Tiles Grout – Wet areas

Flexible CTA Polyblend G10 with anti-mould additive

#24 Graphite Grey

Splashback Tiles - 200 x 200mm Gloss Ceramic (cut tiles as required to suit

Easy White



Kitchen installation)

Splashback Tiles Grout - Kitchen

Flexible CTA Polyblend G10 anti-mould additive

#21 Misty Grey

Waterproofing Membrane System

Type 3 Flexibility Class Membrane including Class 3 Bond Breaker

46.5 FLOORING SCHEDULEItem Propriety Item Finish

Concrete - Interior Parchem Clear- NITOFLOR 100

Honed Finish

Sealed

Concrete - Exterior Parchem Clear- NITOFLOR 130

Steel Trowel Finish

Sealed

Timber Decking D.A.R. Cabots Natural Decking Oil

Protect ends

46.6 PLUMBING HARDWARE SCHEDULELocation Item Proprietary Item

Breech pieces Purpose made stainless steel where taps are used

Stubs Plastic fixing stubs in wall to take fittings for installation of pipework for tapware or flick mixers

Hot & cold water pipework ‘Buteline’ Plastic

Wherever there is a penetration of wall linings

Cover plates Stainless steel flat cover plate or Domed (10mm rise) cover plate

Mini cocks For all flick mixers – installed on wall under fixture.



Location Item Proprietary Item

Shower – standard and disable

Grab rails Bradley 812-001 600mm Straight 38mm grabrail. Heavy Duty Stainless Steel.

All fixings to be stainless steel

Towel rails

Or used as grab rail for disabled fitout

Bradley 812-001 900mm Straight 38mm grabrail. Heavy Duty Stainless Steel.

Shelf Bradley surface mounted shelf 756-24

600mm wide x 95mm high x 150mm deep

Drill extra hole in centre of back flange for additional fixing

Mirror – standard and disabled

Bradley mirror (code: 748-1838) 950mm x 450mm

Polished stainless steel with 6 holes and 6 x chrome finished button capped fixings.

OR

Anti-tamper round head fixing

Shower soap holder Bradley surface mounted stainless steel shelf.

Model 755. 300mm long x 125mm deep x 95mm high

Drill extra hole in centre of back flange for additional fixing

Shower curtain rail (where there is a combined facility)

Eisegrip stainless steel shower curtain rails.

Right angle rail

Able: EGC2.100.25.SC – 1000mm x 1000mm (comes with vertical support.)

Disabled: EGC2.120.25.SC – 1200mm x 1200mm (comes with vertical support.)

OR

Bradley 953-CNR

Able: 1000mm x 1000mm x 550mm ceiling support

Disabled: 1200mm x 1200mm. Order the vertical support at 550mm long.

Wall and ceiling mounted. On wall, locate at 2150mm AFFL. Fix into ceiling using stainless



steel bolt through the ceiling with plate above the ceiling with locknut.

Shower curtain Statina – materialized plus ‘hookless’ Litchfield white – polyester – 1800mm wide x 1960mm long

Clothes hooks Galvins aluminium clothes hook.

Model no: HKHCALUM

Locate hooks on treated plywood backing boards as indicated on drawings

Toilet roll holder Metlam ML4135 stainless steel toilet roll holder

Shower seat – disabled only

Bradley shower seat

Model no: 9558-40 (960x406

Plastic laminate seat/stainless steel frame

Wall mounted

Toilet – standard and disabled

Grab rails Bradley 832-1426 (left hand side) or 832-1427 (right hand side) 870mm x 700mm cranked (45 degrees) 32mm diameter stainless steel grab rail.

AND/OR

Bradley 832-006 (left hand side) or 832-005 (right hand side) 950mm x 600mm (90 degree) 32mm diameter stainless steel grab rail

AND/OR

Bradley 812-001 300 straight 38mm diameter grab rail

AND/OR

Bradley 812-001 300mm straight 38mm diameter grab rail.

Heavy duty stainless steel.



47 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

47.1 AUSTRALIAN STANDARDS Use Standards, and their amendments, and their supplements, current 3 months before the date for the close of tenders, except where different editions, and amendments, and supplements, are required by statutory authorities, including, but not limited to, NATA and the National Construction Code including the Building Code of Australia.

Dates entered like this (R2013) indicate that a Standard was reviewed and re-issued unaltered in the year cited in the parentheses.

Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.

AS 1055 - Acoustics – Description and measurement of environmental noise

AS 1055.1 1997 - General procedures

AS 1055.2 1997 - Application to specific situations

AS 1056 series Storage water heaters

AS 1074 1989 Steel tubes & tubulars for ordinary services

AS/NZS 1080 - Timber – Methods of test

AS/NZS 1080.1 2012 - Moisture content

AS 1100 (set) - Technical drawing

AS 1110 - ISO metric hexagon bolts and screws

AS 1110.1 2015 - Product grades A and B - Bolts

AS 1110.2 2015 - Product grades A and B - Screws

AS 1111 - ISO metric hexagon bolts & screws

AS 1111.1 2015 - Product Grade C – Bolts

AS 1111.2 2015 - Product grade C - Screws

AS 1112 - ISO metric hexagon nuts

AS 1112.1 2015 - Style 1 – Product grades A and B

AS 1112.2 2015 - Style 2 - Product grades A and B

AS 1112.3 2015 - Product grade C

AS 1141 - Methods for sampling and testing aggregates

AS 1141.15 1999 - Flakiness index

AS 1141.22 2008 - Wet/dry strength variation

AS 1141.52 2008 - Unconfirmed cohesion of compacted pavement materials

AS 1160 1996 Bituminous emulsions for the construction and maintenance of pavements

AS/NZS 1163 2016 Cold-formed structural steel hollow sections

AS/NZS 1167 - Welding and brazing – filler metals

AS/NZS 1167.1 2005 - Filler metal for brazing and braze welding



Use Standards, and their amendments, and their supplements, current 3 months before the date for the close of tenders, except where different editions, and amendments, and supplements, are required by statutory authorities, including, but not limited to, NATA and the National Construction Code including the Building Code of Australia.


Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS/NZS 1170 - Structural design actions

AS/NZS 1170.0 2002 - General principles. (Including Amdt 1:2003, Amdt 2:2003, Amdt 3:2011, Amdt 4:2005, Amdt 5:2011, Supp 1:2002 (R2016)/Amdt 1:2003)

AS/NZS 1170.1 2002 (R2016)

- Permanent, imposed and other actions (Including Amdt 1:2005, Amdt 2:2009, Supp 1:2002(R2016) )

AS/NZS 1170.2 2011 (R2016)

- Wind actions (Including Amdt 1:2012(R2016), Amdt 2:2012(R2016), Amdt 3:2013(R2016), Amdt 4:2016(R2016) )

AS 1170.4 2007 - Earthquake actions in Australia (Including Amdt 1:2015, Supp 1:1993, Supp 1:1993/Amdt 1:1994)

AS 1171 1998 Non-destructive testing - Magnetic particle testing of ferromagnetic products, components and structures

AS 1172 - Water Closets (WC)

AS 1172.1 2005 - Pans

AS 1172.2 1999 - Cisterns

AS 1192 2004 Electroplated coatings – Nickel and chromium.

AS/NZS 1214 2016 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners (ISO metric coarse thread series) (ISO 10684:2004, MOD)

AS/NZS 1221 1997 Fire hose reels

AS 1229 2002 Laundry troughs and tubs

AS 1231 2000 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Anodic oxidation coatings

AS 1237 - Plain washers for metric bolts, screws and nuts for general purposes

AS 1237.1 2002 (R2015) - General plan (Including Amdt 1:2015)

AS 1237.2 2016 - Tolerances for fasteners - Washers for bolts, screws and nuts - Product grades A, C and F

AS/NZS 1252 - High strength steel fasteners for structural engineering - Bolts, nuts and washers

AS/NZS 1252.1 2016 - Technical requirements

AS/NZS 1252.2 2016 - Verification testing for bolt assemblies

AS 1275 1985 Metric screw threads for fasteners

AS 1284 - Electricity metering





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS 1284.1 2004 - General purpose induction watthour meters

AS 1288 2006 (R2016)

Glass in buildings - Selection and installation (Including Amdt 1:2008, Amdt 2:2011, Amdt 3:2016, Supp 1:2006)

AS 1289.3 - Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes – Soil classification tests

AS 1289.3.1.1 2009 - Determination of the liquid limit of a soil – Four point Casagrande method

AS 1289.3.3.1 2009 - Calculation of the plasticity index of a soil

AS 1289.3.4.1 2008 - Determination of the linear shrinkage of a soil – Standard method

AS 1289.5 - Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes - Soil compaction & density tests

AS 1289.5.1.1 2003 - Determination of the dry density/moisture content relation of a soil using standard compaction effort.

AS 1289.5.3.1 2004- Determination of the field density of a soil – Sand replacement method using a sand – cone pouring apparatus

AS 1289.5.4.1 2007 - Compaction control test – Dry density ratio, moisture variation and moisture ratio

AS 1289.5.5.1 1998 - Determination of the minimum and maximum dry density of a cohesionless material – Standard method

AS 1289.5.6.1 1998 - Compaction control test – Density index method for a cohesionless material

AS 1289.5.8.1 2007- Determination of field density and field moisture content of a soil using a nuclear surface moisture density gauge – Direct transmission mode

AS 1319 1994 Signs for the occupational environment

AS 1324 - Air filters for use in general ventilation and air conditioning

AS 1324.1 2001 - Application, performance and construction

AS 1324.2 2003 - Methods of test

AS/NZS 1328 - Glued laminated structural timber

AS/NZS 1328.1 1998 - Performance requirements and minimum production requirements (Including Amdt 1:2011)

AS/NZS 1328.2 1998 Guidelines for AS/NZS 1328: Part 1 for the selection, production and installation of glued laminated timber





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS 1345 1995 Identification of the contents of pipes, conduits and ducts

AS 1361 1995 Electric heat – exchange water heaters – For domestic applications

AS 1366 - Rigid cellular plastics sheets for thermal insulation

AS 1366.1 1992 - Rigid cellular polyurethane (RC/PUR) (Including Amdt 1:1992)

AS/NZS 1367 2007Coaxial cable and optical fibre systems for the RF distribution of analogue and digital television and sound signals in single and multiple dwelling installations

AS 1371 1973 Toilet seats of moulded plastics

AS 1379 2007 Specification and supply of concrete

AS 1385 2007 Textile floor coverings – Metric units and commercial tolerance for measurement

AS/NZS 1393 1996 (R2016) Coach screws – Metric series with ISO hexagon heads

AS 1397 2011Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip – Coatings of zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminium and magnesium (Including Amdt 1:2012)

AS/NZS 1427 1996 ISO metric machine screws (Including Amdt 1:1997)(Withdrawn but available)

AS 1428 - Design for access and mobility

AS 1428.1 2009 - General requirements for access – New building work

AS 1432 2004 Copper tubes for plumbing, gas fitting & drainage applications

AS 1443 2004 Carbon and carbon-manganese steel – Cold-finished bars

AS 1444 2007Wrought alloy steels – Standard, hardenability (H) series and hardened and tempered to designated mechanical properties

AS 1449 1994 Wrought alloy steels – Stainless and heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip (Available withdrawn)

AS 1450 2007 Steel tubes for mechanical purposes

AS/NZS 1477 2006 PVC pipes & fittings for pressure applications

AS 1478 - Chemical admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout

AS 1478.1 2000 - Admixtures for concrete.






AS 1530 - Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and structures

AS 1530.2 1993 (R2016) - Test for flammability of materials (Including Amdt 1:1993)

AS 1530.3 1999 (R2016)

- Simultaneous determination of ignitability, flame propagation, heat release and smoke release

AS 1530.4 2014 - Fire-resistance test of elements of construction

AS/NZS 1546 - On site domestic waste water treatment units

AS/NZS 1546.1 2008 - Septic tanks

AS/NZS 1547 2000 Onsite domestic wastewater management

AS/NZS 1554 - Structural steel welding

AS/NZS 1554.1 2014 - Welding of steel structures (Including Amdt 1:2015)

AS/NZS 1554.3 2014 - Welding of reinforcing steel

AS/NZS 1554.6 2012 - Welding stainless steels for structural purposes

AS 1562 - Design and installation of sheet roof and wall cladding

AS 1562.1 1992 (R2016)

- Metal (Including Amdt 1:1993, amdt 2:1995, Amdt 3:2012))

AS 1565 1996 Copper and copper alloys – Ingots and castingsAS 1566 1997 Copper and copper alloys – Rolled flat products

AS/NZS 1567 1997 Copper and copper alloys – Wrought rods, bars and sections

AS/NZS 1568 1998 Copper and copper alloys – Forging stock and forgings

AS/NZS 1571 1995 Copper – Seamless tubes for air-conditioning and refrigeration

AS/NZS 1595 1998 Cold-rolled, unalloyed, steel sheet and stripAS/NZS 1596 2008 The storage & handling of LP GasAS 1603 - Automatic fire detection and alarm systems AS 1603.2 1997 - Point type smoke detectorsAS 1603.5 1996 - Manual call pointsAS 1603.7 1996 - Optical beam smoke detectorsAS 1603.8 1996 - Multi-point aspirated smoke detectorsAS 1603.11 2010 - Visual warning devicesAS 1603.13 1998 - Duct sampling unitsAS 1604 - Specification for preservative treatment





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS 1604.1 2012 - Sawn & round timber (Including Amdt 1:2017)

AS/NZS 1604.2 2012 - Reconstituted wood-based products (Including Amdt 1:2017)

AS/NZS 1604.3 2012 - Plywood (Including Amdt 1:2017)AS/NZS 1604.4 2012 - Laminated veneer lumber (LVL) (Including Amdt 1:2017)AS/NZS 1604.5 2012 - Glued laminated timber products (Including Amdt 1:2017)AS 1627 - Metal finishing - Preparation and pretreatment of surfaces AS 1627.0 1997 - Method selection guideAS 1627.4 2005 - Abrasive blast cleaning of steelAS 1627.5 2003 - PicklingAS 1628 1999 Water supply – Metallic gate, globe and non-return valves

AS 1657 2013 Fixed platforms, walkways, stairways and ladders – Design, construction and installation (Including Amdt 1:2016)

AS 1665 2004 Welding of aluminium structuresAS 1668 - The use of ventilation and air-conditioning in buildingsAS/NZS 1668.1 2015 - Fire and smoke control in buildings

AS 1668.2 2012 - Mechanical ventilation in buildings (including Amdt 2:2016, Supp 1:2002(R2016))

AS 1668.4 2012 - Natural ventilation in buildings

AS 1670 - Fire detection, warning, control and intercom systems - System design, installation and commissioning

AS 1670.1 2004 - FireAS 1670.6 1997 - Smoke alarmsAS 1672 1997 Limes and limestones

AS 1672.1 1997 - Limes for building

AS/NZS 1677 - Refrigerating systems

AS/NZS 1677.2 1998 - Safety requirements for fixed applications

AS 1680 - Interior lighting

AS/NZS 1680.2.4 1997 - Industrial tasks and processes

AS 1682 - Fire dampers

AS 1682.1 1990 - Specification

AS 1682.2 1990 - Installation

AS 1684 - Residential timber-framed construction.

AS 1684.1 1999 - Design criteria (Including Amdt 1:2002)






AS 1684.2 2010 - Non-cyclonic areas (Including Amdt 1:2012, Amdt 2:2013, Supps)

AS 1684.3 2010 - Cyclonic areas (Including Supps)

AS 1720 - Timber structures

AS 1720.1 2010 - Design methods (Including Amdt 1:2010, Amdt 2:2011, Amdt 3:2015)

AS 1720.2 2006 - Timber properties (Including Amdt 1:2006)

AS 1720.5 2015 - Nailplated timber roof trusses

AS/NZS 1730 1996 Washbasins

AS/NZS 1734 1997 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate

AS/NZS 1748 - Timber – Solid – Stress graded for structural purposes

AS/NZS 1748.1 2011 - General requirements (Including Amdt 1:2012)

AS/NZS 1748.2 2011 - Qualification of grading method (Including Amdt 1:2012)

AS 1756 1999 Household sinks

AS 1769 1975 Welded stainless steel tubes for plumbing applications

AS 1789 2003 (R2017)

Electroplated zinc (electrogalvanized) coatings on ferrous articles (batch process)

AS 1810 1995 (R2016) Timber – Seasoned Cypress pine – Milled products

AS 1830 2007 Grey cast iron

AS/NZS 1841 - Portable fire extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.1 2007 - General requirements

AS/NZS 1841.2 2007 - Specific requirements for Water type extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.3 2007 - Specific requirements for Wet chemical type extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.4 2007 - Specific requirements for Foam type extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.5 2007 - Specific requirements for Powder type extinguishers

AS/NZS 1841.6 2007 - Specific requirements for Carbon dioxide type extinguishers

AS 1851 2012 Maintenance of fire protection systems and equipment (Including Amdt 1:2016)

AS/NZS 1859 - Reconstituted wood-based panels– Specifications

AS/NZS 1859.1 2004 - Particleboard (Including Amdt 1:2006, Amdt 2:2011)






AS/NZS 1859.2 2004 - Dry-processed fibreboard (Including Amdt 1:2006, Amdt 2:2006)

AS/NZS 1859.3 2005 - Decorative overlaid wood panels (Including Amdt 1:2009)

AS/NZS 1859.4 2004 - Wet-processed fibreboard

AS/NZS 1860 - Particle board flooring

AS/NZS 1860.1 2002 - Specifications (Including Amdt 1:2004, Amdt 2:2006)

AS/NZS 1860.2 2006 (R2016) - Installation (Including Amdt 1:2010)

AS/NZS 1865 1997 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Drawn wire, rod, bar and strip

AS/NZS 1866 1997 Aluminium & aluminium alloys – Extruded rod, bar, solid & hollow shapes

AS/NZS 1867 1997 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Drawn tubes

AS/NZS 1873 - Powder-actuated (PA) hand held fastening tools

AS/NZS 1873.4 2003 - Fasteners

AS 1884 1985 Floor coverings – Resilient sheet and tiles – Laying and maintenance practices

AS 1889 - PVC floor tiles

AS 1889.1 1984 - Semi-rigid (Available withdrawn)

AS 1889.2 1985 - Flexibile (Available withdrawn)

AS 1897 2016 Fasteners - Electroplated coatings

AS 1905 - Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant walls

AS 1905.1 2005 - Fire-resistant doorsets

AS 1905.2 2005 - Fire-resistant roller shutters

AS 1909 1984 Installation of timber doorsets

AS 1910 2004 Water supply – Float control valves for use in hot and cold water

AS 1926 - Swimming pool safety

AS 1926.1 2007 - Safety barriers for swimming pools

AS 2008 1997 Residual bitumen for pavements

AS/NZS 2023 1995 Baths for ablutionary purposes

AS 2032 2006 Installation of PVC pipe systems






AS 2047 2014 Windows and external glazed doors in buildings (Including Amdt 1:2016)

AS/NZS 2053 - Conduits and fittings for electrical installations

AS/NZS 2053.1 2001 (R2016) - General requirements

AS 2055 1977 Flexible PVC floor - covering

AS 2055.1 1985 PVC sheet floor – covering – Unbacked, flexible

AS 2082 2007 Timber – Hardwood – Visually stress graded for structural purposes

AS/NZS 2107 2016 Acoustics – Recommended design sound levels and reverberation times for building interiors

AS 2118 Series Automatic fire sprinkler systems

AS 2129 2000 Flanges for pipes, valves and fittings

AS 2150 2005 Hot mix asphalt – A guide to good practice

AS 2157 1997 Cutback bitumen

AS/NZS 2179 - Specifications for rainwater goods, accessories and fasteners

AS/NZS 2179.1 2014 - Metal shape or sheet rainwater goods, and metal accessories and fasteners

AS 2184 1985

Low voltage switchgear and controlgear – Moulded-case circuit-breakers for rated voltages up to and including 600 V a.c. and 250 V d.c (withdrawn but available) (see AS/NZS IEC 60947)

AS 2185 1978 Fibrous plasterboard (Available withdrawn)

AS 2187.2 2006 Explosives - Storage, transport and use - Use of explosives

AS/NZS 2201 - Intruder alarm systems

AS/NZS 2201.1 2007 - Client’s premises – Design, installation, commissioning and maintenance

AS/NZS 2201.3 1991 - Detection devices for internal use

AS/NZS 2201.4 1990 - Wire-free systems installed in client’s premises

AS/NZS 2201.5 2008 - Alarm transmission systems

AS/NZS 2208 1996 Safety glazing materials in buildings

AS/NZS 2269 - Plywood – Structural

AS/NZS 2269.0 2012 - Specifications (Including Amdt 1:2015)





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS/NZS 2269.1 2012 - Determination of structural properties - Test methods

AS/NZS 2269.2 2007 - Determination of structural properties - Evaluation methods

AS/NZS 2270 2006 Plywood and blockboard for interior use

AS/NZS 2271 2004 (R2016)

Plywood and blockboard for exterior use (Including Amdt 1:2006)

AS 2293 - Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings

AS 2293.1 2005 - System design, installation and operation

AS/NZS 2293.2 1995 - Inspection and maintenance

AS 2293.3 2005 - Emergency escape luminaires and exit signs

AS/NZS 2311 2009 Guide to the painting of buildings

AS/NZS 2312 - Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by use of protective coatings

AS/NZS 2312.1 2014 - Paint coatings

AS/NZS 2312.2 2014 - Hot dip galvanizing

AS 2329 1999 Mastic adhesives for fixing wallboards (Withdrawn but available)

AS 2334 1980 (R2015) Steel nails – Metric series

AS 2358 1990 Adhesives – For fixing ceramic tiles

AS 2419 Series Fire hydrant installations

AS 2423 2002 Coated steel wire fencing products for terrestrial, aquatic and general use.

AS 2436 2010 (R2016)

Noise control on construction, demolition and maintenance sites

AS 2439 - Perforated plastics drainage and effluent pipe and fittings

AS 2439.1 2007 - Perforated drainage pipe and associated fittings

AS 2439.2 2007 - Perforated effluent pipe and associated fittings for sewerage applications

AS 2441 2005 Installation of fire hose reels

AS/NZS 2455 - Textile floor coverings – Installation practice

AS/NZS 2455.1 2007 - General

AS/NZS 2455.2 2007 - Carpet tiles

AS/NZS 2588 1998 Gypsum plasterboard





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS/NZS 2589 2007 Gypsum linings – Application and finishing

AS 2590 1983 Glass fibre reinforced gypsum plasterboard (Available withdrawn)

AS 2592 1983 Gypsum plaster for building purposes

AS 2601 2001 The demolition of structures

AS 2625 - Mechanical vibration – Evaluation of machine vibration by measurements on non-rotating parts

AS 2625.1 2003 - General guidelines (see ISO 20816.1:2016)

AS 2625.4 2003- Industrial machines with nominal power above 15kW and nominal speeds between 120 r/min and 15 000 r/min when measured in situ (see ISO 10816.3:2009)

AS 2634 1983Chemical plant equipment made from glass-fibre reinforced plastics (GRP) based on thermosetting resins (Obsolescent)

AS 2688 1984 Timber doors

AS 2689 1984 Timber door sets

AS 2698 - Plastic pipes and fittings for irrigation and rural applications

AS 2698.2 2000 - Polyethylene rural pipe

AS/NZS 2699 - Built-in components for masonry construction

AS/NZS 2699.1 2000 - Wall ties

AS/NZS 2699.2 2000 - Connectors and accessories

AS/NZS 2699.3 2002 - Lintels and shelf angles (durability requirements)

AS 2700 2011 Colour standards for general purposes

AS/NZS 2712 2007 Solar and heat pump water heaters – Design and construction

AS/NZS 2728 2013Prefinished/ prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior building applications-Performance requirements

AS 2753 1985 Adhesives – Mastic – For bonding gypsum plaster linings to wood and metal framing members (Available withdrawn)

AS/NZS 2754 - Adhesives for timber and timber products

AS/NZS 2754.1 2016 - Adhesives for manufacture of plywood and laminated veneer lumber (LVL)

AS/NZS 2754.2 1991 - Polymer emulsion adhesives (withdrawn but available)





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS/NZS 2758 - Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes

AS/NZS 2758.2 2009 - Aggregates for sprayed bituminous surfacing

AS 2784 2002 Endless wedge belt and V-belt drives

AS/NZS 2785 2000 Suspended ceilings – Design and installation

AS 2796 - Timber – Hardwood – Sawn and milled products

AS 2796.1 1999 (R2016) - Product specification

AS 2796.2 2006 (R2016) - Grade description

AS 2832.1 2015 Cathodic protection of metals - Pipes and cables

AS 2834 1995 Computer accommodation

AS 2837 1986 Wrought alloy steels – Stainless steel bars and semi-finished products (Available withdrawn)

AS 2858 2008 Timber – Softwood – Visually stress graded for structural purposes

AS 2870 2011 Residential slabs and footings

AS 2885 Series Pipelines- Gas and liquid petroleum

AS/NZS 2904 1995 Damp-proof courses and flashings (Including Amdt 1:1998; Amdt 2:2013)

AS/NZS 2908 - Cellulose-cement products

AS/NZS 2908.2 2000 - Flat sheets

AS 2913 2000 Evaporative air-conditioning equipment

AS 2916 2007 Symbols for graphic representation of coal seams and associated strata

AS/NZS 2924 - High pressure decorative laminates

AS/NZS 2924.1 1998 - Sheets made from thermosetting resins – Classification and specifications

AS 2946 1991 (R2013)

Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface requirements for physical compatibility

AS/NZS 3000 2007Electrical installations – (known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring Rules) (Including Amdt 1:2009; Amdt 2:2012)

AS/NZS 3008.1 - Electrical installations – Selection of cables – Cables for alternating voltages up to and including 0.6/1 kV





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS/NZS 3008.1.1 2009 - Typical Australian installation conditions.

AS/NZS 3080 2003 Telecommunications installations – Generic cabling for commercial premises (ISO/IEC 11801:2002, MOD)

AS/NZS 3084 2003 Telecommunications installations – Telecommunications pathways and spaces for commercial buildings

AS/NZS 3085.1 2004 Telecommunication installations – Administration of communications cabling systems – Basic requirements

AS/NZS 3111 2009 Approval and test specifications – Miniature overcurrent circuit-breakers

AS/NZS 3133 2008 Approval and test specifications – Air-breaks switches

AS/NZS 3190 2011 Approval and test specifications – Residual current devices (current-operated earth-leakage devices)

AS/NZS 3350.2.35 1999 Safety of household and similar electrical appliances –

Particular requirements – Instantaneous water heaters

AS/NZS 3439 - Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies

AS/NZS 3439.1 2002 - Type-tested and partially type- tested assemblies

AS/NZS 3439.3 2002

- Particular requirements for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies intended to be installed in places where unskilled persons have access for their use – Distribution boards

AS/NZS 3500 - Plumbing and Drainage

AS/NZS 3500.0 2003 - Glossary of terms

AS/NZS 3500.1 2015 - Water services.

AS/NZS 3500.2 2015 - Sanitary plumbing and drainage.

AS/NZS 3500.3 2015 - Stormwater drainage.

AS/NZS 3500.4 2015 - Heated water services.

AS/NZS 3500.5 2000 - Domestic installations

AS/NZS 3504 2006 Fire blankets

AS 3553 1988Adhesive for floor and wall applications – Resilient vinyl, linoleum and rubber sheet and tiles – Interior and exterior use

AS 3566 - Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries

AS 3566.1 2002 (R2015) - General requirements and mechanical properties






AS 3566.2 2002 - Corrosion resistance requirements (withdrawn but available)

AS 3588 1996 Shower bases and shower modules

AS 3600 2009 Concrete structures

AS 3610 1995 Formwork for concrete

AS 3610.1 2010 - Documentation and surface finish.

AS 3623 1993 Domestic metal framing

AS 3660 - Termite management

AS 3660.1 2014 – New building work

AS 3660.2 2000 - In and around existing buildings and structures - Guidelines

AS 3660.3 2014 - Assessment criteria for termite management systems

AS/NZS 3666 - Air-handling and water systems of buildings – Microbial control

AS/NZS 3666.1 2011 - Design, installation and commissioning

AS/NZS 3666.2 2011 - Operation and maintenance

AS/NZS 3666.3 2011 - Performance-based maintenance of cooling water systems

AS/NZS 3666.4 2011 - Performance-based maintenance of air handling systems (ducts and components)

AS/NZS 3678 2016 Structural steel – Hot-rolled plates, floorplates and slabs

AS/NZS 3679 - Structural Steel

AS/NZS 3679.1 2016 - Hot-rolled bars and sections

AS/NZS 3679.2 2016 - Welded I sections

AS 3688 2005 Water supply – Metallic fittings and end connectors

AS 3700 2011 Masonry structures (Including Amdt 1:2012; Amdt 2:2015)

AS 3705 2012 Geotextiles – Identification, marking and general data

AS 3715 2002 Metal finishing – Thermoset powder coating for architectural applications of aluminium and aluminium alloys

AS 3740 2010 Waterproofing of domestic wet areas.

AS/NZS 3750 - Paints for steel structures

AS/NZS 3750.9 2009 - Organic zinc-rich primer





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS 3786 2014 Smoke alarms

AS 3799 1998 Liquid membrane-forming curing compounds for concrete

AS 3814 2009 Industrial and commercial gas-fired appliances

AS/NZS 3823 - Performance of electrical appliances – Air conditioners and heat pumps – Test methods.

AS/NZS 3823.1.1 1998 - Non-ducted air conditioners and heat pumps – Testing and rating for performance

AS 3850 2003 Tilt-up concrete construction

AS 3894 - Site testing of protective coatings

AS 3894.10 2002 - Inspection report - Daily surface and ambient conditions

AS 3894.11 2002 - Equipment report

AS 3894.12 2002 - Inspection report - Coating

AS 3894.13 2002 - Inspection report - Daily

AS 3894.14 2002 - Inspection report - Daily painting

AS 3942 1993 Quality control – Variables chart - Guide

AS/NZS 3947 - Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear

AS/NZS 3947.3 2001 - Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units (See AS/NZS IEC 60947.3:2015)

AS/NZS 3947.4.3 2000- Contactors and motor starters – A.C. semiconductor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads (See AS/NZS IEC 60947.4.3:2015)

AS 3958 - Ceramic tiles

AS 3958.1 2007 - Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles

AS 3958.2 1992 - Guide to the selection of a ceramic tiling system

AS 3959 2009 Construction of buildings in bushfire prone areas (Includes Amdt 1:2009; Amdt 2:2011; Amdt 3:2011)

AS 3972 2010 General purpose and blended cements

AS 3996 2006 Access covers and grates

AS 3999 2015 Bulk thermal insulation – Installation

AS 4041 2006 Pressure piping

AS 4072.1 2005 (R2016)

Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant separating elements - Service penetrations and control joints (Includes Amdt 1:2006)






AS 4100 1998 (R2016)

Steel structures (Includes Amdt 1:2012(R2016)) (See AS/NZS 5131)

AS 4118 Series Fire Sprinkler Systems

AS 4145 - Locksets and hardware for doors and windows

AS 4145.1 2008 Glossary of terms and rating system

AS 4145.2 2008 Mechanical locksets for doors and windows in buildings

AS 4145.3 2001 Mechanical locksets for windows in buildings

AS 4145.4 2002 Padlocks

AS 4155 - Test methods for general access floors

AS 4155.6 1993 - Test for floor resistance for electrostatic control

AS 4178 1994 Electromagnetic door holders

AS/NZS 4200 - Pliable building membranes and underlays

AS/NZS 4200.1 2017 - Materials

AS/NZS 4200.2 2017 - Installation

AS 4254 - Ductwork for air handling systems in buildings

AS 4254.1 2012 – Part 1 Flexible duct

AS 4254.2 2012 - Rigid duct

AS 4312 2008 Atmospheric corrosivity zones in Australia

AS 4373 2007 Pruning of amenity trees

AS/NZS 4389 2015 Roof safety mesh

AS/NZS 4402 2015 Hexagon head tapping screws

AS/NZS 4403 2015 Slotted pan head tapping screws

AS/NZS 4404 2015 Slotted countersunk (flat) head tapping screws (common head style)

AS/NZS 4405 2015 Slotted raised countersunk (oval) head tapping screws (common head style)

AS/NZS 4406 2015 Cross recessed pan head tapping screws

AS/NZS 4407 2015 Cross recessed countersunk (flat) head tapping screws (common head style)

AS/NZS 4408 2015 Cross recessed raised countersunk (oval) head tapping screws

AS/NZS 4409 2015 Hexagon washer head tapping screws





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS/NZS 4410 2015 Hexagon flange head tapping screws

AS 4419 2003 Soils for landscaping & garden use

AS 4428 - Fire detection, warning, control and intercom systems – Control and indicating equipment

AS 4428.1 1998 - Fire

AS 4440 2004 Installation of nailplated timber roof trusses

AS/NZS 4455 - Masonry units, pavers, flags and segmental retaining wall units

AS/NZS 4455.1 2008 - Masonry units

AS/NZS 4455.2 2010 - Pavers and flags

AS/NZS 4455.3 2008 - Segmental retaining wall units

AS 4459 - Methods of sampling and testing ceramic tiles

AS 4506 2005 Metal finishing – Thermoset powder coatings

AS/NZS 4534 2006 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire

AS 4586 2004 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials

AS/NZS 4600 2005 Cold-formed steel structures (Including Amdt 1:2010; Supp 1:1998)

AS 4654 - Waterproofing membrane systems for exterior use – Above ground

AS 4654.1 2009 - Materials

AS 4654.2 2009 - Design and installation

AS 4662 2003 Ceramic Tiles – Definitions, classification, characteristics and marking

AS/NZS 4663 2004 Slip resistance measurement of existing pedestrian surfaces

AS/NZS 4671 2001 Steel reinforcing materials

AS/NZS 4680 2006 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles

AS 4785 - Timber – Softwood – Sawn and milled products

AS 4785.1 2002 (R2016) - Product specification

AS 4785.2 2002 (R2016) - Grade description






AS 4785.3 2002 (R2016) - Timber for furniture components

AS 4806 - Closed circuit television (CCTV)

AS 4806.2 2006 - Application guidelines

AS 4806.4 2008 - Remote video

AS 4809 2003 Copper pipe and fittings – Installation and commissioning

AS/NZS 4859 - Materials for the thermal insulation of buildings

AS/NZS 4859.1 2002 - General criteria and technical provisions (Including Amdt 1:2006)

AS 4970 2009 Protection of trees on development sites (Including Amdt 1:2010)

AS 4992 - Ceramic tiles

AS 4992.1 2006 - Grouts and adhesives – Terms, definitions and specifications for adhesives.

AS 4992.2 2006 - Grouts and adhesives – Test methods for adhesives (ISO 13007-2:2005, MOD)

AS 4992.3 2004 - Products for installation – Grouts: Definitions and specifications

AS 4992.4 2004 - Products for installation – Grouts: Test methods

AS/NZS 5000 - Electric cables – Polymeric insulated

AS/NZS 5000.1 2005 - For working voltage up to and including 0.6/1 (1.2) kV

AS 5039 2008 Security screen doors and security window grilles

AS 5040 2003 Installation of security screen doors and window grilles

AS/NZS 5131 2016 Structural steelwork - Fabrication and erection

AS 5488 2013 Classification of subsurface utility information (SUI)

AS 5601 2004 Gas installations

AS 7240 - Fire detection and alarm systems

AS 7240.2 2004 - Control and indicating equipment (ISO 7240-2:2003, MOD)

AS 7240.5 2004 - Point type heat detectors (ISO 7240-5:2003. MOD)

AS 7240.11 2008 - Manual call points (ISO 7240-11:2005, MOD)

AS 7240.21 2006 - Routing equipment

AS/NZS60269 - Low-voltage fuses





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS/NZS 60269.1 2005 - General requirements

AS/NZS 60269.2.0 2005 - Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by

authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)

AS/NZS 60269.2.1 2005

- Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application) – Section I to VI: Example of types of standardized fuses

AS 60529 2004 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

AS/NZS IEC 60947 - Low-voltage switchgear and control gear

AS 60947.1 2015 - General rules

AS 60947.2 2015 - Circuit-breakers

AS/NZS IEC 60947.3 2015 - Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-

combination units (See AS/NZS 3947.3:2001)

AS/NZS IEC 60947.4.1 2015 - Contactors and motor-starters – Electromechanical

contactors and motor-starters

AS/NZS IEC 60947.4.2 2015 - Contactors and motor-starters – A.C. semiconductor

motor controllers and starters

AS/NZS IEC 60947.4.3

2015 - Contactors and motor starters – A.C. semiconductor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads (see AS/NZS 3947.4.3:2000)

AS/NZS IEC 60947.5.1

2015 - Control circuit devices and switching elements – Electromechanical control circuit devices

AS/NZS 61048 2002 Auxiliaries for lamps – Capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent and other discharge lamp circuits – General safety requirements

AS/NZS 61558.1 2008 Safety of power transformers, power supplies and reactors and similar products – General requirements and test (IEC 61558-1 Ed2, Mod)

AS B149 1956 Unifid machine screws and nuts (Available withdrawn)

AS B194 1970 Tapping and metallic drive screws (Available as obsolescent)

AS CA27 1959 Internal plastering on solid background (Available withdrawn)

AS/NZS CISPR 14

- Electromagnetic Compatibility – Requirements for household appliances, electrical tools and similar apparatus





Entries in Times New Roman italics indicate Standards not cited in this document but which may be useful references.AS/NZS CISPR 14.1

2013 - Emission

AS/NZS CISPR 14.2

2015 - Immunity - Product family standard

AS HB50 2004 Glossary of building terms

AS ISO 7.1 2008 Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads – Dimensions, tolerances and designation

AS ISO 7.2 2008 Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads – Verification by means of limit gauges

AS/NZS ISO 10012

2004 Measurement management systems – Requirements for measurement processes and measuring equipment

47.2 BRITISH STANDARDSBS 1711 1975 Specification for solid rubber flooring

BS 7385.2 1993 Evaluation and measurement for vibration in buildings - Guide to damage levels from groundborne vibration

BS 8313 1997 Code of practice for accommodation of building services in ducts

BS EN 548 2011 Resilient floor coverings. Specification for plain and decorative linoleum

BS EN 593 2009 Industrial valves. Metallic butterfly valves

BS EN 650 1997Resilient floor coverings. Polyvinyl chloride floor coverings on jute backing or on polyester felt backing or on polyester felt with polyvinyl chloride backing. Specification

BS EN 651 2011 Resilient floor coverings. Polyvinyl chloride floor coverings with foam layer. Specification

BS EN 688 2011 Resilient floor coverings. Specification for cork linoleum

BS EN 1817 2010 Resilient floor coverings. Specification for homogeneous and heterogeneous smooth rubber floor coverings

BS EN 12104 2000 Resilient floor coverings. Cork floor tiles. Specification

BS EN 12199 2010 Resilient floor coverings. Specifications for homogenous and heterogeneous relief rubber floor coverings

BS EB 14411 2006 Ceramic tiles. Definitions, classification, characteristics and marking

BS ISO 4866 2010 Mechanical vibration and shock vibration of fixed structures. Guidelines for the measurement of vibrations and evaluation



of their effects on structures

47.3 INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS

ISO 5135 1997Acoustics - Determination of sound power levels of noise from air-terminal devices, air-terminal units, dampers and valves by measurement in a reverberation room

ISO 10816.3 2009

Mechanical vibration – Evaluation of machine vibration by measurements on non-rotating parts - Industrial machines with nominal power above 15kW and nominal speeds between 120 r/min and 15 000 r/min when measured in situ (see AS.2625.4)

ISO 20186.1 2016Mechanical vibration – Evaluation of machine vibration by measurements on non-rotating parts - General guidelines (see AS 2625.1))

47.4 AUSTRALIAN PAINT APPROVAL SCHEME (APAS) SPECIFICATION NUMBERS

0155 Thermosetting Powder Coatings

0155/2 Exterior grade thermosetting powder coating

2911 Polyurethane coatings for the protection of steel

2916 Organic zinc rich coating for protection of steel

2916/1 - Primers

2916/2 - Durable one coat single pack

47.5 OTHER DOCUMENTSAAMA 800 2010 Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealant.

AFCAM/AREMA 1990Code of Good Practice for the Reduction of Emissions of Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC’s), R11 and R12 in Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Applications

ANSI/ASHRAE 70 2006 (RA2011)

Method of testing the performance of air outlets and air inlets

AS/ACIF S009 2006 Installation requirements for customer cabling (Wiring Rules)

ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

API 5L 2007 Specification for Line Pipe

Building Note No.19 1997 Protection of Buildings From Termite Attack

DCI 12-01 2012 Technical Directive – Vapour Barriers

SAA HB 29 2007 Telecommunications cabling handbook

SAA HB 40 - The Australian refrigeration and air-conditioning code of good practice

SAA HB 40.1 - Reduction of emissions of fluorocarbon refrigerants in



commercial and industrial refrigeration and air-conditioning applications

SAA HB 40.2 2001- Reduction of emissions of fluorocarbons in residential

air-conditioning applications

SAA HB 252 2007 Communications cabling manual, module 3: Residential communications cabling handbook

SAA/SNZ HB 32 1995 (R2016)

Control of microbial growth in air-handling and water systems of buildings

SAE J513 1999 Refrigeration Tube Fittings – General Specifications

Woolmark Specification CP 4

- Insect Resistance

WTIA TN16 1985 Welding Stainless Steels (AWRA Technical Note 16)


NORTHERN TERRITORY CLIMATE ZONES TABLE

48 NORTHERN TERRITORY CLIMATE ZONES TABLENORTHERN TERRITORY CLIMATE ZONES TABLE

NTCZ 01 NTCZ 02 NTCZ 03 NTCZ 04 NTCZ 05

Are

as s

outh

of,

and

incl

udin

g, T

enna

nt C

reek

Are

as n

orth

of T

enna

nt

Cre

ek a

nd s

outh

of a

nd

incl

udin

g K

athe

rine,

and

ar

eas

mor

e th

an 5

0 km

from

Are

as n

orth

of K

athe

rine

and

area

s be

twee

n 10

km

an

d 50

km

from

the

coas

t or

tidal

est

uarie

s

Are

as le

ss th

an 1

0 km

from

th

e co

ast o

r tid

al e

stua

ries

Are

as in

side

bui

ldin

gs

ISO 9223

Atmospheric Corrosivity Classification

3 4 5 5 2

AS 1170 Wind Region A4 B B & C C n/a

AS 1192

Service Condition Category

2 3 4 5 n/a

Corrosion Category B C & F D E C

AS 1231 Thickness Grade AA15 AA25 AA25 AA25

AA10 Low airborne moisture

levels

AA15 High airborne moisture

levels

AS/NZS 2312

Climate Category B C & F F E & F n/aAS 2423

AS/NZS 4534

AS 2699 Durability Classification

R1 (Green mark)

R2 (Yellow mark)

R3 (Red mark)

R4 (White or blue mark)

R1 (Green mark)

AS 3566.2

Corrosion Resistance Class

3 4 4 4 2

AS 3715

Service Condition Category

3 4 5 5 n/a

Atmospheric Corrosivity Classification

3 4 5 5 n/a


NORTHERN TERRITORY CLIMATE ZONES TABLE
